WO2000071564A2 - Isolated nucleic acids of the p-hyde family, p-hyde proteins, and methods of inducing susceptibility to induction of cell death in cancer - Google Patents

Isolated nucleic acids of the p-hyde family, p-hyde proteins, and methods of inducing susceptibility to induction of cell death in cancer Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2000071564A2
WO2000071564A2 PCT/US2000/011456 US0011456W WO0071564A2 WO 2000071564 A2 WO2000071564 A2 WO 2000071564A2 US 0011456 W US0011456 W US 0011456W WO 0071564 A2 WO0071564 A2 WO 0071564A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
hyde
nucleic acid
cells
protein
polypeptide
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2000/011456
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2000071564A3 (en
WO2000071564A8 (en
Inventor
Mitchell S. Steiner
Chiang Wang
Augustinus Rinaldy
Rema Menon
Original Assignee
The University Of Tennessee Research Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US09/499,817 external-priority patent/US7043009B1/en
Application filed by The University Of Tennessee Research Corporation filed Critical The University Of Tennessee Research Corporation
Priority to JP2000619819A priority Critical patent/JP2003529321A/en
Priority to EP00953630A priority patent/EP1328151A4/en
Priority to AU66046/00A priority patent/AU769889B2/en
Priority to MXPA01010890A priority patent/MXPA01010890A/en
Priority to CA002371828A priority patent/CA2371828A1/en
Publication of WO2000071564A2 publication Critical patent/WO2000071564A2/en
Publication of WO2000071564A8 publication Critical patent/WO2000071564A8/en
Publication of WO2000071564A3 publication Critical patent/WO2000071564A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/46Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates
    • C07K14/47Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals
    • C07K14/4701Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals not used
    • C07K14/4747Apoptosis related proteins
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/02Antineoplastic agents specific for leukemia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2799/00Uses of viruses
    • C12N2799/02Uses of viruses as vector
    • C12N2799/021Uses of viruses as vector for the expression of a heterologous nucleic acid
    • C12N2799/022Uses of viruses as vector for the expression of a heterologous nucleic acid where the vector is derived from an adenovirus

Definitions

  • This invention provides isolated nucleic acids of p-Hyde genes, proteins, analogs, fragments, mimetics, mutants, synthetics, and variants thereof of the p-Hyde family. This invention is directed to a method of inducing susceptibility to apoptosis with p-Hyde, a method of suppressing tumor growth with p-Hyde, and a method of treating a subject with cancer with p-Hyde alone or in combination with radiation, chemotherapy, or UV mimetic drugs.
  • Prostate cancer is the most common malignancy in men with over 317,000 new cases and the second leading cause of male cancer deaths in the United States (Boring et al., 1993; Steiner et. al, 1 95).
  • the molecular mechanisms responsible for the development, progression, and metastasis of prostate cancer remain largely unknown. Up to 20% of prostate cancers occur in men under the age of 65 years of age (Silverberg, 1986) suggesting that prostate carcinogenesis is not only associated with aging, but also to hereditary factors (Silverberg, 1987; McLellan and Norman, 1995; Carter et al., 1992).
  • prostate cancer formation is a multistep process involving tumor initiation, promotion, conversion, and progression (Carter et al., 1990f Sandberg, 1992). This process is driven by chromosomal instability, spontaneous mutations, and carcinogen induced genetic and epigenetic changes. Chromosomal instability leads to the total or partial gain or loss of chromosomes, translocations, and other abnormalities. Spontaneous mechanisms are age-related and include activation of oncogenes or inactivation of tumor suppressor genes by genetic mutations.
  • mutations result in the misincorporation of nucleotides during DNA replication of the coding region, alteration of the intron-exon junction sequences affecting the splicing mechanism, and aberrations of regulatory sequences changing the control of critical genes.
  • mutations escape genetic surveillance by a battery of DNA repair mechanisms and its associated gene products, such as p53 (Effert et al., 1992, Isaacs et al, 1 91 ; Mellon et al , 1992) and p2t (El-Deiry et al., 1994) and PCNA (Te pleton et al., 1996).
  • Carcinogen-induced genetic and epigenetic changes initiate tumors as a consequence of the direct damaging effects of carcinogenic agents of the DNA altering gene expression. Tumor initiation is subsequently followed by tumor promotion as affected cells have selective reproductive and clonal expansion capabilities through altered signaling transduction and proliferation responses to growth factors, resistance to cytotoxicity, and deregulation of termmal differentiation (Yuspa and Poi ⁇ er, 1988; einstein, 1987). Finally, tumor promotion is succeeded by other genetic mutational events that lead to loss of hormone sensitivity, increased cell motiJity, invasion, alterations in programmed cell death and metastasis.
  • the initiation and progression of cancer is a multistep process whereby genetic alterations or mutations of critical genes ultimately dictate defined cell phenotypes which differ in regard to many important cellular activities including cell proliferation, differentiation, and programmed cell death.
  • the exact mutational events responsible for the multistep progression of prostate cancer is unknown.
  • a better understanding of the molecular mechanisms responsible for prostate cancer may lead to new therapies to combat, and perhaps, to even prevent prostate cancer
  • the present invention provides isolated nucleic acids encoding P-Hyde genes of tire p-Hyde family.
  • the p-Hyde gene as shown herein is associated with: (1) the regression of tumor growth in vivo (2) the induction to susceptibility to apoptosis caused by UV or chemotherapy induced DNA damage, and (3) prevention of DNA repair with the upregulation of apoptosis as the result of UV da age and the failure to repair DNA.
  • This invention provides a novel class of genes which act as inhibitor of a DNA repair enzyme and induce susceptibility of cancer cells to cell death. Also, this invention provides isolated nucleic acids which encodes a mammalian p-Hyde protein which induce susceptibility of a cancer cell to cell death, including allelic, analogs, fragments, mimetics, mutants, synthetics, or variants tliereof. This invention provides an isolated nucleic acids which encodes a human p-Hyde protein which induces susceptibility of a cancer cell to cell death, including allelic, analogs, fragments, mimetics, mutants, synthetics, or variants thereof.
  • nucleic acid which has the nucleotide sequence as shown SEQ ID NO: 1 , SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO.5, SEQ ID NO:7 or SEQ ID NO:9.
  • nucleic acid molecule which encodes a fragment of a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO 4, SEQ ID NO 6, SEQ ID NO 8 or SEQ ID NO: 10, the fragment including at least 15 (25, 30, 50, 60, or 63) contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO 2, SEQ ID NO 4, SEQ ID NO 6, SEQ ID NO 8 or SEQ ID NO 10.
  • nucleic acid molecule having the nucleotide sequence which is at least about 82%, 84%, 85%, 87%, 90%, 92%, 95%, or 98% identical to the nucleic acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO. 1 , SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO:5, SEQ ID NO:7 or SEQ ID NO: 9.
  • nucleic acid molecule which encodes a naturally occurring allelic variant of a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO 4, SEQ ID NO 6, SEQ ID NO 8, or SEQ ID NO 10 wherein the nucleic acid molecule hybridizes to a nucleic acid molecule comprising SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO 4, SEQ ID NO 6, SEQ ID NO 8 or SEQ ID NO 10 or the complement thereof under stringent conditions.
  • isolated p-Hyde proteins having an amino acid sequence that is at least about 82%. 84%, 85%, 87%, 90%, 95%, or 98% identical to the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO:5, SEQ ID NO:7 or SEQ ID NO 9.
  • an isolated p-Hyde protein protein which is encoded by a nucleic acid molecule having a nucleotide sequence that is at least about 65%, preferably 75%, 80%, 85%, or 95% identical to SEQ ID NO: _ , SEQ TD NO: 3, SEQ ID NO:5, SEQ ID NO:7 or SEQ ID NO 9; and an isolated p-Hyde protein protein which is encoded by a nucleic acid molecule having a nucleotide sequence which hybridizes under stringent hybridization conditions to a nucleic acid molecule having the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO.5, SEQ ID NO:7 or SEQ ID NO 9, or the complement thereof.
  • the p-Hyde protein of the present invention can be operably linked to a non- p-Hyde polypeptide (e.g., heterologous amino acid sequences) to form p-Hydc fusion proteins.
  • a non- p-Hyde polypeptide e.g., heterologous amino acid sequences
  • This invention provides a vector comprising the isolated nucleic acid encoding P-Hyde gene.
  • This invention provides a replication-defective recombinant E1/ ⁇ 3 deleted adenovirus containing a truncated RSV promoter and the P-Hyde cDNA gene (AdRSVpHyde).
  • This invention provides an oligonucleotide of at least 15 nucleotides capable of specifically hybridizing with a sequence of nucleotides present within a nucleic acid which encodes the p-Hyde, or a sequence which is complementary to the nucleic acid which encodes the p-Hyde.
  • This invention provides an antisense molecule, triplex oligonucleotide, or ribozyme which is capable of specifically hybridizing with the isolated nucleic acid encoding p-Hyde.
  • This invention provides a method for producing a polypeptide which comprises growing the host vector system under suitable conditions permitting production of the polypeptide and recovering the polypeptide so produced.
  • the method of obtaining a polypeptide in purified form comprises: (a) introducing the vector into a suitable host cell; (b) culturing the resulting cell so as to produce the polypeptide; (c) recovering the polypeptide produced in step (b); and (d) purifying the polypeptide so recovered.
  • This invention provides a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence of a p-Hyde.
  • This invention provides a fusion protein or chimeric comprising the polypeptide.
  • This invention provides an antibody which specifically binds to the polypeptide.
  • This invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising an amount of the polypeptide and a pharmaceutically effective carrier or diluent.
  • This invention provides a method for determining whether a subject carries a mutation in the p-Hyde gene which comprises: (a) obtaining an appropriate nucleic acid sample from the subject; and (b) determining whether the nucleic acid sample from step (a) is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde so as to thereby determine whether a subject carries a mutation in the p-Hyde gene.
  • the nucleic acid sample in step (a) comprises mRNA corresponding to the transcript of DNA encoding a mutant p-Hyde
  • the determining of step (b) comprises: (i) contacting the mRNA with the oligonucleotide under conditions permitting binding of the mRNA to the oligonucleotide so as to form a complex; (ii) isolating the complex so formed; and (iii) identifying the mRNA in the isolated complex so as to thereby determine whether the mRNA is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde.
  • This invention provides a method for screening a tumor sample from a human subject for a somatic alteration in a p-Hyde gene in said tumor which comprises gene comparing a first sequence selected form the group consisting of a p-Hyde gene from said tumor sample, p-Hyde RNA from said tumor sample and p-Hyde cDNA made from mRNA from said tumor sample with a second sequence selected from the group consisting of p-Hyde gene from a nontumor sample of said subject, p-Hyde RNA from said nontumor sample and p-Hyde cDNA made from mRNA from said nontumor sample, wherein a difference in the sequence of the p-Hyde gene, ⁇ -Hyde RNA or p-Hyde cDNA from said tumor sample from the sequence of the p-Hyde gene, p-Hyde RNA or p-Hyde cDNA from said nontumor sample indicates a somatic alteration in the
  • This invention provides a method for screening a tumor sample from a human subject for the presence of a somatic alteration in a p-Hyde gene in said tumor which comprises comparing p-Hyde polypeptide from said tumor sample from said subject to p-Hyde polypeptide from a nontumor sample from said subject to analyze for a difference between the polypeptides, wherein said comparing is perfo ⁇ ned by (i) detecting either a full length polypeptide or a truncated polypeptide in each sample or (ii) contacting an antibody which specifically binds to either an epitope of an altered p-Hyde polypeptide or an epitope of a wild-type p-Hyde polypeptide to the p-Hyde polypeptide from each sample and detecting antibody binding, wherein a difference between the p-Hyde polypeptide from said tumor sample from the p-Hyde polypeptide from said nontumor sample indicates the presence of a somatic alter
  • This invention provides a method for identifyirig a chemical compound which is capable inducing susceptibility to cell death which comprises: (a) contacting the p-Hyde with a chemical compound under conditions permitting binding between the p-Hyde and the chemical compound;(b) detecting specific binding of the chemical compound to the p-Hyde; and (c) determining whether the chemical compound inhibits the p-Hyde so as to identify a chemical compound which is capable of capable inducing susceptibility to cell death.
  • This invention provides a method of inhibiting the growth of cancer cells, comprising the steps of obtaining the cells and contacting the cells of the subject with a replication-deficient adenovirus type 5 expression vector comprising air adenovirus genome having a deletion m the El and E3 region of the genome and an insertion within the region of a nucleic acid encoding p-Hyde under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter, thereby inhibiting the growth of tire prostate cancer cells.
  • This invention provides a method of inhibiting the growth a prostate cancer cells, comprising: 1) obtaining a sample of prostate cells from a subject; 2) contacting the cells with a replication deficient adenovirus type 5 expression vector which comprises an adenovirus genome having a deletion in the El and E3 regions of the genome and an insertion within the regions of a p-Hyde cDNA under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter; and 3) introducing the cells into the subject, thereby inhibiting the growth of the cancer cells.
  • This invention provides a method of suppressing the growth of cancer cells in a subject. comprising introducing mto the cancer cell an amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein, thereby suppressing the growth of cancer cells in the subject.
  • This invention provides a method of suppressing growth of cancer cells in a subject, comprising administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby suppressing the growth of cancer cells in the subject.
  • This invention provides a method of inducing susceptibility to apoptosis of cancer cells in a subject, comprising introducing into the cancer cell an amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein, thereby inducing susceptibility to apoptosis .
  • This invention provides a method of inducing susceptibility to apoptosis of cancer cells in a subject, comprising admmistering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby inducing susceptibility to apoptosis.
  • This invention provides a method of treating a subject with cancer which comprises administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a phainiaceuticai acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby treating the subject with cancer.
  • This invention provides a method of treating a subject with cancer, comprising: 1) administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein in combination with radiation, chemotherapy, or UV mimetic drugs; and 2) a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby treating the subject with cancer.
  • This invention a method of treating a subject with cancer, comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising: 1 ) an adenovirus type 5 expression vector which comprises an adenovirus genome having a deletion in the El and E3 regions of the genome and an insertion withm the regions of a full length sense p-Hyde cDNA under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter, and 2) a suitable carrier or diluent, thereby treating the subject with cancer
  • tire cancer is selected from a group consisting of. melanoma; lymphoma, leukemia; and prostate, colorectal, pancreatic, breast, brain, or gastric carcinoma.
  • the present invention provides the means necessary for production of gene-based therapies directed at cancer cells.
  • These therapeutic agents may take the form of polynucleotides comprising all or a portion of the p-Hyde locus placed in appropriate vectors or delivered to target cells in more direct ways such that the function of the p-Hyde protein is reconstituted.
  • Therapeutic agents may also take the form of polypeptides based on either a portion of, or the entire proteui sequence of p-Hyde. These may functionally replace the activity of p-Hyde in vivo.
  • FIG 1 Schematic presentation of AdRSVpHyde structure.
  • the 2664 bp inserted fragment contains a 1467 bp full-length pl yde cDNA gene (SEQ ID NO: 1) and 1 166 bp 3' untranslated downstream region.
  • SEQ ID NO: 1 The complete sequence of AdRSVpHyde is set forth in Figure 10, Specifically, the nucleic acid sequence of region A in Figure 1 is set forth in Figure 10 Region A and the nucleic acid sequence of region B in Figure 1 is set forth in Figure 1 0 at Region B.
  • FIG. 1 Expression of pHydc by AdRSVpHyde.
  • DU145 cells transduced by AdRSVpHyde at MOI-200 were harvested in 48 h post infection for either mRNA or protein extraction.
  • A Expression of pHyde at mRNA level in DU145 cells. Sample wells were each loaded with 10 mg of total RNA, electrophoresed in 12.5% agarose gel, transferred to nylon membrane, and hybridized with j2 P-labeled pHyde cDNA. Northern blot was stripped and rehybridized with GAPDH to assess gel loading.
  • B Expression of pHyde at protein level in DU145 cells. Protein extracts (50 mg) were loaded on a 12% SDS-PAGE gel. Rabbit anti-rat pHyde antibody was used as the primary antibody.
  • tumors were injected subcutaneously into the flanks of nude mice.
  • tumors were untreated (control), or intratumorally injected (day 0) either by 5x10 9 pfu control virus AdRSVlacZ (control virus), or 5x10 9 pfu AdRSVpHyde (AdRSVpHyde).
  • AdRSVpHyde 5x10 9 pfu AdRSVpHyde
  • FIG. 6 Morphological changes of PC-3, TSU, and PPC-1 cells transduced by AdRSVpHyde.
  • the morphologic features of untreated control cells and viral -transduced cells were recorded at day 5 post viral transduction. All the photos are at the same magnification (66X).
  • A, D, G Untreated control cells
  • B, E, H Viral control AdRSVlacZ treated cells
  • C, F, I AdRSVpHyde treated cells.
  • Figure 7 Expression of p53 and Rb mRNA in various prostate cancer cell lines.
  • RNA samples were each loaded with 10 mg of total RNA, electrophoresed in 12.5% agarose gel, transferred to nylon membrane, and hybridized with 32 P-labeled p53 or Rb cDNA probe.
  • Northern blot was stripped and rehybndized with GAPDH to normalize the gel loading.
  • FIG. 8 AdRSVpHyde induced p53 expression in DU 5 cells. The same Northern blot in Fig. 2A was stripped and rehybridized with 32 P-labeled p53 cDNA.
  • FIG 10. Hie sequence of AdRSVpHyde.
  • Figure 11. Comparison of the nucleotide sequence of the p-Hyde family genes between human p-Hyde (I) and human p-Hyde 40 (II).
  • Figure 12- Comparison of the amino acid sequence of the p-Hyde family genes between human p-Hyde (I) and human p-Hyde 40 (II).
  • Figure 13 A) Comparison of the nucleotide sequence of the p-Hyde family genes, between rat p-Hyde and human p-Hyde. B) Comparison of the amino acid sequence of the p-Hyde family genes between rat p-Hyde and human p-Hyde.
  • FIG. 14 TUNEL, assay of DU145 cells in vitro.
  • FIG. 15 TUNEL, assay of DU145 cells in vivo.
  • DU145 xenograft tumors (about 80 fflm') growing on nude mice were either untreated (A) or injected with 5x10 9 pfu AdRSVpHyde (B). Tumors were harvested in 21 days. Tumor sections were fixed and proceeded for TUNEL assay. The sections were counter stained with propidium iodide (red) to show the nucleus of cells. The bright yellowish stained cells indicated the apoptotic cells. Tumor sections from control virus-treated DU145 tumor showed the similar results as in (A). Magnification: A, B: x20.
  • FIG 16. Inhibitory effects of pHyde on growth of prostate cancer cell lines DU145 and LNCaP.
  • Figure 17 Expression of Rb and pS3 in various prostate cancer cell lines. Various prostate cancer cells were screened for endogenous Rb and p53 expression at mRNA levels. Each well was loaded with 10 ⁇ g of total RNA.
  • RNA integrity and gel loading samples were electrophoresed in 12.5%) agarose gel, transferred to nylon membrane, and hybridized with 32 P-labeled Rb (which showed an about 4.4 kb transcript) or p53 CDNA (which showed an about 2.5 kb transcript). The Northern blot was then stripped and rchybridized with GAPDH cDNA (which showed a 1.2 kb transcript) to assess RNA integrity and gel loading.
  • FIG. 1 Inhibitory effects of pHyde on growth of prostate cancer cell lines; PC-3 and TSU.
  • This invention provides a novel class of genes which act as inhibitor of a DNA repair enzyme and induces susceptibility of cancer cells to cell death
  • P-Hyde is and associated with suppression of tumor growth in vivo and increased susceptibility to apoptosis induced by UV irradiation or FUrD treatment.
  • the upregulation of apoptosis due to UV damage is correlated with the presence of intact photoproduct in prostate cancer cell lines stably transfected with p-Hyde.
  • Use of p-Hyde in human gene therapy as monotherapy or hi combination with radiation or chemotherapy is useful against cancei or hyperproHferative human diseases.
  • the class of proteins are DNA repair enzyme inhibitors which downregulate Nucleotide-Excision-Repair (NER) pathway in prostate cancer, MGMT CNA repair pathway in colon cancer cell line, 0 ⁇ methyl guanine methyl transferase enzyme (0 6 MgMT) and 6.4, photoproducts (6,4PP).
  • the class of genes is characterized by comprising a leucine zipper binding domain and a death domain which causes the cell to be apoptotic.
  • Human p-Hyde (I) and human p-Hyde 40 (II) are examples set forth herein, of a family of molecules (the "p-Hyde family”) having certain homolgous sequences and conserved structural and functional features.
  • This inveniion provides an isolated nucleic acid which encodes a mammalian p-Hyde protein which induces susceptibility of a cancer cell to cell death, including allelic, analogs, fragments, mimetics, mutants, synthetics, or variants thereof.
  • This invention provides an isolated nucleic acid which encodes a human p-Hyde protein which induces susceptibility of a cancer cell to cell death, including allelic, analogs, fragments, mimetics, mutants, synthetics, or variants thereof.
  • p-Hyde activity refers to an activity exerted by a p-Hyde protein, polypeptide or nucleic acid molecule on a p-Hyde responsive cell as determined in vivo, or in vitro, according to standard techniques which causes apoptosis of the cell.
  • P-Hyde refers to a family of genes having the p-Hyde activity. Examples of such genes are rat p-hyde, human p-Hyde (I), and human p-Hyde 40 (II).
  • these sequences comprise SEQ ID NO: 7 on the nucleotide level and SEQ ID NO: 8 on the ammo acid level.
  • examples, of family p-Hyde gene members include isolated nucleic sequences of SEQ ID NOS: 1, 3, 5, or 7 on the nucleotide level and amino acid sequences of SEQ ID NOS: 2, 4, 6 or 8 on the am o acid level.
  • the p-Hyde gene has a nucleotide sequence having at least 85% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 87% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1
  • the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 90% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 95% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO. 1.
  • nucleic acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 1 of the SEQ ID NO: 1 and ends at position 557 of SEQ ID NO: 1. In another embodiment the nucleic acid comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO: 1 and ends at position 158 of SEQ ID NO: 1. In another embodiment the nucleic acid comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 50 of SEQ ID NO: 1 and ends at position 120 of SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the nucleic acid is DNA, cDNA, genomic DNA, or
  • the nucleic acid encodes an am o acid sequence having the sequence as set forth in SEQ ID NO 2.
  • the a ino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the a ino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 2 and ends at position 101.
  • the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 2 and ends at position 80.
  • the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 2 and ends at position 60.
  • the amino acid has at least 85% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 2
  • the amino acid has at least 90% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 2.
  • the amino acid has at least 95% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 2.
  • the p-Hydc gene has a nucleotide sequence having at least 75% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO- 3
  • the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 85% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ TD NO. 3.
  • the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 90% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 3.
  • the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 95% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ED NO: 3.
  • nucleic acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 1 of the SEQ ID NO: 3 and ends at position 557 of SEQ ID NO: 3.
  • nucleic acid comprises a fragment winch begins at the nucleic acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO: 3 and ends at position 158 of SEQ ID NO 3.
  • nucleic acid comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 50 of SEQ ID NO- 3 and ends at position 120 of SEQ ID NO: 3.
  • the nucleic acid is DNA, cDNA, genomic DNA, or RNA
  • the nucleic acid encodes an ammo acid sequence having the sequence as set forth in SEQ ID NO 4
  • the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 4 and ends at position 101.
  • the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 4 and ends at position 80.
  • the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 4 and ends at position 60.
  • the amino acid has at least 85% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 4.
  • the amino acid has at least 90% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 4.
  • the amino acid has at least 95% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 4.
  • the p-Hyde gene has a nucleotide sequence having at least 75% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 5. In another embodiment the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 85% similarity with the nucleic acid cod g sequence of SEQ ID NO: 5. In another embodiment the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 90% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 5. h another embodiment the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence havmg at least 95% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 5.
  • nucleic acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 1 of the SEQ ID NO: 5 and ends at position 557 of SEQ ID NO: 5.
  • nucleic acid comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO: 5 and ends at position 1 58 of SEQ ID NO: 5.
  • nucleic acid comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 50 of SEQ ID NO: 5 and ends at position 120 of SEQ ID NO: 5.
  • the nucleic acid is DNA, cDNA, genomic DNA, or RNA
  • the nucleic acid encodes an amino acid sequence having the sequence as set forth in SEQ ID NO 6.
  • the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 6 and ends at position 101.
  • the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 6 and ends at position 80.
  • the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid al position 1 of SEQ ID NO 2 and ends at position 60.
  • the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 61 of SEQ ID NO 6 and ends at position 241 .
  • the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 81 of SEQ ID NO 6 and ends at position 361. In one embodiment the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 81 of SEQ ID NO 2 and ends at position 421. In another embodiment the amino acid has at least 70% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 6. In anotlier embodniient the ammo acid has at least 75% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 6. In another embodiment the amino acid has at least 80% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 6. In one embodiment the amino acid has at least 85% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 6. In another embodiment the amino acid has at least 90% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 6. In another embodiment the amino acid has at least 95% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 6.
  • this invention provides an isolated nucleic acid which encodes an amino acid sequence tccctggccacacgcctggtgggctclggcttc (SEQ ID NO: 7). Further this invention provides an isolated nucleic acid which encodes an amino acid sequence: AAPCVAYVLLSLVYLPGVLAAALQLRRGTKYQRFPDWLDHWLQHRKQIGLLSF F (SEQ ID NO: 8). Further this invention provides an isolated nucleic acid winch encodes an amino acid sequence NFIRDVLQPYIRKDENK.
  • the invention further encompasses nucleic acid molecules that differ from the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO 1 , SEQ ID NO.3, SEQ ID NO:5, or SEQ ID NO:7, due to degeneracy of the genetic code and thus encode the same p-Hyde protein as that encoded by the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 , SEQ ID NO:3, SEQ ID NO:5,or SEQ ID NO.7.
  • DNA sequence polymorphisms that lead to changes in the amino acid sequences of p-Hyde may exist within a population (e.g., the human population).
  • Such genetic polymorphism in the p-Hyde gene may exist among individuals within a population due to natural allelic variation.
  • An all el e is one of a group of genes which occur alternatively at a given genetic locus
  • Such natural allelic variations can typically result in 1-5% variance in the nucleotide sequence of the p-Hyde gene.
  • Alternative alleles can be identified by sequencing the gene of interest hi a number of different individuals. This can be readily carried out by using hybridization probes to identify the same genetic locus in a variety of individuals.
  • nucleic acid molecules encoding p-Hyde proteins from other species which have a nucleotide sequence which differs from that of a human p-Hyde, are intended to be within the scope of the invention.
  • Nucleic acid molecules corresponding to natural allelic variants and homologues of the p-Hyde cDNA of the invention can be isolated based on their identity to the human p-Hyde nucleic acids disclosed herein using the human cDNAs, or a portion thereof, as a hybridization probe according to standard hybridization techniques under stringent hybridization conditions.
  • splice variants of human and mouse p-Hyde cDNA can he isolated based on identity to human and mouse p-Hyde.
  • hybridizes under stringent conditions is intended to describe conditions for hybridization and washing under which nucleotide sequences at least 60% (65%o. 70%, preferably 75%) identical to each other typically remain hybridized to each other.
  • stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y. (1989), 6.3.1-6.3.6.
  • a preferred, non-limiting example of stringent hybridization conditions are hybridization in 6X sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC) at about 450C, followed by one or more washes in 0.2 X SSC, 0.1% SDS at 50-650C.
  • an isolated nucleic acid molecule of the invention that hybridizes under stringent conditions to the coding or non-coding (or "sense” or “anti-sense") sequence of SEQ ID NO: l , SEQ ID NO:2, SEQ ID NO:5, or SEQ ID NO:7, corresponds to a naturally- occurring nucleic acid molecule.
  • a "naturally-occurring" nucleic acid molecule refers to an RNA or DNA molecule having a nucleotide sequence that occurs in nature (e.g., encodes a natural protein).
  • allelic variants of the p-Hyde sequence that may exist in the population, the skilled artisan will further appreciate that changes can be introduced by mutation into the nuclectide sequence of SEQ ID NO: l , SEQ ID NO:3, SEQ ID NO:5, or SEQ ID NO.7, thereby leading to changes in the amino acid sequence of the encoded p-Hyde protein, without altering the biological ability of the p-Hyde protein.
  • Mutations can be introduced by standard techniques, such as site-directed mutagenesis and PCR-niediated mutagenesis.
  • conservative amino acid substitutions are made at one or more predicted non- essential amino acid residues.
  • a “conservative amino acid substitution” is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain.
  • Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art. These families include amino acids with basic side chains (e.g., lysine, arginine, histidine), acidic side chains (e.g., aspartic acid, glutamic acid), uncharged polar side chains (e.g., glycine, asparagine, glutamine, serine, threonine, tyrosine, cysteine), nonpolar side chains (e.g., alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan), beta- branched side chains (e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine) and aromatic side chains (e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine).
  • a predicted nonessential amino acid residue in P-Hyde is preferably replaced with another amino acid residue from the same side chain family.
  • mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part of a P-Hyde coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for P-Hyde biological activity to identify mutants that retain activity. Following mutagenesis, the encoded protein can be expressed recombinantly and the activity of the protein can be determined.
  • amino acid residues that are conserved among the p-Hyde proteins of various species are not altered (except by conservative substitution). Both murine and human p-Hyde protein have a conserved pattern of six cysteine residues. Such conserved domains and cysteine residues are less likely to be amenable to mutation. Other amino acid residues, however, (e.g., those that are not conserved or only semi- conserved among p-Hyde of various species e.g., between murine and human p-Hyde) may not be essential for activity and thus are likely to be amenable to alteration.
  • nucleic acid molecules encoding p-Hyde proteins that contain changes in amino acid residues that are not essential for activity.
  • Such p-Hyde proteins differ in amino acid sequence from SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4 yet retain biological activity.
  • the isolated nucleic acid molecule includes a nucleotide sequence encoding a protein that includes an amino acid sequence that is at least about 84% identical, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 98% identical to the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO-2, 4, 6, or 8.
  • the nucleotide encoding p-Hyde includes RNA, cDNA, genomic DNA, synthetic forms, and mixed polymers, both sense and antisense strands, and may be chemically or biochemically modified or may contain non-natural or derivatized nucleotide bases, as will be readily appreciated by those skilled in the ait.
  • modifications include, for example, labels, methylation, substitution of one or more of the naturally occurring nucleotides with an analog, ingruucleotide modifications such as uncharged linkages (e g , methyl phosphonates, phosphotriesters, phosphoamidates, carbamates, etc.), charged linkages (e g .
  • phosphorothioates phosphorodithioates, etc.
  • pendent moieties e g , polypeptides
  • intercalators e.g , acridine, psoralen, etc.
  • chelators e.g , alkylators, and modified linkages (e.g., alpha anome ⁇ c nucleic acids, etc ).
  • synthetic molecules that mimic nucleotides in their ability to bind to a designated sequence via hydrogen bonding and other chemical interactions.
  • Such molecules are known in the art and mclude, for example, those in which peptide linkages substitute for phosphate linkages the backbone of the molecule, substantially homologous to primary structural sequence but which include, e.g , in vivo or in vitro chemical and biochemical modifications or which incorporate unusual amino acids
  • the nucleic acid may be modified. Such modifications include, for example, acetylation, carboxylation, phosphorylation, glycosylation, ubiquitination, labeling, e.g., with radionuchdes. and various enzymatic modifications, as will be readily appreciated by those well skilled m the art.
  • a variety of methods for labeling polypeptides and of substituents or labels useful for such purposes are well known in the art, and include ladioacuve isotopes such as 32 P, ligands which bind to labeled antiligands (e.g., antibodies), fluorophores, chemiluminescent agents, enzymes, and antiligands which can serve as specific bmding pair members for a labeled ligand.
  • labeled antiligands e.g., antibodies
  • fluorophores e.g., antibodies
  • chemiluminescent agents e.g., enzymes
  • antiligands which can serve as specific bmding pair members for a labeled ligand.
  • the choice of label depends on the sensitivity required, ease of conjugation with the primer, stability requirements, and available instrumentation. Methods of labeling polypeptides are well known in the art.
  • an "isolated" or “substantially pure” nucleic acid is one which is substantially separated from other cellular components which naturally accompany a native human sequence or protein, e.g., ribosomes, polymerases, many other human genome sequences and proteins.
  • the term embraces a nucleic acid sequence or protein which has been removed from its naturally occurring environment, and includes recombinant or cloned DNA isolates and chemically synthesized analogs or analogs biologically synthesized by heterologous systems.
  • p-Hyde AUele refers to normal alleles of the p-Hyde locus as well as alleles carrying variations that predispose individuals to develop cancer of many sites including, for example, breast, ovarian, colorectal and prostate cancer. Such predisposing alleles are also called “p-Hyde susceptibility alleles”.
  • p-Hyde Locus each refer to polynucleotides, all of which are in the p-Hyde region, thai are likely to be expressed in normal tissue, certain alleles of which predispose an individual to develop breast, ovarian, colorectal and prostate cancers which have p-Hyde activity.. Mutations at the p-Hyde locus may be involved in the initiation and/or progression of other types of tumors. The locus is indicated in part by mutations that predispose individuals to develop cancer These mutations fall within the p-Hyde region described infra.
  • the p-Hyde locus is intended to include coding sequences, intervening sequences and regulatory elements controlling transcription and/or translation.
  • the p-Hyde locus is intended to include all allelic variations of the DNA sequence.
  • nucleic acid refers to the phosphate ester polymeric for of ribonucleosides (adenosine, guanosine, uridine or cytidine; "RNA molecules”) or deoxyribonucleosides (deoxyadenosinc, deoxy guanosine. deoxythyniidine, or deoxy cytidine, "DNA molecules”) in either smgle stranded form, or a double-stranded helix. Double stranded DNA-DNA, DNA-RNA and RNA-RNA helices are possible.
  • icleic acid molecule refers only to the primary and secondary structure of the molecule, an does not lirn it to any particular tertiary forms.
  • this term includes double-stranded DNA found, inter alia, in linear or circular DNA molecules (e.g.. restriction fragments), plasmids, and chromosomes.
  • sequences may be described herein according to the normal convention of giving only the sequence in the 5' to 3 ' direction along the nontranscribed strand of DNA (i.e. , the strand having a sequence homologous to the mRNA).
  • a "recombinant DNA” is a DNA that has undergone a molecular biological manipulation.
  • nucleic acid encoding refers to a nucleic acid molecule which directs the expression of a specific protein or peptide.
  • the nucleic acid sequences include both the DNA strand sequence that is transcribed into RNA and the RNA sequence that is translated into protein.
  • the nucleic acid molecule include both the full length nucleic acid sequences as well as non-full length sequences derived from the full length protein. It being further understood that the sequence includes the degenerate codons of the native sequence or sequences which may be introduced to provide codon preference in a specific host cell
  • Recombinant nucleic acid is a nucleic acid which is not naturally occurring, or which is made by the artificial combination of two otherwise separated segments of sequence. This artificial combination is often accomplished by either chemical synthesis means, or by the artificial manipulation of isolated segments of nucleic acids, e.g., by genetic engineering techniques. Such is usually done to replace a codon with a redundant codon encoding the same or a conservative amino acid, while typically introducing or removing a sequence recognition site. Alternatively, it is performed to join together nucleic acid segments of desired functions to generate a desired combination of functions.
  • cancer cell means a tissue that grows by cellular proliferation more rapidly than normal, e.g. , more rapidly than adjoining cells, or other cells in the tissue. Neoplastic cells continue to grow after growth stimuli cease. Generally, tumors represent or form a distinct mass of tissue. The present invention relates to both types of tumors, but is particularly valuable in the treatment of cancers.
  • the cancer cells are selected from a group consisting of: melanoma; lymphoma; leukemia; and prostate, colorectal, pancreatic, breast, brain, or gastric carcinoma.
  • tumors include but are not limited to: include sarcomas and carcinomas such as, but not limited to: fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma.
  • chondrosarcoma osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's sarcoma, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyo sarcoma, colon carcinoma, pancreatic cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary caicinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duel carcinoma, choriocarcinonia, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilms 1 tumor, cervical cancer, germ tumor, non-small cell lung carcinoma, small cell lung carcinoma,
  • Mutations can be made in a nucleic acid encoding p-Hyde such that a particular codon is changed to a codon which codes for a different ammo acid but the induction of susceptibility to cell death is maintained. Such a mutation is generally made by making the fewest nucleotide changes possible.
  • a substitution mutation of this sort can be made to change an ammo acid in the resulting protein in a non-conservative manner (i.e., by changing the codon from an ammo acid belonging to a grouping of amino acids having a particular size or characteristic to an amino acid belonging to another grouping) or in a conservative manner (i.e., by changing the codon from an amino acid belonging to a grouping of amino acids having a particular size or characteristic to an amino acid belonging to the same grouping).
  • a conservative change generally leads to less change in the structure and function of the resulting protein.
  • a non-conservative change is more likely to alter the structure, activity or function of the resultmg protein.
  • the present invention should be considered to include sequences containing conservative changes which do not significantly alter the activity or bmding characteristics of the resulting protein.
  • Substitutes for an amino acid within the sequence may be selected from other members of the class to which the amino acid belongs.
  • the nonpolar (hydrophobic) amino acids include alanine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan and methionine
  • Amino acids containing aromatic ring structures are phenylalanine, tryptophan, and tyrosine.
  • the polar neutral amino acids include glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine. tyrosine, asparagine, and glutamine.
  • the positively charged (basic) amino acids include arginine, lysine and histidine
  • the negatively charged (acidic) amino acids include aspartic acid and glutamic acid Such alterations will not be expected to affect apparent molecular weight as determined by polyacrylarnide gel electrophoresis, or isoelectric point. Tins isolated nucleic acid also encodes mutant p-Hyde or the wildtype protein
  • the invention further provides a recombinant expression vector comprising a DNA molecule of the invention cloned into the expression vector in an antisense orientation. That is, the DNA molecule is operably linked to a regulatory sequence in a manner which allows for expression (by transcription of the DNA molecule) of an RNA molecule which is antisense to p-Hyde mRNA.
  • Regulatory sequences operably linked to a nucleic acid cloned in the antisense orientation can be chosen which direct the continuous expression of the antisense RNA molecule in a variety of cell types, for instance viral promoters and/or enhancers, or regulatory sequences can be chosen which direct constitutive, tissue specific or cell type specific expression of antisense RNA
  • the antisense expression vector can be in the form of a recombinant plasmid, phageraid or attenuated virus in which antisense nucleic acids are produced under the control of a high efficiency regulatory region, the activity of which can be determined by the cell type into which the vector is introduced.
  • This invention provides for a rephcable vector comprising the isolated nucleic acid molecule of the DNA virus.
  • the vector includes, but is not limited to: a plasmid, cosmid, phage or yeast artificial chromosome (YAC) which contains at least a portion of the isolated nucleic acid molecule.
  • insert and vector DNA can both be exposed to a restriction enzyme to create complementary ends on both molecules which base pair with each other and are then ligated together with DNA ligase.
  • linkers can be ligated to the insert DNA which correspond to a restriction site in the vector DNA, which is then digested with the restriction enzyme which cuts at that site.
  • Other means are also available and known to an ordinary skilled practitioner.
  • the adenovirus vector is a replication-deficient adenovirus type 5 expression vector.
  • the adenovirus vector comprises an adenovirus genome having a deletion in the El and E3 region of the genome and an insertion within the region of a nucleic acid encoding p-Hyde under the control of a promoter.
  • the promoter may be a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter.
  • adenovirus a 36 kB, linear and double-stranded DNA virus, allows substitution of a large piece of adenoviral DNA with foreign sequences up to 7 kB (Grunhaus and Horwitz, 1992).
  • retrovirus the infection of adenoviral DNA into host cells does not result in chromosomal integration because adenoviral DNA can replicate in an episomal manner without potential genotoxicity.
  • adeno viruses are structurally stable, and no genome rearrangement has been detected after extensive amplification. Adenovirus can infect virtually all epithelial cells regardless of their cell cycle stage. So far, adenoviral infection appears to be linked only to mild disease such as acute respiratory disease in the human
  • Adenovirus is particulaiiy suitable for use as a gene transfer vector because of its mid-sized genome, ease of manipulation, high titer, wide target-cell range, and high infectivity. Both ends of the viral genome contain 100-200 base pair Cop) inverted terminal repeats (ITR), which axe cis elements necessary for viral DNA replication and packaging.
  • ITR inverted terminal repeats
  • the early (E) and late (L) regions of the genome contain different transcription units that are divided by the onset of viral DNA replication.
  • the El region (El A and E1B) encodes proteins responsible for the regulation of transcription of the viral genome and a few cellular genes.
  • the expression of the E2 region results in the synthesis of the proteins for viral DNA replication.
  • MLP major late promoter
  • recombinant adenovirus is generated from homologous recombination between shuttle vector and provhus vectoi Due to the possible recombination between two proviral vectors, wild-type adenovirus may be generated from this process. Therefore, it is critical to isolate a single clone of virus from an individual plaque and examine its genomic structure.
  • Use of the YAC system is an alternative approach for the production of recombinant adenovirus.
  • adenovirus can package approximately 105%> of the wild-type genome (Ghosh-Choudhury, et al , 1987), providing capacity for about 2 extra kB of DNA. Combined with the approximately 5.5 kB of DNA that is replaceable in the El and E3 regions, the maximum capacity of the current adenovirus vector is under 7.5 kB, or about 15% of the total length of the vector. More than 80% of the adenovirus viral genome remains in the vector backbone and is the source of vector-borne cytotoxicity. Also, the replication deficiency of the El deleted virus is incomplete. For example, leakage of viral gene expression has been observed with the currently available adenovirus vectors at high multiplicities of infection (Mulligan, 1993).
  • Helper cell lines may be derived from human cells such as human embryonic kidney cells, muscle cells, hematopoietic cells or other human embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells.
  • the helper cells may be derived from tlie cells of other mammalian species that are permissive for human adenovirus. Such cells include, e.g., Vero cells or other monkey embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells As stated above, the preferred helper cell line is 293.
  • the adenovirus may be of any of the 42 different known serotypes or subgroups A-F.
  • Adenovirus type 5 of subgroup C is the preferred starting material in order to obtain the conditional replication-defective adenovirus vector for use in the method of the present invention. This is because Adenovirus type 5 is a human adenovirus about which a great deal of biochemical and genetic information is known, and it has historically been used for most constructions employing adenovirus as a vector.
  • the typical vector according to the present invention is replication defective and will not have an adenovirus El region.
  • the position of insertion of the p-Hyde coding region within the adenovirus sequences is not critical to the present invention.
  • the nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde transcription unit also may be inserted in lieu of the deleted E3 region in E3 replacement vectors as described previously by Karlsson et. al. (1986) or in the E4 region where a helper ceil line or helper virus complements the E4 defect.
  • Adenovirus is easy to grow and manipulate and exhibits broad host range in vitro and in vivo. This group of viruses can be obtained in high titers, e.g., 1 0 9 -10 11 plaque-forming unit (PFU)/ml, and they are highly infective
  • PFU plaque-forming unit
  • the life cycle of adenovirus does not require integration into the host cell genome.
  • the foreign genes delivered by adenovirus vectors are episomal, and therefore, have low genotoxicity to host cells. No side effects 00/71564
  • Adenovirus vectors have been used in eulkaryotic gene expression (Levrero et al., 1991;
  • An appropriate promoter and other necessary vector sequences will be selected so as to be functional in tlie host, and may include, when appropriate, those naturally associated with p-Hyde genes. Examples of workable combinations of cell lines and expression vectors are described in Sambrook et al., 1989 or Ausubel et al., 1992; see also, e.g., Metzger el al , 1988. Many useful vectors are known in the art and may be obtained from such vendors as Stratagene, New England Biolabs, Prornega Biotech, and others. Promoters such as the trp, lac and phage promoters, tRNA promoters and glycolytic enzyme promoters may be used in prokaryotic hosts.
  • Useful yeast promoters include promoter regions for metallotliionein, 3-phosphoglycerate kinase or other glycolytic enzymes such as enolase or gly ceraidehyde-3 -phosphate dehydrogenase, enzymes responsible for maltose and galactose utilization, and others. Vectors and promoters suitable for use hi yeast expression are further described in Hitzeman et al., EP 73.675A.
  • non-native mammalian promoters might include the early and late promoters from SV40 (Fiers et al., 1 78) or promoters derived from murine Moloney leukemia virus, mouse inor vfrus, avian sarcoma viruses, adenovirus II. bovine papilloma virus or polyoma.
  • the construct may be joined to an amplifiable gene (e.g., DHFR) so that multiple copies of the gene may be made.
  • amplifiable gene e.g., DHFR
  • Expression and cloning vectors will likely contain a selectable marker, a gene encoding a protein necessary for survival or growth of a host cell transformed with the vector. The presence of this gene ensures growth of only those host cells which express the inserts.
  • Typical selection genes encode proteins that a) confer resistance to antibiotics or other toxic substances, e.g. ampicillin, neomycin, methotrexaie, etc.; b) complement auxotrophic deficiencies, or c) supply critical nutrients not available from complex media, e.g., the gene encodhig D-alanine racemase for Bacilli. The choice of tlie proper selectable marker will depend on the host cell, and appropriate markers for different hosts are well known in the art.
  • the vectors containing tlie nucleic acids of interest can be transcribed in vitro, and the resulting RNA introduced into the host cell by well-known methods, e.g., by injection (see, Kubo et al ., 1 988), or the vectors can be introduced directly into host cells by methods well known in the art, which vary depending on the type of cellular host, including electroporation, transfection employing calcium chloride, rubidium chloride, calcium phosphate, DEAE-dextran, or other substances; n icroprojectile bombardment; hpofection; infection (where the vector is an infectious agent, such as a retroviral genome); and other methods.
  • a bacterial expression vector includes a promoter such as tlie lac promoter and for transcription initiation the Shine-Dalgarno sequence and the start codon AUG. _ _ -
  • a eukaryotic expression vector includes a heterologous or homologous promoter for RNA polymerase II, a downstream polyadenylation signal, the start codon AUG, and a termination codon for detachment of the ribosome.
  • RNA polymerase II a heterologous or homologous promoter for RNA polymerase II
  • downstream polyadenylation signal a downstream polyadenylation signal
  • start codon AUG the start codon AUG
  • termination codon for detachment of the ribosome.
  • Such vectors may be obtained commercially or assembled from the sequences described by methods well-known in the art, for example tlie methods described above for constructing vectors in general.
  • Viral promoters, cellular promoters/enhancers and inducible promoters/enhancers that could be used in combination with the nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde in an expression construct include but are not limited to tlie following: Immuno globulin Heavy Chain; Tmmunoglobulin Light Chain; T-Cell Receptor; HLA DQ alpha and DQ beta; beta -Interfcron, lnterleukin-2 ; Interleukin-2 Receptor; MHC Class II 5 alpha; MHC Class II HLA-DR alpha; beta -Aclm; Muscle Creatine Kinase; Prealbumin (Transtliy ⁇ etin); Elastase I, Metalloihionein; Collagenase; Albumin Gene; alpha -Fetoprotein; tau -Globin; beta -Globin; c-fos; c-HA-ras; Neural Cell Adhesion Molecul
  • Eukaryotic Promoter Data Base EPDB Eukaryotic Promoter Data Base EPDB
  • any promoter/enhancer combination could also be used to d ⁇ ve expression of a p-Hyde.
  • Use of a T3, T7 or SP6 cytoplasmic expression system is another possible embodiment.
  • Eukaryotic cells can support cytoplasmic transcription from certain bacterial promoters if the appropriate bacterial polymerase is provided, either as part of the delivery complex or as an additional genetic expression construct.
  • the host cell may contain the isolated DNA molecule artificially introduced into the host cell.
  • the host cell may be a eukaryotic or bacterial cell (such as E.coli . yeast cells, fungal cells, insect cells and animal cells Suitable animal cells include, but are not limited to Vero cells, HeLa cells, Cos cells, CV1 cells and various primary mammalian cells.
  • host cell and “recombinant host cell” are used interchangeably herein, it is understood that such terms refer not only to the particular subject cell but to the progeny or potential progeny of such a cell Because certain modifications may occur in succeeding generations due to either mutation or environmental influences, such progeny may not, in fact, be identical to the parent cell, but are still included withm the scope of the term as used herein.
  • a host cell can be any prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell.
  • p-Hyde protein can be expressed in bacterial cells such as E.
  • vector DNA can be introduced into prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells via conventional transformation or transfection techniques.
  • transformation and “transfection” are intended to refer to a variety of art-recognized techniques for introducing foreign nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) into a host cell, including calcium phosphate or calcium chloride co- precipitation, DEAE-dextran-mediated transfection, hpofection, or electroporation. Suitable methods for transforming or transfecting host cells can be found in Sambrook, et al.
  • a gene that encodes a selectable marker is generally introduced into the host cells along with the gene of interest.
  • Preferred selectable markers include those which confer resistance to drugs, such as G418, hygromycm and methotrexate.
  • Nucleic acid encoding a selectable marker can be introduced into a host cell on the same vector as that encoding p-Hyde or can be introduced on a separate vector. Cells stably transfected with the introduced nucleic acid can be identified by drug selection (e.g., cells that have incorporated the selectable marker gene will survive, while the other cells die).
  • a host cell of the invention such as a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host cell in culture, can be used to produce (i.e., express) p-Hyde protein.
  • the invention further provides methods for producing p-Hyde protein using the host cells of the invention.
  • the method comprises cultnring tlie host cell of invention (into which a recombinant expression vector encoding p-Hyde has been introduced) in a suitable medium such that p-Hyde protein is produced.
  • tlie method further comprises isolating p-Hyde from the medium or the host cell.
  • the host cells of the invention can also be used to produce nonhuman transgenic animals.
  • a host cell of the invention is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which p-Hyde-coding sequences have been introduced.
  • Such host cells can then he used to create non-human transgenic animals in which exogenous p-Hyde sequences have been introduced into their genome or homologous recombinant animals in which endogenous p-Hyde sequences have been altered.
  • Such animals are useful for studying the function and/or activity of p-Hyde and for identifying and/or evaluating modulators of p-Hyde activity.
  • transgenic animal is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a rodent such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more of the cells of the animal includes a transgene.
  • rodent such as a rat or mouse
  • transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, amphibians, etc.
  • a transgenic animal of the invention can be created by introducing p-I yde-encoding nucleic acid into tl e male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection, retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal.
  • the p-Hyde cDNA sequence e.g., that of (SEQ ID NO:l,3, 5, or 7) can be introduced as a transgene into the genome of a non-human animal.
  • a nonhuman homologue of the human p-Hyde gene can be isolated based on hybridization to the human p-Hyde cDNA and used as a transgene.
  • Intronic sequences and polyadenylation signals can also be included in the transgene to increase the efficiency of expression of the transgene.
  • a tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to the p-Hyde transgene to direct expression of p-Hyde protein to particular cells.
  • a transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence of tlie p-Hyde transgene in its genome and/or expression of p-Hyde mRNA hi tissues or cells of the animals. A transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying tlie transgene. Moreover, transgenic animals carrying a transgene encoding p-Hyde can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes.
  • a vector is prepared which contains at least a portion of a p-Hyde gene (e.g., a human or a non-human homolog of the p-Hyde gene, e.g., a murine p-Hyde gene) into which a deletion, addition or substitution has been introduced to thereby alter, e.g., functionally disrupt, the p-Hyde gene.
  • the vector is designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous p-Hyde gene is functionally disrupted (i.e., no longer encodes a functional protein; also referred to as a "knock out" vector).
  • tlie vector can be designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous p-Hyde gene is mutated or otherwise altered but still encodes functional protein (e.g., the upstream regulatory region can be altered lo thereby alter the expression of the endogenous p-Hyde protein).
  • vector refers to viral expression systems, autonomous self-replicating circular DNA (plasmids), and includes both expression and nonexpression plasmids. Where a recombinant microorganism or cell culture is described as hosting an "expression vector,” this includes both extrachromosomal circular DNA and DNA that has been incorporated into the host chromosome(s). Where a vector is being maintained by a host cell, tlie vector may either be stably replicated by the cells during mitosis as an autonomous structure, or is incorporated within the host's genome. 00/71564
  • plasmid refers to an autonomous circular DNA molecule capable of lephcation in a cell, and includes both the expression and nonexpression types. Where a recombinant microorganism or cell culture is described as hosting an "expression plasmid", tins includes latent viral DNA integrated into the host ch ⁇ omosome(s). Where a plasmid is being maintained by a host cell, the plasmid is either bemg stably replicated by the cells during mitosis as an autonomous structure 01 is incorporated within the host's genome.
  • ieference sequence is a defined sequence used as a basis for a sequence comparison, a ieference sequence may be a subset of a larger sequence, for example, as a segment of a full-length cDNA or gene sequence given in a sequence listing or may comprise a complete cDNA or gene sequence.
  • Optimal alignment of sequences for aligning a comparison window may be conducted by the local homology algorithm of Smith and Waterman (1981) Adv Appl Math 2-482, by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman and Wunsch (1970) J. Mol Biol 48 443, by the search for similarity method of Pearson and Lipman (1988) Proc Nail Acad S i (USA) 8 - AAA, or by computerized implementations of these algo ⁇ thms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package Release 7.0, Genetics Computer Group, 575 Science Dr., Madison, WI).
  • Substantial identity or “substantial sequence identity” mean that two peptide sequences, when optimally aligned, such as by the programs GAP or BESTFIT using default gap which share at least 90 percent sequence identity, preferably at least 95 percent sequence identity, more preferably at least 99 percent sequence identity or more.
  • “Peicentage amino acid identity” or “percentage amino acid sequence identity” refers to a comparison of the amino acids of two polypeptides which, when optimally aligned, have approximately tlie designated percentage of the same amino acids. For example, 00/71564
  • 95% amino acid identity refers to a comparison of the amino acids of two polypeptides which when optimally aligned have 95% amino acid identity
  • residue positions which are not identical differ by conservative amino acid substitutions
  • substitution of amino acids havmg similar chemical properties such as charge or polarity are not likely to effect the properties of a protein. Examples include glutamine for asparagine or glutamic acid for aspartic acid.
  • the percent identity between the two sequences is a function of the number of identical positions shared by the sequences (i.e., % identity of identical positions/total # of positions (e.g., overlapping) x 100).
  • the two sequences are the same length.
  • the determination of percent homology between two sequences can be accomplished usmg a mathematical algorithm.
  • a preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for tlie comparison of two sequences is the algorithm of Karlin and AJtschul (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:2264-2268, modified as in Karlin and Altschul (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5877.
  • Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et aL, (1997) Nucleic Acids Res.
  • This invention provides a nucleic acid having a sequence complementary to the sequence of the isolated nucleic acid of the human p-Hyde gene. Specifically, this invention provides an oligonucleotide of at least 15 nucleotides capable of specifically hybridizing with a sequence of nucleotides present within a nucleic acid which encodes the human p-Hyde
  • the nucleic acid is DNA or RNA.
  • the oligonucleotide is labeled with a detectable marker.
  • the oligonucleotide is a radioactive isotope, a fluorophor or an enzyme.
  • Oligonucleotides which are complementary may be obtained as follows: The polymerase chain reaction is then carried out using the two primers. See PCR Protocols A Guide to Methods and Applications [74] Following PCR amplification, the PCR-amplificd regions of a viral DNA can be tested for their ability to hybridize to the three specific nucleic acid probes listed above. Alternatively, hybridization of a viral DNA to the above nucleic acid probes can be performed by a Southern blot procedure without viral DNA amplification and under stringent hybridization conditions as desc ⁇ bed herein
  • Oligonucleotides for use as probes or PCR primers arc chemically synthesized according to the solid phase phosphoramidite tnester method first described by Beaucage and Carruthers [19] using an automated synthesizer, as described in Needham-VanDevanter [69]. Purification of oligonucleotides is by either native acrylamide gel electrophoresis or by anion-exchange HPLC as described in Pearson, J.D. and Regnier, F E. [75A]. The sequence of the synthetic oligonucleotide can be verified using the chemical degradation method of Maxa , A.M. and Gilbert, W. [63].
  • High st ⁇ ngent hybridization conditions are selected at about 5? C lower than the thermal melting point (Tm) for the specific sequence at a defined ionic strength and pH.
  • the T is the temperature (under defined ionic strength and pH) at which 50% of tlie target sequence hybridizes to a perfectly matched probe.
  • ionic strength and pH the pH at which 50% of tlie target sequence hybridizes to a perfectly matched probe.
  • Example high stringency may be attained for example by overnight hybridization at about 68C in a 6x SSC solution, washing at room temperature with 6x SSC solution, followed by washing at about 68C in a 6x SSC in a 0.6x SSX solution.
  • Hybridization with moderate stringency may be attained for example by: 1) filter pre-hybridizing and hybridizing with a solution of 3x sodium chloride, sodium citrate (SSC), 50% formamide, 0.1M Tris buffer at Ph 7.5, 5x Denhardt's solution; 2.) pre-hybridization at 37? C for 4 hours; 3) hybridization at 37? C with amount of labelled probe equal to 3,000,000 cpm total for 16 hours; 4) wash in 2x SSC and 0.1% SDS solution; 5) wash 4x for 1 minute each at room temperature at 4x at 60? C for 30 minutes each; and 6) dry and expose to film.
  • SSC sodium citrate
  • selectively hybridizing to refers to a nucleic acid probe that hybridizes, duplexes or binds only to a particular target DNA or RNA sequence when the target sequences are present in a preparation of total cellular DNA or RNA.
  • selectively hybridizing it is meant that a probe binds to a given target in a manner that is detectable in a different manner from non-target sequence under high stringency conditions of hybridization, in a different "Complementary" or “target” nucleic acid sequences refer to those nucleic acid sequences which selectively hybridize to a nucleic acid probe.
  • Proper annealing conditions depend, for example, upon a probe's length, base composition, and the number of mismatches and their position on the probe, and must often be determined empirically.
  • nucleic acid probe design and annealing conditions see, for example, Sambrook et al., [81 ] or Ausubel, F., et al., [8].
  • the primer pairs of the present invention are useful for dete ⁇ nination of the nucleotide sequence of a particular p-Hyde allele using PCR.
  • the pairs of single-stranded DNA primers can be annealed to sequences within or surrounding the p-Hyde gene in order to prime amplifying DNA synthesis of the p-Hyde gene itsel f.
  • a complete set of these primers allows synthesis of all of tl e nucleotides of the p-Hyde gene coding sequences, i.e., the exons.
  • the set of primers preferably allows synthesis of both intron and exon sequences Allele-specific primers can also be used. Such primers anneal only to paiticular p-Hyde mutant alleles, and thus will only amplify a product in the presence of the mutant allele as a template
  • DNA probe molecules may be produced by insertion of a DNA molecule having the full-length or a fragment of the isolated nucleic acid molecule of the DNA virus into suitable vectors, such as plasmids or bacteriophages, followed by transforming into suitable bacterial host cells, replication in the transformed bacterial host cells and harvesting of the DNA probes, using methods well known in the art.
  • suitable vectors such as plasmids or bacteriophages
  • probes may be generated chemically from DNA synthesizers.
  • RNA probes may be generated by inserting the full length or a fragment of tlie isolated nucleic acid molecule of the DNA virus downstream of a bacleriophage promoter such as T3, T7 or SP6. Large amounts of RNA probe may be produced by incubating the labeled nucleotides with a linearized isolated nucleic acid molecule of the DNA virus or its fragment where it contains an upstream promoter h the presence of the appropriate RNA polymerase, As defined herein nucleic acid probes may be DNA or RNA fragments.
  • DNA fragments can be prepared, for example, by digesting plasmid DNA, or by use of PCR, or synthesized by either the phosphoramidite method described by Beaucage and Carruthers, [19], or by the triester method according to Matteucci, et al., [62], both incorporated herein by refereuce.
  • a double stranded fragment may then be obtained, if desired, by annealing tl e chemically synthesized single strands together under appropriate conditions or by synthesizing the complementary strand using DNA polymerase with an appropriate primer sequence. Where a specific sequence for a nucleic acid probe is given, it is understood that the complementary strand is also identified and included.
  • the complementary strand will work equally well in situations where the target is a double-stranded nucleic acid. It is also understood that when a specific sequence is identified for use a nucleic probe, a subsequence of the listed sequence which is 25 basepairs or more in length is also encompassed for use as a probe.
  • the nucleic acid of the subject invention also include DNA molecules coding for polypeptide analogs, fragments or derivatives of antigenic polypeptides which differ from naturally-occurring forms in terms of the identity ot location of one or more amino acid residues (deletion analogs containing less than all of tl e residues specified for the protein, substitution analogs wherein one or more residues specified are replaced by other residues and addition analogs where in one or more amino acid residues is added to a terminal or medial portion of the polypeptides) and which share some or all properties of naturally-occurring forms.
  • These molecules include: the incorporation of codons "preferred" for expression by selected non-mammalian hosts; the provision of sites for cleavage by restriction endonuclease enzymes; and the provision of additional initial, terminal or intermediate DNA sequences that facilitate construction of readily expressed vectors.
  • this invention provides an antisense molecule capable of specifically hybridizing with the isolated nucleic acid of the human p-Hyde gene.
  • This invention provides an antagonist capable of blocking the expression of the peptide or polypeptide encoded by the isolated DNA molecule.
  • the antagonist is capable of hybridizing 00/71564
  • the antagonist is a triplex oligonucleotide capable of hybridizing to the DNA molecule.
  • the triplex oligonucleotide is capable of binding to at least a portion of tlie isolated DNA molecule with a nucleotide sequence.
  • the antisense molecule may be DNA or RNA or valiants thereof (i.e. DNA or RNA with a protein backbone).
  • the present invention extends to tlie preparation of antisense nucleotides and ribozymes that may be used to mterfere with the expression of the receptor recognition proteins at the translation of a specific mRNA, either by masking that MRNA with an antisense nucleic acid or cleaving it with a ribozyme.
  • Antisense nucleic acids are DNA or RNA molecules that are complementary to at least a portion of a specific MRNA molecule. In the cell, they hybridize to that MRNA, forming a double stranded molecule. The cell does not translate an MRNA in this double-stranded form. Therefore, antisense nucleic acids interfere with the expression of MRNA into protein.
  • Antisense nucleotides or polynucleotide sequences are useful in preventing or diminishing the expression of tlie p-Hyde gene, as will be appreciated by those skilled the art.
  • polynucleotide vectors containing all or a portion of the p-Hyde gene or other sequences from the p-Hyde region may be placed under the control of a promoter in an antisense orientation and introduced into a cell Expression of such an antisense construct within a cell will interfere with p-Hyde transcription and/or translation and/or replication.
  • Oligomers of about fifteen nucleotides and molecules that hybridize to the AUG initiation codon are particularly efficient, since they are easy to synthesize and are likely to pose fewer problems than larger molecules upon introduction to cells.
  • This invention provides a transgenic nonhuman mammal which comprises at least a portion of the isolated DNA molecule uitroduced into the mammal at an embryonic stage. Methods of producing a transgenic nonhuman mammal are known to those skilled in the art.
  • This invention provides a polypeptide comprising the ammo acid sequence of a human p-Hyde In one embodiment the amino acid sequence is set forth in SEQ ID NOs. 2, 4, 6 or 8
  • This invention provides a fusion protein or chimeric comprising the polypeptide.
  • This invention provides an antibody which specifically binds to the polypeptide. In one embodiment the antibody is a monoclonal or polycional antibody.
  • a p-Hyde “chimeric protein” or “fusion protein” comprises a p-Hyde polypeptide operably linked to a non-p-Hyde polypeptide.
  • a "p-Hyde polypeptide” refers to a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence correspondmg to p-Hyde
  • a "non-p-Hyde polypeptidell refers to a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence corresponding to a protein which is not substantially identical to the p-Hyde protein, e.g., a protein which is different from the p-Hyde protein and which is derived from the same or a different organism.
  • the p-Hyde polypeptide can correspond to all or a portion of a p-Hyde protein, preferably at least one biologically active portion of a p-Hyde pioiein
  • tlie fusion protein is an p-Hyde-immunoglobuIin fusion protehi hi which all or part of p-Hyde is fused to sequences derived from a member of the imniu oglobulin protein family.
  • Tl e p-Hyde immunoglobulin fusion proteins of the invention can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions and administered to a subject
  • the present invention furtlier provides methods of preparing a polynucleotide comprising polymerizing nucleotides to yield a sequence comprised of at least eight consecutive nucleotides of the p-Hyde locus; and methods of preparing a polypeptide comprising polymerizing amino acids to yield a sequence comprising at least five amino acids encoded within the p-Hyde locus.
  • the present invention provides an isolated polynucleotide comprising all, or a portion of the p-Hyde locus or of a mutated p-Hyde locus. Such polynucleotides may be antisense polynucleotides.
  • the present invention also provides a recombinant construct comprising such an isolated polynucleotide, for example, a recombinant construct suitable for expression in a transformed host cell.
  • Also provided by the present invention are methods of detecting a polynucleotide comprising a portion of the p-Hyde locus or its expression product in an analyte. Such methods may further comprise the step of amplifying tl e portion of the p-Hyde locus, and may further include a step of providing a set of polynucleotides which are primers for amplification of said portion of the p-Hyde locus. The method is useful for either diagnosis of the predisposition to cancer or the diagnosis or prognosis of cancer.
  • This invention also provides a method of producing a polypeptide encoded by isolated DNA molecule, which comprises growing the above host vector system under suitable conditions permitting production of the polypeptide and recovering the polypeptide so produced.
  • Furtlier, tlie isolated polypeptide encoded by the isolated DNA molecule may be linlced 5 to a second polypeptide encoded by a nucleic acid molecule to form a fusion protein by expression in a suitable host cell
  • the second nucleic acid molecule encodes beta-galactosidase
  • Other nucleic acid molecules which are used to form a fusion protein are known to those skilled in the art.
  • This invention provides an antibody which specifically binds to the polypeptide encoded by the isolated DNA molecule.
  • the antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
  • tlie antibody is a polycional antibody.
  • the antibody or DNA molecule may be labelled with a detectable marker including, but not limited to: a radioactive label, or a colorimetric, a luminescent, or a fluorescent marker, or gold.
  • Radioactive labels include, but are not limited to: 3 H, l4 C, 32 P, 33 P, 35 S, 36 C1, 5 l Cr, 57 Co, 5y Co, 5 Fe, ⁇ Y, 125 I, 131 L and ] 86 Re.
  • Fluorescent markers include but are not . limited to: fluorescein, rhoda ⁇ une and auramine.
  • Colorimetric markers include, but are not limited to: biotin, and digoxigenin. Methods of producing the polycional or monoclonal antibody are known to those of ordinary skill in tlie art. 0
  • the antibody or nucleic acid molecule complex may be detected by a second antibody which may be linked to an enzyme, such as alkaline phosphatase or horseradish peroxidase.
  • an enzyme such as alkaline phosphatase or horseradish peroxidase.
  • Other enzymes which may be employed are well known to one of ordinary skill in the ait.
  • Specifically binds to an antibody or “specifically immunoreactive with”, when referring to a protein or peptide, refers to a binding reaction which is determinative of the presence of the p-Hyde of tlie invention in the presence of a heterogeneous population of proteins and other biologies including viruses other than the p-Hyde. 0
  • the specified antibodies bind to tlie p-Hydc antigens and do not bind in a significant amount to other antigens present in the sample. Specific binding to an antibody under such conditions may require an antibody 00/71564
  • thai is selected for its specificity for a particular protein.
  • antibodies raised to the human p-Hyde immunogen descnbed herein can be selected to obtain antibodies specifically mimunoreactive with the p-Hyde proteins and not with other proteins. These antibodies recognize proteins homologous to the human p-Hyde protein.
  • a variety of lm unoassay formats may be used to select antibodies specifically immunorcactive with a particular protein
  • solid-phase ELISA l munoassays are routinely used to select monoclonal antibodies specifically immuiioreactive with a protein. See Harlow and Lane [32] for a description of hnmunoassay formats and conditions that can be used to dete ⁇ nine specific lmniunoreactivity.
  • This invention provides a method to select specific regions on the polypeptide encoded by the isolated DNA molecule of the DNA vims to generate antibodies.
  • the protein sequence may be detenni ⁇ ed from tl e cDNA sequence.
  • Amino acid sequences may be analyzed by methods well known to those skilled in tlie art to determine whether they produce hydrophobic or hydrophilic regions in the proteins which they build.
  • hydrophobic regions are well known to form the part of the protein that is inserted into the lipid bilay ⁇ r of tlie cell membrane, while hydrophilic legions are located on the cell surface, in an aqueous envnonment.
  • the hydrophilic regions will be more immunogenic than the hydrophobic regions.
  • tlie hydrophilic amino acid sequences may be selected and used to generate antibodies specific to polypeptide encoded by the isolated nucleic acid molecule encoding the DNA virus.
  • the selected peptides may be prepared using commercially available machines.
  • DNA, such as a cDNA or a fragment thereof, may be cloned and expressed and the resulting polypeptide recovered and used as an immunogen.
  • Polycional antibodies against these peptides may be produced by immunizing animals using tlie selected peptides.
  • Monoclonal antibodies aie prepared using hybridoma technology by fusing antibody producing B cells from immunized animals with myeloma cells and selecting the resulting hybridoma cell line producing the desired antibody.
  • monoclonal antibodies may be produced by in vitro techniques known to a person of ordinary skill in the art. These antibodies are useful to detect the expression of polypeptide encoded by tlie isolated DNA molecule of the DNA virus in living animals, in humans, or in biological tissues or fluids isolated from animals or humans.
  • the antibodies may be detectably labelled, utilizing conventional labelling techniques well-known to the art.
  • the antibodies may be radiolabelled using, for example, radioactive isotopes such as 3 H, ]2s I, 131 I, and 3:> S.
  • the antibodies may also be labelled using fluorescent labels, enzyme labels, free radical labels, or bacteriophage labels, using techniques known in the art. Typical fluorescent labels include fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, phycoerytlirin, phycocyanin, alophycocyanin, and Texas Red.
  • enzymes may be coupled to other molecules by covalent links, the possibility also exists that they might be used as labels for the production of tracer materials.
  • Suitable enzymes include alkaline phosphatase, beta-galactosidase, glucose-6-pl ⁇ osphate dehydrogenase, maleate dehydrogenase, and peroxidase.
  • Two principal types of enzyme immunoassay are the enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), and the homogeneous enzyme immunoassay, also known as enzyme-multiplied immunoassay (EMIT, Syva Corporation, Palo Alto, CA).
  • ELISA enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
  • EMIT enzyme-multiplied immunoassay
  • separation may be achieved, for example, by the use of antibodies coupled to a solid phase.
  • the EMIT system depends on deactivation of the enzyme in the bracer-antibody complex; the activity can thus be measured without the need for a separation step.
  • chemiluminescent compounds may be used as labels.
  • Typical chemiluminescent compounds include luminol, isoluinin ⁇ l, aromatic acridinium esters, imidazoles, acridinium salts, and oxalate esters.
  • bioluminescent compounds may be utilized for labelling, tlie bioluminescent compounds including luciferin, luciferase, and aequorin.
  • the antibody may be employed to identify and quantify inimunologic counterparts (antibody or antigenic polypeptide) utilizing techniques well-known to the art.
  • RIA radioimmunoassay
  • antibodies to tlie human p-Hyde can be used to detect the agent in the sample.
  • the sequence being targeted is expressed in transfected cells, preferably bacterial cells, and purified.
  • the product is injected into a mammal capable of producing antibodies.
  • Either monoclonal or polycional antibodies (as well as any recombinant antibodies) specific for the gene product can be used in various immunoassays.
  • assays include competitive immunoassays, radioimmunoassays, Western blots, ELISA, indirect im unofluorescent assays and the like. For competitive immunoassays, see Harlow and Lane [32] at pages 567-573 and 584-589.
  • kits suitable for use by a medical specialist may be prepared to dele ⁇ nine the presence or absence of predetermined binding activity or predetermined binding activity capability to suspected target cells.
  • one class of such kits will contain at least the labeled polypeptide or its binding partner, for instance an antibody specific thereto, and directions, of course, depending upon the method selected, e.g., "competitive,” “sandwich,” “DASP” and tlie like
  • the kits may also contain peripheral reagents such as buffers, stabilizers, etc.
  • Monoclonal antibodies or recombinant antibodies may be obtained by various techniques familiar to those skilled in the art.
  • spleen cells or other lymphocytes from an animal immunized with a desired antigen are immortalized, commonly by fusion with a myeloma cell (see, Kohler and Milstein [50], incorporated herein by reference).
  • Alternative methods of immortalization include transformation with Epstein Barr Virus, oncogenes, or retroviruses, or other methods well known in tlie art. Colonies arising from single immortalized cells are screened for production of antibodies of the desired specificity and affinity for tlie antigen, and yield of the monoclonal antibodies produced by such cells may be enhanced by various techniques, including injection into tlie peritoneal cavity of a vertebrate host.
  • New techniques using recombinant phage antibody expression systems can also be used to generate monoclonal antibodies. See for example: McCafferty, J et al. [64]; Hoogenboom, H.R. et al. [39]; and Marks, J.D. et al. [60].
  • Such peptides may be produced by expressing the specific sequence in a recombinantly engineered cell such as bacteria, yeast, filamentous fungal, insect (especially employing baculoviral vectors), and mammalian cells.
  • a recombinantly engineered cell such as bacteria, yeast, filamentous fungal, insect (especially employing baculoviral vectors), and mammalian cells.
  • the expression of natural or synthetic nucleic acids encoding viral protein will typically be achieved by operably linking the desired sequence or portion thereof to a promoter (which is either constitutive or inducible), and incorporated into an expression vector.
  • the vectors are suitable for replication or integration in either prokaryotes or eukaryoies.
  • Typical cloning vectors contain antibiotic resistance markers, genes for selection of transformants, inducible or regulatable promoter regions, and translation terminators that are useful for the expression of viral genes.
  • Suitable eukaryote hosts may include plant cells, insect cells, mammalian cells, yeast, and filamentous fungi
  • the peptides derived form the nucleic acids, peptide fragments are produced by recombinant technology may be purified by standard techniques well known to those of skill in the art Recombinantly produced sequences can be directly expressed or expressed as a fusion protein The protein is then purified by a combination of cell lysis (e.g , sonication) and affinity chromatography. For fusion products, subsequent digestion of the fusion protein with an appropriate proteolytic enzyme releases tlie desired peptide.
  • the proteins may be purified to substantial purity by standard techniques well known in the art, including selective precipitation with such substances as ammonium sulfate, column chromatography, immunopurification methods, and others. See, for instance, Scopes, R [84], incorporated herein by reference.
  • This invention is directed to analogs of the isolated nucleic acid and polypeptide which comprise the amino acid sequence as set forth above
  • the analog may have an N-iermmal methionine or an N-terminal polyhistidine optionally attached to tlie N or COOH terminus of tlie polypeptide which comprise the ammo acid sequence
  • this invention contemplates peptide fragments of the polypeptide which result from proteolytic digestion products of the polypeptide.
  • the de ⁇ vative of the polypeptide has one or more chemical moieties attached thereto, hi another embodiment the chemical moiety is a water soluble polymer In anotlier embodiment the chemical moiety is polyethylene glycol In another embodiment the chemical moiety is mon-, di-, t ⁇ - or tetrapegylated. In another embodiment the chemical moiety is N-terminal monopegylated.
  • a polypeptide "fragment,” “portion” or “segment” is a stretch of amino acid residues of at least about five lo seven contiguous amino acids, often at least about seven to nine contiguous amino acids, typically at least about nine to 13 contiguous amino acids and, most preferably, at least about 20 to 30 or more contiguous amino acids.
  • Tlie polypeptides of tl e present invention may be coupled to a solid-phase support, e.g., nitrocellulose, nylon, column packing materials (e.g., Sepharose beads), magnetic beads, glass wool, plastic, metal, polymer gels, cells, or other substrates.
  • a solid-phase support e.g., nitrocellulose, nylon, column packing materials (e.g., Sepharose beads), magnetic beads, glass wool, plastic, metal, polymer gels, cells, or other substrates.
  • Such supports may take the form, for example, of beads, wells, dipsticks, or membranes.
  • Target region refers to a region of the nucleic acid which is amplified and/or detected.
  • target sequence refers to a sequence with which a probe or primer will form a stable hybrid under desired conditions.
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • Attachment of polyethylene glycol (PEG) to compounds is particularly useful because PEG has very low toxicity in mammals (Carpenter et al., 1971).
  • PEG adduct of adenosine deaminase was approved in the United States for use in humans for the treatment of severe combined immunodeficiency syndrome.
  • a second advantage afforded by the conjugation of PEG is that of effectively reducing the immunogenicty and antigenicity of heterologous compounds.
  • a PEG adduct of a human protein might be useful for the treatment of disease in other mammalian species without the risk of triggering a severe immune response.
  • the compound of the present invention may be delivered in a microencapsulation device so as to reduce or prevent an host immune response against the compound or against cells which may produce the compound.
  • the compound of the present mvention may also be delivered microencapsulated in a membrane, such as a liposome.
  • PEG reagents for reaction with protein amino groups include active esters of carboxylic acid or carbonate derivatives, particulaiiy those in which the leaving groups are N-hydroxysuccinimide, p-nitrophenol, imidazole or l -hydroxy-2-nitiObenzene-4-sulfonate.
  • PEG derivatives containing maleimido or haloaceiyl groups are useful reagents for the modification of protein free sulfhydryl groups.
  • PEG reagents containing amino hydrazine or hydrazide groups are useful for reaction with aldehydes generated by pe ⁇ odate oxidation of carbohydrate groups in proteins.
  • the amino acid residues of tlie polypeptide described herein are preferred to be hi the "L" isomeric form.
  • the residues in the "D" lsomcric form can be substituted for any L-amino acid residue, as long as the desired functional pioperty of lectin activity is retained by the polypeptide.
  • NH 2 refers to the free amino group present at the am o terminus of a polypeptide.
  • COOH refers to the free carboxy group present at the carboxy teimmus of a polypeptide.
  • Abbreviations used herein are in keeping with standard polypeptide nomenclature, J Biol Chem , 243 3552-59 (1969).
  • ammo-acid residue sequences are represented herein by formulae whose left and right orientation is in the conventional direction of a ino-te ⁇ ninus to carboxy-ter inus Furthermore, it should be noted that a dash at the beginning or end of an amino acid residue sequence indicates a peptide bond to a further sequence of one or more amino-acid residues
  • Synthetic polypeptide prepared using the well known techniques of solid phase, liquid phase, or peptide condensation techniques, or any combination thereof, can include natural and unnatural a o acids.
  • Amino acids used for peptide synthesis may be standard Boc (N-amino protected N-t-butyloxycarbo ⁇ yl) amino acid resin with the standard deproiecting, neutralization, coupling and wash protocols of the original solid phase procedure of Mcrrifield (1963, J Am Chem. Soc. 85:2149-2154), or the base-labile N-amino protected 9-fiuorenylmethoxycarbonyl (Fmoc) amino acids first described by Carpmo and Han (1972. j. Org Chem 37.3403-3409).
  • polypeptide of the invention may comprise D-amino acids, a combination of D- and L-amino acids, and various "designer" amino acids (e.g. , methyl amino acids, C-methyl amino acids, and N-methyl amino acids, etc.) to convey special properties
  • Synthetic amino acids include omithmc for lysine, fluorophenylalatiine for phenylalanine, and noiieucine for leucine or isoJeucine. Additionally, by assigning specific amino acids at specific 00/71564
  • the peptides may compnse a special amino acid at the C-terminus which incorporates either a C0 2 H or CONH 2 side chain to simulate a free glycine or a glycine-amide group Another way to consider this special residue would be as a D or L amino acid analog with a side chain consisting of the linker or bond to the bead.
  • the pseudo-free C-terminal lesidue may be of tlie D or the L optical configuration, in another embodiment, a racenuc mixture of D and L-isomers may be used.
  • pyroglutamate may be included as tlie N-terminal residue of the peptide.
  • pyroglutamate is not amenable to sequence by Edman degradation, by limiting substitution to only 50% of the peptides on a given bead with N-te ⁇ ninal pyroglutamate, there will remain enough non-pyroglutamate peptide on the bead for sequencing.
  • this technique could be used for sequencing of any peptide that incorporates a residue resistant to Edman degradation at the N-tenmnus. Other methods to characterize individual peptides that demonstrate desired activity are described in detail infra.
  • tlie present invention envisions preparing peptides that have more well defined structural properties, and the use of peptidomimetics, and peptidomimetic bonds, such as ester bonds, to prepare peptides with novel properties.
  • a peptide may be generated that incorporates a reduced peptide bond, i.e., R ⁇ -CH 2 -NH-R 2 , where Ri and R 2 are ammo acid residues or sequences.
  • a reduced peptide bond may be introduced as a dipeptide subunit.
  • Such a molecule would be resistant to peptide bond hydrolysis, e.g. , protease activity.
  • Such peptides would provide ligands with unique function and activity, such as extended half-lives in vivo due to resistance to metabolic breakdown, or protease activity. Furthermore, it is well known that in certain systems constrained peptides show enhanced functional activity (Hruby, 1982, Life Sciences 31 : 189-199; Hruby et al., 1990, Biochem J. 268:249-262); the present invention provides a method to produce a constrained peptide that incorporates random sequences at al) other positions.
  • a constrained, cyclic or rigidized peptide may be prepared synthetically, provided that in at least two positions in the sequence of the peptide an amino acid or amino acid analog is inserted that provides a chemical functional group capable of cross-linking to constrain, cyclise or rigidize the peptide after treatenenl to form the cross-link. Cyclization will be favored when a turn-inducing amino acid is incorporated.
  • Examples of a ino acids capable of cross-linking a peptide are cysteine to form disulfide, aspartic acid to form a lactone or a lactase, and a chelator such as carboxyl-glutarnic acid (Gla) (Bachem) to chelate a transition metal and form a cross-link.
  • a chelator such as carboxyl-glutarnic acid (Gla) (Bachem) to chelate a transition metal and form a cross-link.
  • Protected carboxyl glutamic acid may be prepared by modifying the synthesis described by Zee-Cheng and Olson (1980, Biophys. Biochem. Res. Commun. 94: 1 128-11 32).
  • a peptide in which the peptide sequence comprises at least two amino acids capable of cross-linking may be treated, e.g.
  • the present invention provides sttategies to systematically prepare cross-links. For example, if four cysteine residues are incorporated in the peptide sequence, different protecting groups may be used (Hiskey, 1981, in The Peptides: Analysis, Synthesis, Biology. Vol. 3, Gross and Meienliofer, eds., Academic Press: New York, pp. 137-167; Ponsanti et aL, 1990, Tetrahedron 46:8255-8266). The first pah of cysteine may be deprotected and oxidized, then the second set may be deprotected and oxidized. In this way a defined set of disulfide cross-links may be fo ⁇ ned.
  • a pah of cysteine and a pair of collating amino acid analogs may be incorporated so that the cross-links are of a different chemical nature.
  • the following non-classical amino acids may be incorporated in the peptide in order to introduce particular conformational motifs: l,2,3.4-tetrahydroisoquinohne-3-carboxylate (Kazmierski et al., 1991 , J Am. Chem Soc.
  • ammo acid analogs and peplidominielics may be incorporated into a peptide to induce or favor specific secondary structures: LL-Acp
  • the present invention further provides for modification or derivatization of the polypeptide or peptide of the invention.
  • Modifications of peptides are well known to one of ordinary skill, and include phosphorylation, carboxymethylation, and acylation. Modifications may be effected by chemical or enzymatic means. In another aspect, glycosylaled or fatty acylated peptide derivatives may be prepared. Preparation of O 00/71564
  • glycosylated or fatty acylated peptides is well Icnown in the art.
  • Fatty acyl peptide derivatives may also be prepared.
  • a free amino group (N-terminal or lysyl) may be acylated, e.g. , myristoylated.
  • an amino acid comprising an aliphatic side chain of the structure -(CH 2 ) n CH3 may be incorporated in tlie peptide.
  • Chemical Moieties for Derivatization may be selected from among water soluble polymers.
  • the polymer selected should be water soluble so that the component to which it is attached does not precipitate in an aqueous environment, such as a physiological environment.
  • the polymer will be pharmaceutically acceptable.
  • One skilled in the ait will be able to select the desired polymer based on such considerations as whether the polymer/component conjugate will be used therapeutically, and if so, the desired dosage, circulation time, resistance to proteolysis, and other considerations. For the present component or components, these may be ascertained using the assays provided herein. O 00/71564
  • the water soluble polymer may be selected from tlie group consisting of, for example, polyethylene glycol, copolymers of etliylene glycol/propylene glycol, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, poly-1 , 3-dioxolane, poly-1 , 3, -trioxane, ethylene/maleic anliydride copolyroer, polyamino cids (either homopolymers or random copolymers), and dextran or poly(n-vinyl pyrrolidone)poly ⁇ thyiene glycol, propropylene glycol homopolymers, prolypropylene oxide/ethyl ene oxide co- polymers, polyoxyethylated polyols and polyvinyl alcohol.
  • Polyethylene glycol propionaldenhyde may have advantages in manufacturing due to its stability in water.
  • the number of polymer molecules so attached may vary, and one skilled in the art will be able to ascertain the effect on function.
  • One may mono-derivatize, or may provide for a di-, tri-, tetra- or some combination of derivatization, with the same or different chemical moieties (e g. , polymers, such as different weights of polyethylene giycols).
  • the proportion of polymer molecules to component or components molecules will vary, as will their concentrations in the reaction mixture.
  • the optimum ratio in tenns of efficiency of reaction in that there is no excess unreacted component or components and polymer
  • the desired degree of derivatization e.g., mono, di-, tri-, etc.
  • the molecular weight of the polymer selected whether the polymer is branched or unbranched, and the reaction conditions.
  • This mvention provides a method for determining whether a subject carries a mutation in the p-Hyde gene which comprises- a) obtaining an appropriate nucleic acid sample from the subject; and(b) dete ⁇ nining whether the nucleic acid sample from step (a) is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde so as to thereby determine whether a subject carries a mutation in the p-Hyde gene.
  • the nucleic acid sample in step (a) comprises mRNA co ⁇ esponding to the transcript of DNA encoding a mutant p-Hyde
  • the determining of step (b) comprises: (i) contacting the mRNA with the oligonucleotide under conditions permitting binding of tlie mRNA to the oligonucleotide so as to fonn a complex; (ii) isolathig the complex so formed; and (iii) identifying the mRNA in the isolated complex so as to thereby determine whether the mRNA is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes O 00/71564
  • the determining of step (b) comprises: i) contacting the nucleic acid sample of step (a), and the isolated nucleic acid with restriction enzymes under conditions permitting the digestion of tl e nucleic acid sample, and the isolated nucleic acid mto distinct, distinguishable pieces of nucleic acid; (ii) isolating the pieces of nucleic acid; and (iii) comparing the pieces of nucleic acid de ⁇ ved from the nucleic acid sample with the pieces of nucleic acid derived from the isolated nucleic acid so as to thereby determine whether the nucleic acid sample is, or is de ⁇ ved from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-FIyde.
  • the present invention further provides methods of preparing a polynucleotide comprising polymerizing nucleotides to yield a sequence comprised of at least eight consecutive nucleotides of the p-Hyde gene, and methods of preparing a polypeptide comprising polymerizing amino acids to yield a sequence comprising at least five amino acids encoded within the p-Hyde gene.
  • This invention provides a method for determining whether a subject carries a mutation m the p-Hyde gene which comprises, (a) obtaining an appropriate nucleic acid sample from the subject; and (b) determining whether the nucleic acid sample from step (a) is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde so as to thereby determine whether a subject carries a mutation in the p-Hyde gene, h one embodiment the nucleic acid sample in step (a) comprises mRNA corresponding to the transcript of DNA encoding a mutant p-Hyde, and wherem the determining of step (b) comprises: (i) contacting the mRNA with the oligonucleotide under conditions permitting binding of the mRNA to the oligonucleotide so as to form a complex, (ii) isolating the complex so formed; and (iii) identifying the mRNA in the isolated complex so as to thereby determine whether the mRNA is,
  • nucleic acid sample and the isolated nucleic acid into distinct, distinguishable pieces of nucleic acid; (ii) isolating tlie pieces of nucleic acid; and (iii) comparing the pieces of nucleic acid derived from the nucleic acid sample with the pieces of nucleic acid derived from the isolated nucleic acid so as to thereby determine whether the nucleic acid sample is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde.
  • Detection of point mutations or variations may be accomplished by molecular cloning of tlie p-Hyde allele(s) and sequencing tlie allele(s) using techniques well known in the art.
  • the gene sequences can be amplified directly from a genomic DNA preparation from the tumor tissue, using known techniques. The DNA sequence of the amplified sequences can then be determined.
  • coli mutS protein (Modrich, 1991 ); and 6) ailele-specific PCR (Rano & Kidd, 198.9).
  • primers are used which hybridize at their 3' ends to a particular p-Hyde mutation. If the particular p-Hyde mutation is not present, an amplification product is not observed.
  • Amplification Refractory Mutation System (ARMS) can also be used, is disclosed in European Patent Application Publication No. 0332435 and in Newton et al., 1989. Insertions and deletions of genes can also be detected by cloning, sequencing and amplification.
  • restriction fragment length polymorphism (RFLP) probes for the gene or surrounding marker genes can be used to score alteration of an allele or an insertion in a polymorphic fragment.
  • RFLP restriction fragment length polymorphism
  • Such a method is particularly useful for screening relatives of an affected individual for the presence of the p-Hyde mutation found in that individual.
  • Other techniques for detecting insertions and deletions as Icnown in the art can be used.
  • DNA probes can be used to detect mismatches, through enzymatic or chemical cleavage. See, e.g., Cotton et al., 1988; Shenk et al., 1975; Novack et al., O 00/71564
  • mismatches can be detected by shifts in the electrophoretic mobility of mismatched duplexes relative to matched duplexes. See, e.g., Caxiello, 1988.
  • riboprobes or DNA probes tlie cellular mRNA or DNA which might contain a mutation can be amplified using PCR (see below) before hybridization. Changes in DNA of the p-Hyde gene can also be detected using Southern hybridization, especially if the changes are gross rearrangements, such as deletions and insertions.
  • non-PCR based screening assays hybridizes a nucleic acid probe (or an analog such as a methyl phosphonate backbone replacing the normal phosphodiester), to the low level DNA target.
  • This probe may have an enzyme covalently linked to tlie probe, such that the covalent linkage does not interfere with tlie specificity of the hybridization.
  • This enzyme-probe-conjugate-target nucleic acid complex can then be isolated away from the free probe enzyme conjugate and a substrate is added for enzyme detection. Enzymatic activity is observed as a change in color development or luminescent output resulting in a 10 sup 3 -10 sup 6 increase in sensitivity.
  • Two-step label amplification methodologies are known in the art. These assays work on the principle that a small ligand (such as digoxigcnin, biotin, or the like) is attached to a nucleic acid probe capable of specifically binding p-Hyde. Allele specific probes are also contemplated within the scope of this example.
  • the small ligand attached to the nucleic acid probe is specifically recognized by an antibody-enzyme conjugate.
  • digoxigerun is attached to the nucleic acid probe. Hybridization is detected by an antibody-alkaline phosphatase conjugate which turns over a chemiluminescent substrate.
  • an antibody-alkaline phosphatase conjugate which turns over a chemiluminescent substrate.
  • the small ligand is recognized by a second Iigand-enzyme conjugate that is capable of specifically complexing to the first ligand.
  • a well known embodiment of this example is the biotin-avidin type of interactions.
  • the nucleic acid probe assays of this invention will employ a cocktail of nucJeic acid probes capable of detecting p-Hyde.
  • a cocktail of nucJeic acid probes capable of detecting p-Hyde.
  • the number of different probes is alternatively 2, 3, or 5 different nucleic acid probe sequences.
  • the cocktail includes probes capable of patients with alternate-specific mutations identified in populations of patients with alterations in p-Hyde.
  • any number of probes can be used, and will preferably include probes corresponding to the major gene mutations identified as predisposing an individual to breast cancer.
  • This invention provides a method for screening a tumor sample from a human subject for a somatic alteration in a p-Hyde gene in said tumor which comprises gene comparing a first sequence selected form the group consisting of a p-Hyde gene from said tumor sample, p-Hyde RNA from said tumor sample and p-Hyde cDNA made from mRNA from said tumor sample with a second sequence selected from the group consisting of p-Hyde gene from a nontumor sample of said subject, p-Hyde RNA from said nontumor sample and p-Hyde cDNA made from mRNA from said nontumor sample, wherein a difference in the sequence of the p-Hyde gene,p-Hyde RNA or p-Hyde cDNA from said tumor sample from the sequence of the p-Hyde gene, p-Hyde RNA or p-Hyde cDNA from said nontumor sample indicates a somatic alteration in the
  • This invention provides a method for screening a tumor sample from a human subject for the presence of a somatic alteration in a p-Hyde gene in said tumor which comprises comparing p-Hyde polypeptide from said rumor sample from said subject to p-Hyde polypeptide from a nontumor sample from said subject to analyze for a difference between the polypeptides, wherein said comparing is performed by (i) detecting either a full length polypeptide or a truncated polypeptide in each sample or (ii) contacting an antibody which specifically binds to either an epitope of an altered p-Hyde polypeptide or an epitope of a wild-type p-Hyde polypeptide to the p-Hyde polypeptide from each sample and detecting antibody binding, wherein a difference between the p-Hyde polypeptide from said tumor sample from the p-Hyde polypeptide from said nontumor sample indicates the presence of a somatic alteration in the
  • This invention is particularly useful for screening compounds by using the p-Hyde polypeptide or binding fragment thereof in any of a variety of drug screening techniques.
  • the p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment employed in such a test may either be free in solution, affixed to a solid support, or borne on a cell surface.
  • One method of drug screening utilizes eucaryotic or procaryotic host cells which are stably transformed with recombinant polynucleotides expressing tlie polypeptide or fragment, preferably in competitive binding assays. Such cells, either in viable or fixed form, can be used for standard binding assays.
  • the present invention provides methods of screening for drugs comprising contacting such an agent with a p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment thereof and assaying (i) for the presence of a complex between the agent and the p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment, or (ii) for the presence of a complex between the p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment and a ligand, by methods well Icnown in the art.
  • the p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment is typically labeled.
  • Free p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment is separated from that present in a proteimprotein complex, and the amount of free (i.e., uncomplexed) label is a measure of the binding of the agent being tested to p-Hyde or its interference with p-Hyde :ligand binding, respectively.
  • Anotlier technique for drug screening provides high throughput screening for compounds having suitable binding affinity to the p-Hyde polypeptides and is described in detail in Geysen, PCT published application WO 84/03564, published on Sep. 13, 1984. Briefly stated, large numbers of different small peptide test compounds are synthesized on a solid substrate, such as plastic pins or some other surface. The peptide test compounds are reacted with p-Hyde polypeptide and washed. Bound p-Hyde polypeptide is then detected by methods well known in the art.
  • Purified p-Hyde can be coated directly onto plates for use in the aforementioned drug screening techniques.
  • non-neutralizing antibodies to the polypeptide can be used to capture antibodies to immobilize the p-Hyde polypeptide on the solid phase.
  • This invention also contemplates the use of competitive drug screening assays in which neutralizing antibodies capable of specifically binding the p-Hyde polypeptide compete with a test compound for binding to the p-Hyde polypeptide or fragments thereof. In this manner, the antibodies can be used to detect the presence of any peptide which shares one or more antigenic determinants of the p-Hyde polypeptide.
  • a further technique for drug screening involves the use of host eukaryotic cell lines or cells (such as described above) which have a nonfunctional p-Hyde gene. These host cell lines or cells are defective at the p-Hyde polypeptide level. The host cell lines or cells are grown in the presence of drug compound. The rate of growth of the host cells is measured to determine if the compound is capable of regulating the growth of p-Hyde defective cells.
  • the goal of rational drug design is to produce structural analogs of biologically active polypeptides of interest or of small molecules with which they interact (e.g., agonists, antagonists, inhibitors) in order to fashion drags which are, for example, more active or stable forms of the polypeptide, or which, e.g., enhance or interfere with the function of a polypeptide in vivo. See, e.g., Hodgson, 1991.
  • one first determines tlie three-dimensional structure of a protein of interest (e.g., p-Hyde polypeptide) or, for example, of the p-Hyde-receptor or ligand complex, by x-ray 00/71564
  • drugs which have, e.g., improved p-Hyde polypeptide activity or stability or which act as inhibitors, agonists, antagonists, etc. of p-Hyde polypeptide activity.
  • p-Hyde polypeptide activity e.g., improved p-Hyde polypeptide activity or stability or which act as inhibitors, agonists, antagonists, etc. of p-Hyde polypeptide activity.
  • sufficient amounts of the p-Hyde polypeptide may be made available to perform such analytical studies as x-ray crystallography.
  • the knowledge of the p-Hyde protein sequence provided herein will guide those employing computer modeling techniques in place of, or in addition to x-ray crystallography.
  • This invention provides a method for identifying a chemical compound which is capable inducing susceptibility to cell death which comprises: (a) contacting the p-Hyde with a chemical compound under conditions permitting binding between the p-Hyde and the chemical compound;(b) detecting specific binding of the chemical compound to the p-Hyde; and (c) determining whether the chemical compound inhibits the p-Hyde so as to identify a chemical compound which is capable of capable inducing susceptibility to cell death.
  • Useful diagnostic techniques include, but are not limited to fluorescent in situ hybridization (FISH), direct DNA sequencing, PFGE analysis, Southern blot analysis, single stranded conformation analysis (SSCA), Rnase protection assay, ailele-specific oligonucleotide (ASO), dot blot analysis and PCR-SSCP, as discussed in detail further below.
  • FISH fluorescent in situ hybridization
  • PFGE analysis direct DNA sequencing
  • SSCA single stranded conformation analysis
  • ASO ailele-specific oligonucleotide
  • dot blot analysis PCR-SSCP
  • a rapid preliminary analysis to detect polymorphisms in DNA sequences can be performed by looking at a series of Southern blots of DNA cut with one or more restriction enzymes, preferably with a large number of restriction enzymes. Each blot contains a series of normal individuals and a series of tumors. Southern blots displaying hybridizing fragments (differing in length from control DNA when probed with sequences near or including the p-Hyde gene) indicate a possible mutation. If restriction enzymes which produce very large restriction fragments are used, then pulsed field gel electrophoresis (PFGE) is employed.
  • PFGE pulsed field gel electrophoresis
  • Detection of point mutations may be accomplished by molecular cloning of the p-Hyde allele(s) and sequencing the allele(s) using techniques well known tn the art.
  • the gene sequences can be amplified directly from a genomic DNA preparation from the tumor tissue, using known techniques. The DNA sequence of the amplified sequences can then be dete ⁇ nined.
  • SSCA single stranded conformation analysis
  • DGGE denaturing gradient gel electrophoresis
  • RNase protection assays Finkelstein et al., 1990; Kinszleret al., 1991
  • ASOs ailele-specific oligonucleotides
  • coli mutS protein (Modrich, 1991); and 6) ailele-specific PCR (Ratio & Kidd, 1989).
  • primers are used which hybridize at their 3' ends to a particular p-Hyde mutation. If the particular p-Hyde mutation is not present, an amplification product is not observed.
  • Amplification Refractory Mutation System (ARMS) can also be used, as disclosed in European Patent Application Publication No. 0332435 and in Newton et al., 1989. Insertions and deletions of genes can also be detected by cloning, sequencing and amplification.
  • restriction fragment length polymorphism (RFLP) probes for the gene or surrounding marker genes can be used to score alteration of an allele or an insertion in a polymorphic fragment.
  • RFLP restriction fragment length polymorphism
  • Such a method is particularly useful for screening relatives of an affected individual for the presence of the p-Hyde mutation found in that individual.
  • Other techniques for detecting insertions and deletions as known in the art can be used.
  • DNA probes can be used to detect mismatches, through enzymatic or chemical cleavage. See, e.g., Cotton et al., 1988; Shenk et aL, 1975; Novack et al., 1986.
  • mismatches can be detected by shifts in the electrophoretic mobility of mismatched duplexes relative to matched duplexes. See, e.g., Cariello, 1988.
  • the cellular mRNA or DNA which might contain a mutation can be amplified using PCR (see below) before hybridization. Changes in DNA of the p-Hyde gene can also be detected using Southern hybridization, especially if the changes are gross rearrangements, such as deletions and insertions.
  • DNA sequences of the p-Hyde gene which have been amplified by use of PCR may also be screened using ailele-specific probes.
  • These probes are nucleic acid oligomers, each of which contains a region of the p-Hyde gene sequence harboring a known mutation.
  • one oligomer may be about 30 nucleotides in length, corresponding to a portion of the p-Hyde gene sequence.
  • Hybridization of ailele-specific probes with amplified p-Hyde sequences can be performed, for example, on a nylon filter. Hybridization to a particular probe under stringent hybridization conditions indicates the presence of the same mutation in the tumor tissue as in the ailele-specific probe.
  • Alteration of p-Hyde mRNA expression can be detected by any techniques known in the art. These include Northern blot analysis, PCR amplification and RNase protection. Diminished mRNA expression indicates an alteration of the wild-type p-Hyde gene. 00/7156
  • Alteration of wild-type p-Hyde genes can also be detected by screening for alteration of wild-type p-Hyde protein.
  • monoclonal antibodies immunoreactive with p-Hyde can be used to screen a tissue. Lack of cognate antigen would indicate a p-Hyde mutation.
  • Antibodies specific for products of mutant alleles could also be used to detect mutant p-Hyde gene product.
  • immunological assays can be done in any convenient formats Icnown in the art. These include Western blots, immiinohistochemical assays and ELISA assays. Any means for detecting an altered p-Hyde protein can be used to detect alteration of wild-type p-Hyde genes.
  • assays such as protein binding determinations, can be used.
  • assays can be used which detect p-Hyde biochemical function. Finding a mutant p-Hyde gene product indicates alteration of a wild-type p-Hyde gene. Mutant p-Hyde genes or gene products can also be detected in other human body samples, such as serum, stool, urine and sputum.
  • the present invention also provides for fusion polypeptides, comprising p-Hyde polypeptides and fragments.
  • Homologous polypeptides may be fusions between two or more p-Hyde polypeptide sequences or between the sequences of p-Hyde and a related protein.
  • heterologous fusions may be constructed which would exhibit a combination of properties or activities of tlie derivative proteins. For example, ligand-binding or other domains may be "swapped" between different new fusion polypeptides or fragments.
  • Such homologous or heterologous fusion polypeptides may display, for example, altered strength or specificity of binding.
  • Fusion partners include immunoglobulins, bacterial beta -galactosidase, trpE, protein A, beta -lactamase, alpha amylase, alcohol dehydrogenase and yeast alpha mating factor. See, e.g., Godowski et al. , 1988. Fusion proteins will typically be made by either recombinant nucleic acid methods, as described below, or may be chemically synthesized. Techniques for the synthesis of polypeptides are described, for example, in Merrifield, 1963.
  • Probes for p-Hyde alleles may be derived from tlie sequences of the p-Hyde region or its cDNAs.
  • the probes may be of any suitable length, which span all or a portion of the p-Hyde region, and which allow specific hybridization to the p-Hyde region. If the target sequence contains a sequence identical to that of the probe, the probes may be short, e.g., in the range of about 8-30 base pairs, since tl e hybrid will be relatively stable under even stringent conditions. If some degree of mismatch is expected with the probe, i.e., if it is suspected that the probe will hybridize to a variant region, a longer probe may be employed which hybridizes to tlie target sequence with the requisite specificity.
  • the probes will include an isolated polynucleotide attached to a label or reporter molecule and may be used to isolate other polynucleotide sequences, having sequence similarity by standard methods. For techniques for preparing and labeling probes see, e.g., Sambrook et al. , 1989 or Ausubel et al., 1992.
  • Probes comprising synthetic oligonucleotides or other polynucleotides of the present invention may be derived from naturally occurring or recombinant single- or double-stranded polynucleotides, or be chemically synthesized. Probes may also be labeled by nick translation, Klenow fill-in reaction, or other methods known in the art.
  • Tlie probes may also be used to determine whether mRNA encoding p-Hyde is present in a cell or tissue.
  • This invention provides a method of inhibiting the growth of cancer cells, comprising the steps of obtaining the cells and contacting the cells of tlie subject with a replication-deficient adenovirus type 5 expression vector comprising an adenovirus genome having a deletion in the El and E3 region of the genome and an insertion within the region of a nucleic acid encoding p-Hyde under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter, thereby inhibiting the growth of the prostate cancer cells.
  • This invention provides a method of inhibiting the growth a prostate cancer cells, comprising: 1) obtaining a sample of prostate cells from a subject; 2) contacting the cells with a replication deficient adenovirus type 5 expression vector which comprises an adenovirus genome having a deletion in the El and E3 regions of the genome and an insertion within the regions of a p-Hyde cDNA under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter; and 3) introducing the cells into the subject, thereby inhibiting the growth of the cancer cells.
  • This invention provides a method of suppressing the growth of cancer cells in a subject, comprising introducing into tlie cancer cell an amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein, thereby suppressing the growth of cancer cells in the subject.
  • This invention provides a method of suppressing growth of cancer cells in a subject, comprising administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby suppressing the growth of cancer cells in the subject.
  • apoptotic response was assessed using DNA laddering assay. DNAs were extracted after the respective treatment (24 hours with 1 mM Hydroxyurea followed by 24 hours with 0.1 mM 5'-dFUrd) and analyzed on 1.6% agarose gel electrophoresis. In agreement with cell cycle analyses, apoptotic response of the stable transfectants ATI -HI and AT3-H1 (pcHYDE transfected AT-1 and AT-3) are consistently and significantly higher relative to both parental (AT-1 and AT-3) and pcDNA-transfected parental cell lines (ATI -pel and AT3-pcl).
  • the enhanced apoptotic response in AT1-H1 and AT3-H1 transfectant after hydroxyurea treatment is the result of "thymineless death" (Kyprianou, 1994, Kyprianou et al., 1994) leading to depletion of intracellular thymidJne-5-triphos ⁇ hate (TTP) pools through indirect inhibition of thymidylate synthetase by fluorodeoxyuridine.
  • TTP thymidJne-5-triphos ⁇ hate
  • the exact mechanism of the apoptosis itself in association with TTP depletion is not Icnown. Taken together, these data suggest that the apoptotic response in the pcHYDE stable trausfectants is likely due to the downstream effect of pcHYDE gene product.
  • This invention provides a method of inducing susceptibility to apoptosis of cancer cells, comprising introducing into the cancer cell an amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein, thereby inducing susceptibility to apoptosis.
  • This invention provides a method of inducing susceptibility to apoptosis of cancer cells in a subject, comprising administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby inducing susceptibility to apoptosis.
  • AT3 cell line was transfected with pcHYDE, a construct of p-Hyde in mammalian expression vector of ⁇ cDNA3.1(-) under G418 selection.
  • pcHYDE a construct of p-Hyde in mammalian expression vector of ⁇ cDNA3.1(-) under G418 selection.
  • AT-3 cell line was also transfected with the vector only and the stable transfectants obtained was designated as AT3-pc.
  • the tumor growth of the parental cell line of AT-3 and in stable transfecta ⁇ t AT3-H1 and AT3-H2 have been evaluated in vivo.
  • p-Hyde l as the dual ability to act like a tumor suppressor gene and induce susceptibility to apoptosis by what may be p53 independent pathways.
  • the growth of prostate tumors in rats was greatly inhibited by p-Hyde.
  • prostate cancer cells expressing p-Hyde were more sensitive to UV DNA damage driving these cells into cell programmed death.
  • Analysis of DNA repair enzyme activity suggests a defect resulting in the presence of intact (6-4) PP and decreased cell survival by colony forming assay.
  • the capacity of p-Hyde to induce susceptibility to apoptosis is not limited to UV DNA damage.
  • Chemotherapy agent Fluorodeoxyuridine, a pyrimidine antimetabolite which is related to fluorouraciJ (5-FU) and has been used for treatment of a wide variety of human epithelial malignancies, also more readily induces apoptosis in prostate cancer cell expressing p-Hyde.
  • cancer cells expressing p-Hyde are also more susceptible to gamma radiation.
  • the mechanisms of cellular DNA injury are different for UV, gamma radiation, and Fluorodeoxyuridine suggesting that the ability to make cells more susceptible to apoptosis is more global in action.
  • This unique function of p-Hyde may represent a new class genes that induce susceptibility to apoptosis.
  • This invention provides a method of suppressing cancer cells, comprising hitroducing into the cancer cell an amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein, thereby inducing susceptibility to apoptosis.
  • This invention provides a method of suppressing cancer cells a subject, comprising administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby suppressing cancer cells.
  • This invention provides a method of treating a subject with cancer which comprises administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protehi, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or tl e nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby treating tlie subject with cancer.
  • This invention provides a method of treating a subject with cancer, comprising: 1) administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein in combination with radiation, chemotherapy, or UV mimetic drugs; and 2) a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby treating the subject with cancer.
  • the unique functional features of the p-Hyde gene may be exploited for the treatment of hyperproliferative disorders and cancer.
  • One effective therapeutic strategy for example, may be tlie treatment of carcinoma cells expressing p-Hyde with chemotherapy agents or UV mimetic drugs (such as acetylaminofluorine).
  • chemotherapy agents such as acetylaminofluorine
  • UV mimetic drugs such as acetylaminofluorine
  • Tumors transduced with vectors containing p-Hyde may not only be directly suppressed by p-Hyde as demonstrated in this study, but also when treated in combination with DNA damaging therapy such as chemotherapy, UV mimetic drugs, or radiation, have even a greater anti -cancer effect. Since gene therapy will target cancer cells, then enhancement of apoptosis will occur more selectively in cancer cells following DNA damage (UV, radiation, or chemotherapy).
  • This invention a method of treating a subject with cancer, comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising 1 ) an adenovirus type 5 expression vector which comprises an adenovirus genome having a deletion h the El and E3 regions of the genome and an insertion within the regions of a full length sense p-Hyde cDNA under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter, and 2) a suitable carrier or diluent, thereby treating the subject with cancer
  • the cancer is selected from a group consisting of: melanoma; lymphoma; leulcemia; and prostate, colorectal, pancreatic, breast, brain, or gastric carcinoma.
  • the present invention provides the means necessary for production of gene-based therapies diiected at cancer cells
  • therapeutic agents may take the form of polynucleotides comprising all or a portion of the p-Hyde locus placed in appropriate vectors or delivered to target cells in more direct ways such that the function of the p-Hyde protein is reconstituted.
  • Therapeutic agents may also take the form of polypeptides based on either a portion of, or the entire protehi sequence of p-Hyde. These may functionally replace the activity of p-Hyde in vivo.
  • a suitable bodily fluid includes, but is not limited to- serum, plasma, cerebrospinal fluid, lymphocytes, urine, transudates, or exudates.
  • the suitable bodily fluid sample is serum or plasma.
  • the bodily fluid sample may be cells from bone marrow, or a supernatant from a cell culture Methods of obtaining a suitable bodily fluid sample from a subject are known to those skilled in the art. Methods of determining tl e level of antibody or antigen include, but are not limited to: ELISA, IF A, and Western blotting.
  • the diagnostic assays of the invention can be nucleic acid assays such as nucleic acid hybridization assays and assays which detect amplification of specific nucleic acid to detect for a nucleic acid sequence of the human p-Hyde described herein.
  • Target specific probes may be used in the nucleic acid hybridization diagnostic.
  • the probes are specific for or complementary to tlie target of interest. For precise allelic differentiations, the probes should be about 14 nucleotides long and preferably about 20-30 nucleotides.
  • nucleic acid probes are about 50 to about 1000 nucleotides, most preferably about 200 to about 400 nucleotides.
  • the specific nucleic acid probe can be RNA or DNA polynucleotide or oligonucleotide, or their analogs.
  • the probes may be single or double stranded nucleotides.
  • the probes of the invention may be synthesized enzymatically, usmg methods well known in the art (e g., nick translation, primer extension, reverse transcription, the polymerase chain reaction, and others) or chemically (e.g., by methods such as the phosphora idite method described by Beaucage and Carruthers [19], or by the triester method according to Matteucci, et al. [62], both incorporated herein by reference).
  • An alternative means for determining tlie presence of the human p-Hyde is in situ hybridization, or more recently, in situ polymerase chain reaction.
  • In situ PCR is described in Neuvo et al. [71], Intracellular localization of polymerase chain reaction (PCR)-amplif ⁇ ed Hepatitis C cDNA; Bagasra et al. [10], Detection of Human Immunodeficiency virus type 1 provirus in mononuclear cells by in situ polymerase chain reaction; and Heniford et al. [35], Variation in cellular EGF receptor mRNA expression demonstrated by in situ reverse transcriptase polymerase chain reaction.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • In situ hybridization assays are well Icnown and are generally described in Methods Enzymol. [67] incorporated by reference herein, hi an in situ hybridization, cells are fixed to a solid support, typically a glass slide. The cells are then contacted with a hybridization solution at a moderate temperature to permit annealing of target-specific probes that are labelled.
  • the probes are preferably labelled w th radioisotopes or fluorescent reporters.
  • the above described probes are also useful for in-situ hybridization or in order to locate tissues which express this gene, or for other hybridization assays for the presence of this gene or its MRNA in various biological tissues. In-situ hybridization is a sensitive localization method which is not dependent on expression of antigens or native vs. 5 denatured conditions.
  • inhibitory nucleic acid therapy approaches can be classified into those that target DNA sequences, those that target RNA sequences (including pre-mRNA and mRNA), those that target proteins (sense strand approaches), and those that cause l o cleavage or chemical modification of the target nucleic acids.
  • Nucleic acids can be designed to bind to the major groove of the duplex DNA to fonn a triple helical or "triplex" structure.
  • inhibitory nucleic acids are designed to bind to regions of 1 single stranded DNA resulting from the opening of the duplex DNA during replication •or transcription.
  • inhibitory nucleic acids are designed to bind to mRNA or mRNA precursors. Inhibitory nucleic acids are used to prevent maturation of pre-mRNA. 20 Inhibitory nucleic acids may be designed to interfere with RNA processing, splicing or translation.
  • the inhibitory nucleic acids can be targeted to mRNA.
  • tlie inhibitory nucleic acids are designed to specifically block translation of the encoded protein.
  • the inhibitory nucleic acid can be used to selectively suppress certain cellular functions by inhibition of translation of mRNA encoding critical proteins.
  • an inhibitory nucleic acid complementary to regions of c-myc mRNA inhibits c-myc protein expression in a human promyelocytic leukemia cell line, HL60, which overexpresses the c-myc proto-oncogene. See Wiclcstrom EX., et al. [93] and
  • inhibitory nucleic acids targeting mRNA have been shown to work by several different mechanisms to inhibit translation of the encoded protein(s).
  • the inhibitory nucleic acids can be used to induce chemical inactivation or cleavage of the target genes or mRNA. Chemical inactivation can occur by the induction of crosslinks between the inhibitory nucleic acid and tl e target nucleic acid withm the cell. Other chemical modifications of the target nucleic acids induced by appropriately derivatized inhibitory nucleic acids may also be used.
  • Cleavage, and therefore inactivation, of the target nucleic acids may be effected by attaching a substituent to the inhibitory nucleic acid which can be activated to induce cleavage reactions.
  • the substituent can be one that affects either chemical, or enzymatic cleavage.
  • cleavage can be induced by the use of ribozymes or catalytic RNA.
  • the inhibitory nucleic acids would comprise either naturally occurring RNA (ribozymes) or synthetic nucleic acids with catalytic activity,
  • compositions could mean therapeutically effective amounts of polypeptide products of the invention together with suitable diluents, preservatives, solubilizers, emulsifiers, adjuvant and or earners useful in SCF (stem cell factor) therapy.
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” as used herein refers to that amount which provides a therapeutic effect for a given condition and administration regimen.
  • Such compositions are liquids or lyophilized or otherwise dried foniiulations and include diluents of various buffer content (e.g., Tris-HCL, acetate, phosphate), pH and ionic strength, additives such as albumin or gelatin to prevent absorption to surfaces, detergents (e.g..
  • solubilizing agents e.g., glycerol, polyethylene glycerol
  • anti-oxidants e.g., ascorbic acid, sodium metabisulfite
  • preservatives e.g., Thimerosal, benzyl alcohol, parabens
  • bulking substances or tonicity modifiers e.g., lactose, mannitol
  • covalent attachment of polymers such as polyethylene glycol to the protein, coraplexation with metal ions, or incorporation of tlie material into or onto particulate preparations of polymeric compounds such as polylactic acid, polglycolic acid, hydrogels, etc, or onto liposomes, microemulsions, micelles, unilamellar or multilamellar vesicles, erythrocyte ghosts, or spheroplasts.
  • compositions will influence tl e physical state, solubility, stability, rate of in vivo release, and rate of in vivo clearance of SCF.
  • the choice of compositions will depend on the physical and chemical properties of the protein having SCF activity. For example, a product derived from a membrane-bound form of SCF may require a formulation containing detergent.
  • Controlled or sustained release compositions include formulation in lipophilic depots (e.g., fatty acids, waxes, oils).
  • paniculate compositions coated with polymers e.g., poloxamers or poloxamines
  • SCF coupled to antibodies directed agamst tissue-specific receptors, ligands or antigens or coupled to ligands of tissue-specific receptors.
  • compositions of tlie invention incorporate particulate forms protective coatings, protease inhibitors or permeation enhancers for various routes of administration, including parenteral, pulmonary, nasal and oral.
  • pharmaceutical composition is administered parenterally, paracancerally, transmucosally, transde ⁇ nally, intramuscularly, intravenously, intradermaly, subcutaneously, intraperitonealy, intraventricularly, intracranialy.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier include, but are not limited to, 0.01-0. IM and preferably 0.05M phosphate buffer or 0.8% saline.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carriers may be aqueous or non-aqueous solutions, suspensions, and emulsions.
  • non-aqueous solvents are propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, vegetable oils such as olive oil, and mjectable organic esters such as ethyl oieate.
  • Aqueous carriers include water, alcoholic/aqueous solutions, emulsions or suspensions, including saline and buffered media.
  • Parenteral vehicles include sodium chloride solution, Ringer's dextrose, dextrose and sodium chloride, lactated Ringer's or fixed oils.
  • Intravenous vehicles include fluid and nutrient replenishers, electrolyte replenishers such as those based on Ringer's dextrose, and the like. Preseivatives and other additives may also be present, such as, for example, antimicrobials, antioxidants, collating agents, inert gases and the like.
  • adjuvant refers to a compound or mixture that enhances the immune response to an antigen.
  • An adjuvant can serve as a tissue depot that slowly releases the antigen and also as a lymphoid system activator that non-specifically enhances the immune response (Hood et al., Immunology, Second Ed , 1984, Benjamin/Cummings: Menlo Park, California, p. 384).
  • a primary challenge with an antigen alone, in the absence of an adjuvant will fail to elicit a humoral or cellular immune response.
  • Adjuvant include, but are not limited to, complete Freund's adjuvant, incomplete Freund's adjuvant, saponin, mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil or hydrocarbon emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanins, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful human adjuvant such as BCG (hacille Calmette-G ⁇ enn) and Corynebacterium parvum.
  • the adjuvant is pharmaceutically acceptable.
  • Conn-oiled or sustained release compositions include fo ⁇ nulation in hpophilic depots (e.g. fatty acids, waxes, oils).
  • hpophilic depots e.g. fatty acids, waxes, oils.
  • particulate compositions coated with polymers e.g. poloxamers or poloxamines
  • the compound coupled lo antibodies directed against tissue-specific receptors, ligands or antigens or coupled to ligands of tissue-specific receptors.
  • Other embodiments of the compositions of the invention incorporate particulate forms protective coatings, protease inhibitors or permeation enhancers for various routes of administration, including parenteral, pulmonary, nasal and oral.
  • Such modifications may also increase the compound's solubility in aqueous solution, eliminate aggregation, enhance the physical and chemical stability of the compound, and greatly reduce the immunogenicity and reactivity of the compound.
  • the desired in vivo biological activity may be achieved by the administration of such polymer-compound abducts less frequently or in lower doses than with the unmodified compound. Dosages.
  • the sufficient amount may include but is not limited to from about 1 ⁇ g/kg to about 1000 mg/kg.
  • the amount may be 10 mg/ g.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable form of tl e composition includes a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • compositions which contain an active component
  • an active component is well understood in the art.
  • such compositions are prepared as an aerosol of the polypeptide delivered to tlie nasopharynx or as injectables, either as liquid solutions or suspensions, however, solid forms suitable for solution hi, or suspension in, liquid prior to injection can also be prepared.
  • the preparation can also be emulsified.
  • the active therapeutic ingredient is often mixed with excipients which are pharmaceutically acceptable and compatible with the active ingredient. Suitable excipients are, for example, water, salme, dextrose, glycerol, ethanol, or the like and combinations thereof.
  • the composition can contain minor amounts of auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents which enhance the effectiveness of the active ingredient.
  • An active component can be formulated into the therapeutic composition as neutralized pharmaceutically acceptable salt forms.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include the acid addition salts (fanned with the free amino groups of the polypeptide or antibody molecule) and which are formed with inorganic acids such as, for example, hydrochloric or phosphoric acids, or such organic acids as acetic, oxalic, tartaric, mandelic, and the like. Salts formed from the free carboxyl groups can also be derived from inorganic bases such as, for example, sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, or ferric hydroxides, and such organic bases as isopropylamine, trimethylamine, 2-ethylaroino ethanol, histidine, procaine, and the like.
  • a composition comprising "A” (where "A” is a single protein, DNA molecule, vector, etc.) is substantially free of “B” (where “B” comprises one or more contaminating proteins, DNA molecules, vectors, etc.) when at least about 75%> by weight of the proteins, DNA, vectors (depending on the category of species to which A and B belong) in the composition is "A”
  • "A” comprises at least about 90% by weight of the A+B species in the composition, most preferably at least about 99% by weight.
  • terapéuticaally effective amount is used herein to mean an amount sufficient to reduce by at least about 15 percent, preferably by at least 50 percent, more preferably by al least 90 percent, and most preferably prevent, a clinically significant deficit in the activity, function and response of the host.
  • the component or components of a therapeutic composition of tlie invention may be introduced parenterally, tra ⁇ smucosally, e.g , orally, nasally, pulmoiiarailly, or rectally, or transde ⁇ nally.
  • administration is parenteral, e.g., via intravenous injection, and also including, but is not limited to, intra-arteriole, intramuscular, intradermal, subcutaneous, lnttaperitoneal, intraventricular, and mtracranial administration.
  • unit dose when used in reference to a therapeutic composition of the present invention refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosage for humans, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce tlie desired therapeutic effect in association with tlie required diluent; i.e., carrier, or vehicle.
  • a method is also provided of supplying wild-type p-Hyde function to a cell which carries mutant p-Hyde alleles. Supplying such a function should suppress neoplastic growth of tl e recipient cells.
  • the wild-type p-Hyde gene or a part of tl e gene may be introduced into the cell in a vector such that tlie gene remains extrachromosomal. In such a situation, the gene will be expressed by the cell from the extrachromosomal location.
  • a " gene fragment is introduced and expressed in a cell carrying a mutant p-Hyde allele
  • the gene fragment should encode a part of the p-Hyde protein wliich is required for non-neoplastic growth of the cell. More preferred is the situation where the wild-type p-Hyde gene or a part thereof is introduced into the mutant cell in such a way that it rcco bines with the endogenous mutant p-Hyde gene present in the cell. Such recombination requires a double recombination event which results in the co ⁇ ection of the p-Hyde gene mutation.
  • Vectors for introduction of genes both for recombination and for extrachromosomal maintenance are known in the art, and any suitable vector may be used.
  • the p-Hyde gene or fragment may be employed in gene therapy methods in order to increase the amount of the expression products of such genes in cancer cells.
  • gene therapy is particulaiiy appropriate for use in both cancerous and pre-cancerous cells, in which the level of p-Hyde polypeptide is absent or diminished compared to normal cells. It may also be useful to increase the level of expression of a given p-Hyde gene even in those rumor cells in which the mutant gene is expressed at a "normal" level, but the gene product is not fully functional
  • Gene therapy would be carried out according to generally accepted methods, for example, as described by Friedman, 1991.
  • Cells from a patient's tumor would be first analyzed by the diagnostic methods described above, to ascertain the production of p-Hyde polypeptide in the rumor cells.
  • a virus or plasmid vector (see further details below), containing a copy of the p-Hyde gene linked to expression control elements and capable of replicating inside the rumor cells, is prepared.
  • Suitable vectors are known, such as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,252,479 and PCT published application WO 93/07282.
  • the vector is then inj ected into the patient, either locally at the site of tlie rumor or systemically (in order to reach any rumor cells That may have metastasized to other sites). If the transfected gene is not permanently incorporated into the genome of each of the targeted minor cells, the treatment may have to be repeated periodically.
  • Gene transfer systems known in the art may be useful in tlie practice of the gene therapy methods of the present invention. These include viral and nonviral transfer methods.
  • viruses have been used as gene transfer vectors, including papovaviruses, e.g., SV40 (Madzak et al., 1992), adenovirus (Berlcner, 1992; Berlcner et al., 1988; Gorziglia and Kapikian, 1992; Quanthi et aL, 1992; Rosenfeld et al., 1992; Wilkinson et al., 1992; Stratford-Pen ⁇ caudet et al., 1990), vaccinia virus (Moss, 1 92), adeno-associated virus (Muzyczka, 1992; Ohi et al., 1990), herpesviruses including HSV and EBV (Margolskee, 1992; Johnson et al., 1992; Fink et al., 1992; Breakfield and Geller, 1987; Freese et aL, 1990), and retroviruses of avian (Brandyo adhy y and Temin
  • Peptides which have p-Hyde activity can be supplied to cells which carry mutant or missing p-Hyde alleles.
  • Tl e sequence of the p-Hyde protein is disclosed (SEQ ID NO:2).
  • Protein can be produced by expression of the cDNA sequence in bacteria, for example, using Icnown expression vectors.
  • p-Hyde polypeptide can be extracted from p-Hyde-producing mammalian cells.
  • the techniques of synthetic chemistry can be employed to synthesize p-Hyde protein. Any of such techniques can provide the preparation of the present invention which comprises the p-Hyde protein. The preparation is substantially free of other human proteins. This is most readily accomplished by synthesis in a microorganism or m vitro.
  • P-Hyde molecules can be introduced into cells by microinjection or by use of liposomes, for example. Alternatively, some active molecules may be taken up by cells, actively or by diffusion. Extracellular application of the p-Hyde gene product may be sufficient to affect rumor growth. Supply of molecules with p-Hyde activity should lead to partial reversal of the neoplastic state. Other molecules with p-Hyde activity (for example, peptides, drugs or organic compounds) may also be used to effect such a reversal. Modified polypeptides having substantially similar function are also used for peptide therapy.
  • the active compound can be delivered in a vesicle, in particular a liposome (see Langer, Science 249:1527-1533 (1990); Treat et aL, in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 353-365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 317-327; see generally ibid).
  • a liposome see Langer, Science 249:1527-1533 (1990); Treat et aL, in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 353-365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 317-327; see generally ibid).
  • the therapeutic compound can be delivered in a controlled release system.
  • the polypeptide may be administered using intravenous infusion, an implantable osmotic pump, a transdermal patch, liposomes, or other modes of administration.
  • a pump may be used (see Langer, supra; Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref. Biomed. Eng. 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et al., Surgery 88:507 (1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl. J. Med.
  • polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Florida (1974); Controlled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J. Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol. Chem. 23:61 (1983); see also Levy et al., Science 228:190 (1985); During et al., Ann. Neurol. 25:351 (1989); Howard et al., J. Neurosurg. 71 :105 (1989)).
  • a controlled release system can be placed in proximity of the therapeutic target, i.e., the brain, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115-138 (1984)).
  • a controlled release device is introduced into a subject in proximity of the site of inappropriate immune activation or a tumor.
  • Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (Science 249:1527-1533 (1990)).
  • a subject in whom administration of an active component as set ' forth above is an effective therapeutic regimen for a bacterial infection is preferably a human, but can be any animal.
  • tlie methods and pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention are particularly suited to administration to any animal, particularly a mammal, and including, but by no means limited to, domestic animals, such as feline or canine subjects, farm animals, such as but not limited to bovine, equine, caprine, ovine, and porcine subjects, wild animals (whether in the wild or in a zoological garden), research animals, such as mice, rats, rabbits, goats, sheep, pigs, dogs, cats, etc., i.e. , for veterinary medical use.
  • a therapeutically effective dosage of the active component is provided.
  • a therapeutically effective dosage can be dete ⁇ nined by the ordinary skilled medical worker based on patient characteristics (age, weight, sex, condition, complications, other diseases, etc.), as is well Icnown in the art. Furthermore, as further routine studies are conducted, more specific information will emerge regarding appropriate dosage levels for treatment of various conditions in various patients, and tlie ordinary skilled worker, considering tlie therapeutic context, age and general health of the recipient, is able to ascertain proper dosing. Generally, for intravenous injection or infusion, dosage may be lower than for intraperitoneal, intramuscular, or other route of administration.
  • the dosing schedule may vary, depending on tlie circulation half-life, and the fo ⁇ uulation used.
  • the compositions are administered in a manner compatible with the dosage formulation ui the therapeutically effective amount. Precise amounts of active ingredient required to be administered depend on the judgment of the practitioner and are peculiar to each individual. However, suitable dosages may range from about 0.1 to 20, preferably about 0.5 to about 10, and more preferably one to several, milligrams of active ingredient per kilogram body weight of individual per day and depend on tl e route of administration. Suitable regimes for initial administration and booster shots are also variable, but are typified by an initial administration followed by repeated doses at one or more hour intervals by a subsequent injection or other administration. Alternatively, continuous intravenous infusion sufficient to maintain concentrations of ten nanomolar to ten micromolar in the blood are contemplated
  • p-Hyde replacement therapy could be used similarly in conjunction with chemo- or radiotherapeutic intervention.
  • a "target" cell with the expression vector and at least one DNA damaging agent.
  • the cell is contacted with a single composition or pharmacological formulation that includes both agents, or by contacting the cell with two distinct compositions or formulations, at the same time, wherein one composition includes the vectoi and the other includes the DNA damaging agent.
  • treatment with the vector may precede or follow the DNA damaging agent treatment by intervals ranging from minutes to weeks. Protocols and methods are Icnown to those skilled in tlie art.
  • DNA damaging agents or factors are known to those skilled in the art and means any chemical compound or treatment method that induces DNA damage when applied to a cell. Such agents and factors mclude radiation and waves that induce DNA damage such as, gamma -irradiation, X-rays, UV-irradiation, microwaves, electronic emissions, and the like. A variety of chemical compounds, also described as "chemotherapeutic agents", function to induce DNA damage, all of which are intended to be of use in the combined treatment methods disclosed herein. Chemotherapeutic agents contemplated to be of use.
  • the invention also encompasses the use of a combmation of one or more DNA damaging agents, whether radiation-based or actual compounds, -such as tlie use of X-rays with cisplatui or the use of cisplatin with etoposide.
  • the tumor cells may be contacted with the DNA damaging agent by administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a DNA damaging compound such as, ad ⁇ amycin, 5-fluorourac ⁇ I, etoposide, camptothecin, aclinomycin-D, mitomycin C, or more preferably, cisplatin.
  • the DNA damaging agent may be prepared and used as a combined therapeutic composition, or kit, by combining it with a p-Hydc expression construct, as descnbed above.
  • Agents that directly cross-link nucleic acids, specifically DNA, are envisaged and are shown herein, to eventuate DNA damage leading to a synergistic antineoplastic combination.
  • Agents such as cisplatin, and other DNA alkylating may be used.
  • Cisplatin has been widely used to treat cancer, with efficacious doses used in clinical applications of 20 mg/m ⁇ 2 > for 5 days every three weeks for a total of three courses. Cisplatin is not absorbed orally and must therefore be delivered via injection intravenously, subcutaneously, intratumorally or intraperitoneally.
  • Agents that damage DNA also include compounds that interfere with DNA replication, mitosis and chromosomal segregation.
  • chemotherapeutic compounds include adriamycin, also known as doxorubicin, etoposide, verapamil, podophyllotoxin, and tlie like. Widely used in a clinical setting for the treatment of neoplasms, these compounds are administered through bolus injections intravenously at doses ranging from 25-75 mg/m ⁇ 2 > at 21 day intervals for adriamycin, to 35-50 mg/m ⁇ 2 > for etoposide intravenously or double the intravenous dose orally.
  • nucleic acid precursors and subunits also lead to DNA damage.
  • nucleic acid precursors have been developed.
  • agents that have undergone extensive testing and are readily available are particularly useful.
  • agents such as 5-fluorouracil (5-FU) are preferentially used by neoplastic tissue, making this agent particularly useful for targeting to neoplastic cells.
  • 5-FU is applicable in a wide range of carriers, including topical, however intravenous administration with doses ranging from 3 to 15 mg/kg/day being commonly used.
  • DNA damaging factors include what are commonly known as gamma -rays, X-rays, and/or the directed delivery of radioisotopes to tumor cells.
  • Other forms of DNA damaging factors are also contemplated such as microwaves and UV-irradiation. It is most likely that all of these factors effect a broad range of damage DNA, on the precursors of DNA, the replication and repair of DNA, and the assembly and maintenance of chromosomes.
  • Dosage ranges for X-rays range from daily doses of 50 to 200 roentgens for prolonged periods of time (3 to 4 weeks), to single doses of 2000 to 6000 roentgens.
  • Radioisotopes vary widely, and depend on the half-life of the isotope, the strength and type of radiation emitted, and the uptake by the neoplastic cells.
  • Several non-viral methods for the transfer of expression constructs into cultured mammalian cells also are contemplated by the present invention.
  • helper cell lines may be derived from human cells such as human embryonic kidney cells, muscle cells, hematopoietic cells or other human embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells.
  • the helper cells may be derived from the cells of other mammalian species that are permissive for hunian adenovirus. Such cells include, e.g , Vero cells or other monkey embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells.
  • the preferred helper cell line is 293.
  • the active compound can be delivered in a vesicle, in particular a liposome (see Langer, Science 249:1527-1533 (1990); Treat et al., in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 353-365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 317-327; see generally ibid).
  • a liposome see Langer, Science 249:1527-1533 (1990); Treat et al., in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 353-365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 317-327; see generally ibid).
  • tlie therapeutic compound can be delivered in a controlled release system.
  • the polypeptide may be administered using intravenous infusion, an implantable osmotic pump, a transdermal patch, liposomes, or other modes of administration.
  • a pump may be used (see Langer, supra; Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref. Bionied. Eng. 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et aL, Surgery 88:507 (1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 321 :574 (1989)).
  • polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Florida (1974); Controlled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J. Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol. Chem. 23:61 (1983); see also Levy et al., Science 228: 190 (1985); During et al., Ann. Neural. 25:351 (1989); Howard et al., J. Neui-osurg. 71 : 105 (1989)).
  • a controlled release system can be placed in proximity of the therapeutic target, i.e., the brain, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115-138 (1984)).
  • a controlled release device is introduced into a subject in proximity of the site of inappropriate immune activation or a tumor.
  • Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (Science 249: 1527-1533 (1990)).
  • compositions of the present invention are particularly suited to administration to a mammal, preferable a human subject.
  • a therapeutically effective dosage of the active component is provided.
  • a therapeutically effective dosage can be determined by the ordinary skilled medical worker based on patient characteristics (age, weight, sex, condition, complications, other diseases, etc.), as is well known in the art. Furthermore, as further routine studies are conducted, more specific information will emerge regarding appropriate dosage levels for treat ⁇ ient of various conditions in variotis patients, and the ordinary skilled worker, considering the therapeutic context, age and general health of the recipient, is able to ascertain proper dosing. Generally, for intravenous injection or infusion, dosage may be lower than for intraperitoneal, intramuscular, or other route of administration. The dosing schedule may vary, depending on the circulation half-life, and the formulation used.
  • compositions are administered in a manner compatible with the dosage formulation in the therapeutically effective amount.
  • Precise amounts of active ingredient required to be administered depend on the judgment of the practitioner and are peculiar to each individual.
  • suitable dosages may range from about 0.1 to 20, preferably about 0.5 to about 10, and more preferably one to several, milligrams of active ingredient per kilogram body weight of individual per day and depend on the route of administration.
  • Suitable regimes for initial administration and booster shots are also variable, but are typified by an initial administration followed by repeated doses at one or more hour intervals by a subsequent injection or other administration.
  • continuous intravenous infusion sufficient to maintain concentrations of ten nanomolar to ten micromolar in the blood are contemplated.
  • the present invention provides a kit comprising the all tlie essential materials and reagents required for inhibiting prostate tumor cell proliferation, transforming prostate cells or detecting prostate cancer cells, may be assembled together hi a kit.
  • This generally will comprise selected expression constructs.
  • Also included may be various media for replication of the expression constructs and host cells for such replication.
  • Such kits will comprise distinct containers for each individual reagent.
  • the liquid solution preferably is an aqueous solution, with a sterile aqueous solution being particularly preferred.
  • the expression construct may be formulated into a pharmaceutically acceptable syringeable composition.
  • the container means may itself be an inhalent, syringe, pipette, eye dropper, or other such like apparatus, from which tlie formulation may be applied to an infected area of the body, such as the lungs, injected into an animal, or even applied to and mixed with the other components of the kit.
  • the components of the kit may also be provided in dried or lyophilized forms. When reagents or components are provided as a dried form, reconstitution generally is by the addition of a suitable solvent. It is envisioned that the solvent also may be provided ui another container means.
  • kits of the present invention also will typically include a means for containing the vials in close confinement for commercial sale such as, e.g., injection or blow-molded plastic containers into which the deshed vials are retained.
  • the kits of the mvention also may comprise, or be packaged with, an instrument for assisting with the injection/administration or placement of the ultimate complex composition within the body of an animal.
  • an instrument may be an inhalent, syringe, pipette, forceps, measured spoon, eye dropper or any such medically approved delivery vehicle.
  • EXAMPLE p-Hyde induces susceptibility to induction of cell progra ⁇ imed cell death in prostate cancer
  • rat prostatic cancer cell lines Two rat prostatic cancer cell lines (anaplastic tumor, low metastatic AT-1 and highly metastatic MAT-LyLu) were used for tlie cDNA competition hybridization strategy (Rhialdy and Steiner, 1997). Other Dumiing rat prostate cancer cell lines used for Northern analyses were AT-3, MAT-LyLu, MAT-Lu and G. These cell lines were derived from established in-vivo Dtmning R3327 rat prostatic tumor sublines and further developed as m-vilro cell lines by Isaacs et al at Johns Hopkins Oncology Center, Baltimore, Maryland (Isaacs et al., 1986).
  • Human prostate cancer cell lines PPC-1, LNCaP, TSU and DU145 used for Northern analyses were obtained from American Tissue Culture Collection, Roclcville, Maryland. All cells were grown in RPMI 1640 medium (Mediatech, Herndon, Virginia) in the presence of 10% fetal calf serum, 50 units of penicillin G and 50 ⁇ g streptomycin sulfate per l and 250 ⁇ M dexamethasone as previously described (Isaacs et al, 1986).
  • Northern blot analyses Total R As were isolated from cell lines during exponential growth (70% confluence) by using RNAZol B as suggested by the supplier (Tel-Test, Inc., Friendswood, Texas) and subjected to Northern blot analyses.
  • Reverse and forward PCR primer were designed and used to amplify 1.35 kb of the p-Hyde sequence representing the 1467 bases of its open reading frame.
  • the PCR product was radiolabeled by random oligo labeling technique (Multiprime DNA Labeling System, Amersha ) and used as a probe for Northern analyses.
  • Relative expression of p-Hyde gene was compared to an internal control (cyclophylin) by scanning of the autoradio ram with a PDI Discovery Series Scanner equipped with Quantity One software.
  • In vitro transcription and translation The open reading frame of the cDNA was confirmed using in-vitro transcription (capped mRNA) as described followed by in-vitro translation using rabbit reticulocyte lysate (Stratagene, La Jolla, California) in the presence of 75 Ci of L-[ 3S S] Methionine (Amersham, Arlington Heights, Illinois). The in vitro translation product was further identified on 10% SDS polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis by autoradiography.
  • the new construct of p-Hyde was then used to transfect AT3 rat prostatic cancer subline by using lipofectamine (Gibco/BRL) followed by G418 selection (Rhialdy et al., 1988). Eight clones were obtained and two of them, AT3-H1 and AT3-H2, were used to assess the function of p-Hyde in its association with apoptosis.
  • AT3 cell line was also transfected with pcDNA3.1(-) vector only and its stable transfected eel 1 line, designated as AT3-pc was used as negative control relative to stable transfectant of AT3-H1 and AT3-H2 for the functional assessment of the p-Hyde.
  • Apoptosis assay Apoptosis intensity in AT3 parental cell line was assessed in comparison with AT3-H1 , AT3-H2 and AT3-pc as negative control. Two apoptotic agents were employed for this assessment: (1) UV damage of tlie DNA using UV dosage of 200 J/m2; apoptosis intensity was assayed at 36 h post-UV i ⁇ adiation and (2) 100 ⁇ M Fluorodeoxy ⁇ ridiiie (FUrD) treatment for 36 hours followed by the apoptosis assay. After these apoptotic induction, cells were collected in two fractions: floating and attached cells. Both cell fractions were counted using Neubaue chamber and trypan blue exclusion. DNA were extracted separately from both fractions and analyzed on 1.6 % agarose gel electrophoresis to visualize the DNA laddering.
  • UV-da agc repair assay Ultraviolet induced damage in the DNA was assayed using mouse monoclonal antibody specifically cross reacts with cyclobutane pyrimidine dhner (TDM-2) and photoproduct (64M-2). The presence of cyclobutane dimer and 64 photoproducts in DNAs were assessed in microtiter plates (1 0 and 200 ng/well) using both antibodies separately in a standard ELISA technique. In addition, the UV resistance was also assessed by using UV gradient assay as published (Rinaldy et al, 1988).
  • Uridine Phosphorylase Assay Cell extract will be prepared from the cell pellet Before and after tlie induction with 1 mM 5-dFUrd for 24 hours, the corresponding cell extract will be prepared in 50 mM Potassium Phosphate buffer pH 7.4 through sonication followed by dialysis against the reaction buffer (50 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.4). The amount of protein will be determined by using standard Lowry or Biorad assay. The same amount of protein from all cell lines will be assayed for UP activity in 50 mM potassium phosphate buffer (pH 7.4) containing 10 mM uridine or thymidine as substrate.
  • reaction product Uracil or Thymidine can be measured with UV detector at 265 nm compared to tlie standard. As negative controL the similar reaction mixture will be boiled before the incubation.
  • cDNA libraries derived from AT-1 and MAT-LyLu cell lines were generated using Uni ZAP XR vector based on the protocol of Sttatagene. The independent clones obtained were 1.9 and 3.4 million clones for MAT-LyLu and AT-1, respectively. These unamplified libraries were subjected to PCR amplification of the cDNA insert population. Reverse primers (RP) and forward primers (FP), downstream and upstream of Xhol and Eco RI cloning site, were used to amplify the cDNA insert population. Tlie distance between both primers in ? Uni ZAP or pBluescript was 228 bases.
  • Radiolabeled MAT-LyLu cDNA population probe was amplified: radiolabeled MAT-LyLu cDNA population probe and the non-radiolabeled AT-1 cDNA population probe (the cold competitor).
  • the radiolabeled MAT-LyLu PCR product was enriched using S400 Sephacryl spin column. The majority of tlie unincorporated 32 P-dCTP, prhner dimer, and 228 bp of PCR product resulting from tl e amplification of ? DNA without insert, was separated from the cDNAs.
  • the purified radiolabeled cDNAs were mixed with 30 fold excess of non-radiolabeled cold competitor AT-1 PCR products and used as a competition-probe to screen the MAT-LyLu cDNA library.
  • Two kinds of unexpected radiolabeled PCR products that may potentially interfere with the hybridization between the radiolabeled cDNA of the competition probe and the screened cDNA of the library were: 1) the non-exponential amplification of the cDNAs, and 2) 228 bp PCR product derived from the ? DNA without cDNA insert.
  • excess amounts of I-ImdI ⁇ -digested_DNA, PvuII-digested-pBluescript DNA, and the 228 bp PCR product of the pBluescript based on both primers were mixed with the competition probe.
  • helper phage ExAssist (Stratagene) to excise the cDNA with the pBluescript sequence h circular form as a filamentous phage and secreted from the cell (Fig. 2).
  • Recombinant pBluescript plasmids were recovered by infecting an F' strain of E. coli (SOLR strain, Stratagene), ampicilliii resistant colonies were selected, and the plasmid DNA was extracted.
  • the obtained plasmids were digested with Eco RI and Xhol to identify the cDNA inserts by agarose geJ electrophoresis. The results indicated that only four plasmids carried cDNA inserts.
  • MAT-LyLu exhibits twice the number of both nucleoli and mitochondria (Isaacs et al, 1986). This also suggests that the MAT-LyLu cell line is metabolically more active due to higher gene-dosage or gene-amplification of nucleolar and mitochondrial rRNA and its associated genes.
  • the complete sequence of the putative gene, p-Hyde The fourth cDNA (lane 1), designated as p-Hyde, had an initial sequence which did not match any known full length sequences in the BLASTN nucleic acid database of the NCBI. Accordingly, p-Hyde cDNA was completely sequenced by using a walk-through sequencing strategy in both directions for three redundancies. Nine contigs from each sequencing direction were obtained and compounded as a full length composite of 2694 bases. Tiie poly(A) tail on the 3 '-end and polyadenylation signal sequence of GAGAAA (a slight modification of the conserved AATAAA sequence) located at the position 27 upstream from the poly(A) was also identified.
  • GAGAAA a slight modification of the conserved AATAAA sequence
  • Fig.6 shows the sequencing strategy and the restriction map illustrating the open reading frame of p-Hyde.
  • SEQ ID No. 3 sets forth the resulting nucleic acid sequence of the rat p-Hyde and the resulting amino acid sequence of the rat p-Hyde.
  • Figure 8 shows the PCR amplification of the cDNA insert using three sets of sequencing primers.
  • PCR product based on primer 11 and 5 represents the open reading frame of 0a& p-Hyde cDNA . It was further radiolabeled by Random-Oligo-Labeling technique and used as a representative probe for the cDNA insert in Northern analysis.
  • Northern blot analysis of p-H de Some of the rat prostate- cancer sublines (AT-1, MAT-LyLu, MAT-Lu, AT-3 and G) and human prostate cancer cell line (PPC, LNCaP, DU145 and TSU) were assessed by Northern blot analysis using PCR radiolabeled probe. The result indicated that the transcript of the human counterpart was slightly smaller relative to the rat p-Hyde mRNA. Tlie same blot was further hybridized with cyclophylin cDNA as internal conttol. In this antoradiogram, 28S and 18S ribosomal RNA were used as marker.
  • MAT-Lu showed the highest level of transcription, whereas AT-3 had the lowest.
  • AT-3 had the lowest.
  • the level of transcription in MAT-LyLu was relatively higher than that of AT-1, suggesting that the novel cDNA was the result of cDNA competition between MAT-LyLu and AT-1 cDNAs.
  • the human homologue of p-Hyde does exist as demonstrated in the human prostate cancer cell lines The highest level of p-Hyde transcription occurred in PPC-1, whereas tlie lowest was in LNCaP cell line (Table 1).
  • Two peptide regions (residues 113 through 131 and residues 223 through 249) exhibited the highest points of hydrophilicity and the antigenic index. Both peptide sequences can be used as immunogenic peptide to generate antibody. Its application to detect the translation product of p-Hyde hi Western analysis was in agreement with the highest score of its surface probability.
  • This capped mRNA was then used as a template for in-vitro translation using rabbit reticulocyte lysates (Stratagene) in tl e presence of 35 S-Methionine.
  • the translation products were identified under denaturing conditions using polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis containing 8 M urea.
  • the autoradiograph shown in Fig.13 revealed that two translation products (55 and 55.5 kDa protein) were observed.
  • Moleculai- weights of these two protems are in agreement with the calculated molecular weight of the deduced amino acid sequence of the reading frame.
  • two start codons were also identified in this reading frame correlating with the two translation products obtained through in vitro translation of the riboprobe.
  • the difference in molecular weight between both translation products is hi agreement with the difference in 4 amino acid residues (MSGE) on the C terminal between both start codons.
  • MSGE 4 amino acid residues
  • Tl e function of pcHYDE in stable transfectants were assessed in vitro hi association with the cell cycle and apoptosis.
  • the objective for the apoptosis assessment is based on the hypothesis that p-Hyde is a rat homologue of the murine putative TSAP-6 gene which is associated with the upregulation of apoptosis response under the induction of tumor suppressor p53 (Amson et al., 1996).
  • the cell cycle analysis is referred to the fact that MAT-LyLu cell line is highly metastatic and the level of p-Hyde expression in this cell line is relatively higher than AT-1 cell line.
  • Cell cycle analysis The strategy of the cell cycle analysis is based on the arrest of cell population in GI and S boundary after 24 hours treatment with 1 mM Hydroxyurea (Iwasaki et al., 1995). As a result, the G2 phase should be zero. Cells were harvested after hydroxyurea release at 0, 10 and 24 hours and subjected to flowcytometer analysis using standard propidium iodide staining. Tl e result is shown in TABLE III and showed that both AT1-H1 and AT3-H1, at 10 hours after tl e release of Hydroxyurea, were relatively slow in entering the S-phase, whereas the parental cell line (ATI and AT3) were faster At 24 hours after the release, the G2 cells were all elevated indicating that cell cycle was hi progress.
  • Induction of susceptibility to apoptosis Apoptotic response was assessed using DNA laddering assay. DNAs were extracted after the respective tteatment (24 hours with 1 mM Hydroxyurea followed by 24 hours with 0.1 mM 5'-dFUrd) and analyzed on 1.6% agarose gel electrophoresis. In agreement with cell cycle analyses, apoptotic response of the stable transfectants ATl-Hl and AT3-H1 (pcHYDE transfected AT-1 and AT-3) are consistently and significantly higher relative to both parental (AT-1 and AT-3) and pcDNA-transfected parental cell lines (ATI -pel and AT3-pcl). In particular, the highest apoptotic response occurred in synclironized culture under the induction with 0.1 mM 5'-dFUrd.
  • the enhanced apoptotic response in ATl-Hl and AT3-H1 transfectant after hydroxyurea treatment is the result of "thymineless death" (Kyprianou, 1994, Kyprianou et al., 1994) leading to depletion of intracellular thymidine-5-triphosphate (TTP) pools through indirect inhibition of thymidylate synthetase by fluorodeoxyuridine.
  • UV-damaged DNA cannot be repaired in prostate cells transfected with ?-ETj - e:Three DNA enzyme repair systems were evaluated in parental compared to p-Hyde transfected cells: uridine phosphorylase, uridine kinase, and UV damage repair.
  • UV damage repair was unpaired in e p-Hyde transfected cells. Decreased DNA repair activity results in higher levels of intact photoproducts (64PP). Consistent with these data, pHyde transfected cells also had a significant reduction in survival following UV exposure compared to parental AT3 cells as determined by colony formation assay.
  • DNA repair enzyme impai ⁇ nent correlated with shorter survival and induction of apoptosis in prostate cancer cells transfected wif . p-Hyde.
  • Northern RNA analysis of p-Hyde confirms overexpression of p-Hyde: To confirm the con-elation between apoptotic response and p-Hyde on the transcription level, Northern analysis of the total RNA derived from AT3-H1, AT3-H2 relative to AT3 parental cell line was performed. The result clearly demonstrated that the transcription level of pcHYDE in stable transfectant of AT3-H1 and AT3-H2 were significantly higher relative to AT3 parental cell line. This Northern analysis was carried out only in AT3, AT3-H1 and AT3-H2 using Hyde PCR product and internal control cyclophilin as a probe.
  • AT3 cell line was transfected with pcHYDE, a construct of p-Hyde in mammalian expression vector of pcDNA3.1(-) under G418 selection.
  • pcHYDE a construct of p-Hyde in mammalian expression vector of pcDNA3.1(-) under G418 selection.
  • As negative control AT-3 cell line was also transfected with the vector only and the stable transfectants obtained was designated as AT3-pc.
  • the tumor growth of the parental cell line of AT-3 and in stable transfectant AT3-H1 and AT3-H2 have been evaluated in vivo.
  • One million cells of each cell lines in 0.3 ml of Hanks solution were inoculated subcutaneously in each flank of inbred male Copenhagen rat.
  • three groups of each five rats were injected with each cell line.
  • the size of tumors were scored after a time schedule.
  • Tumor progression represents an accumulation of genetic changes that affect oncogene and tumor suppressor gene expression, thereby altering the responsiveness of tlie cell to autocrine and paracrine positive and negative growth regulators.
  • the Dunning tumor rat model of prostate cancer tumor progression consists of a spectrum of prostate cancer phenotypes ranging from well differentiated to poorly differentiated with differing responses to androgens.
  • the sublines originated and evolved from the same original spontaneous rat prostate tumor, thus making this present study of tumor progression unique. The development of these cell lines as the results of progression of tumor within a single and multiple serial passage .
  • the frill length of this cDNA indicated as its restriction map, consists of 2713 nucleic acid residues; it contains two reading frames consisting of 1467 and 1452 residues, respectively. Forty six percent of the sequence is the untranslated region and majority of this is in the 3' end of the gene.
  • the nucleic acid sequence of the rat p-Hyde is set forth in SEQ ID NO 3 and the nucleic acid sequence of tlie human p-Hyde is set forth in SEQ ID NO 1.
  • the level of expression of p-Hyde was determined by Northern blot analyses in both rat and human prostate cancer cell lines and compared to the cyclophylin expression as internal control.
  • the Dunning rat prostatic cancer cell line AT-1, MAT-LyLu, MAT-Lu, AT-3 and G and human prostate cancer cell lines PPC1, LNCaP, TSU and DU145 are all positive with different level of expression (Table I).
  • Tl e transcript size of the human counterpart is slightly smaller relative to the rat p-Hyde mRNA.
  • the data also indicated that there is a differential expression of p-Hyde gene in both rat and human prostatic cancer cell lines suggesting that there may be a functional correlation between p-Hyde expression and prostate cancer progression.
  • MAT-Lu showed the highest level of transcription, whereas AT-3 had the lowest.
  • the striking difference between these two cell lines is important in its association with the growth characteristic of MAT-Lu cell lme which is highly metastatic.
  • These data also indicated that the level of transcription in MAT-LyLu was relatively (10%) higher than that of AT-1 , demonstrating that the novel cDNA was tlie result of cDNA competition between MAT-LyLu and AT-1 cDNAs (Riualdy and Steiner, 1997).
  • the human homologue of p-Hyde does exist the human prostate cancer cell lines.
  • p-Hyde does not appear to be specific to mammalian prostate tissue, but has been found in other tissues including placenta and breast and in other species such as mouse and human suggesting that its role is important in fundamental cellular biology.
  • p-Hyde has the dual ability to act like a tumor suppressor gene and induce susceptibility to apoptosis by what may be p53 independent pathways. Tlie growth of prostate tumors in rats was greatly inhibited by p-Hyde. Moreover, prostate cancer cells expressing p-Hyde were more sensitive to UV DNA damage driving these cells into cell programmed death. Analysis of DNA repair enzyme activity suggests a defect resulting in the presence of intact (6-4) PP and decreased cell survival by colony forming assay, However, the capacity of p-Hyde to induce susceptibility to apoptosis is not limited to UV DNA damage.
  • Chemotherapy agent Fluorodeoxyuridine, a py ⁇ midine antimetabolile which is related to fluorouracil (5-FU) and has been used for treatment of a wide variety of human epithelial malignancies, also more readily induces apoptosis in prostate cancer cell expressing p-Hyde .
  • cancer cells expressing p-Hyde are also more susceptible to gamma radiation.
  • the mechanisms of cellular DNA injury are different for UV, gamma radiation, and Fluoro deoxyuridhie suggesting that the ability to make cells more susceptible to apoptosis is more global in action.
  • This unique function of p-Hyde represents a new class genes that induce susceptibility to apoptosis.
  • p-Hyde gene Use in therapy of human disease: These unique functional features of the p-Hyde gene may be exploited for the treatment of hyperproliferative disorders and cancer.
  • One effective therapeutic strategy for example, may be the treatment of carcinoma cells expressing p-Hyde with chemotherapy agents or UV mimetic drugs (such as acetylaminofluorine).
  • chemotherapy agents such as acetylaminofluorine
  • UV mimetic drugs such as acetylaminofluorine
  • cancer cells are not likely to produce significant levels o f the growth inhibition p-Hyde. Consequently, the p-Hyde gene my be introduced into cancer cells by gene therapy.
  • Tumors transduced with vectors containing p-Hyde may not only be directly suppressed by p-Hyde as demonstrated hi this study, but also when ueated in combination with DNA damaging therapy such as chemotherapy, UV mimetic drugs, or radiation, have even a greater anti-cancer effect. Since gene therapy will target cancer cells, then enhancement of apoptosis will occur more selectively in cancer cells following DNA damage (UV, radiation, or chemotherapy).
  • EXAMPLE 2 Prostate Cancer Gene Therapy Using Adenovirus Expressing A Novel Tumor Suppressor Gene pl-Iyde
  • AdRSVpHyde A rat pHyde cDNA gene was isolated as described in U.S Serial No: 09/302,457. After digestion with EcoR I, a 2.6 kb fragment which contains the 1467 bp full-length coding sequence of pHyde cDNA was subcloned under the control of a truncated RSV promoter (395 bp) into an E1 E3 deleted adenoviral shuttle vector. The resultant adenoviral shuttle vector was cotransfected into 293 cells with pJM17, an adenoviral type 5 genome plasmid, by calcium phosphate method.
  • the cDNA probes (pHyde or p53) were labeled by a- 32 P-dCTP using random primer method (Prime-It II Kit, Stratagene, La Jolla, CA). The membrane was hybridized with the probe in Rapid-hyb buffer (Amersham Life Science) according to the Manufacturer's protocol. The membrane was exposed to a Kodak X-ray film under one intensifying screens at -80°C for autoradiography.
  • GAPDH cDNA probe was labeled as described above and used as an internal control for norm lization.
  • the membrane was treated with blocking solution (15% nonfat milk, 0.02% sodium azide in phosphate-buffered saline) overnight at 4°C.
  • the membrane was incubated for 1 hr at room temperature with rabbit anti-rat pHyde polycional antibody (specifically generated by Research Genetics, Inc. based on the computer-created antigenic peptide derived from pHyde coding sequences).
  • the membrane was then incubated for 1 hr at room temperature with 125 I-labeled second antibody (Amersham Life Science, Arlington Heights, IL)
  • the membrane was exposed to a Kodak X-ray film between two intensifying screens at -80°C for autoradio raphy.
  • AdRSVpHyde in vitro studies Human prostate cancer cells were infected with AdRSVpHyde in vitro with a multiplicity of infection (MOI) of 100 or 200. After viral infection, cells were incubated'at 37°C and cell numbers were determined at day 5 after viral infection.
  • MOI multiplicity of infection
  • DU145 cells (1.4xl0 7 cells in 0.2 ml of PBS) were injected subcutaneously into the flank of male nude mice (Harlan Sprague Dawley) When the tumors reached an average volume of 80 mm 3 , 5x10 9 pfu adenoviral vectors (AdRSVpHyde or control adenovirus AdRSVlacZ) or PBS alone for untreated controls were injected directly into tlie tumor. Tumor volume was measured every three to four days until the animals were euthanized. All the animals were sacrificed at day 52 after viral uijection when several of them showed distress or had a tumor burden greater than 15% of total body weight. Tumor samples were collected and processed for H&E staining.
  • the cells were lysed in 10 mM Tr-s-HCl (pH 8.0), 10 mM EDTA, and 0 5% Triton X-100 on ice for 15 min Tl e lysate was centnfuged at 12,000xg for 1 5 min to separate soluble (fragmented) DNA from pellet (intact genomic) DNA Soluble DNA was treated with Rnase A (50 ug/ml) at 37C for 1 h, followed by ueatment with proteinase K (100 ug/ml) 0 5% SDS, at 50C for 2 h. The residual material was extracted with phenol/chloroform, precipitated in ethanol, electrophoresed on a 2% agarose gel
  • AdRSVpHyde Growth inhibition by AdRSVpHyde correlated to pS3 expression in prostate cancer cells:
  • a phenotype of DU145 and LNCaP cells ttansduced by AdRSVpHyde were also altered.
  • AdRSVpl-Iyde-transduced cells had a marked morphology of round, detaching and floated dying cells, a characteristic of cells undergoing apoptosis, and cell number decreased quickly over time (Fig. 5).
  • AdRSVpHyde showed a strong inhibition on the growth of these two cell lines (Fig. 3).
  • AdRSVpHyde did not inhibit the cellular growth of PC-3 and TSU-Pr cells, and had only a minor growth inhibition on PPC-1 cells (data not shown). Consistently, there was no evident morphological differences between untreated control, control virus-treated and AdRSVpHyde-treated cells in these lines (Fig. 6). To detertnine whether the differential expression of various genes, especially those involved in apoptosis pathway, accounted for the differential inhibitory effect by AdRSVpHyde on different prostate cancer cell lines, several genes including p53 and Rb were screened at mRNA level by Northern hybridization.
  • p53 was found to only express in DU145 and LNCaP cells but not in PC-3, TSU-Pr, and PPC-1 cells; in contrast, Rb gene were all expressed at the mRNA level in these cells (Fig, 7). Therefore, it appeared that there was a correlation between p53 expression and AdRSVpHyde-mediated inhibition.
  • pHyde regulated p53 expression the same Northern blot in Fig. 2A was stripped and rehybridized with p53 probe Indeed an induction of p53 mRNA was observed in AdRSVpHyde transduced DU145 cells (Fig. 8).
  • pHyde has the dual ability to act like a tumor suppressor gene and induce susceptibility to apoptosis.
  • the growth of prostate tumors in rats was greatly inhibited by p-Hyde.
  • prostate cancer cells expressing pHyde were more sensitive to UV DNA damage driving these cells into cell programmed death.
  • AdRSVpHyde was shown to have an effective inhibition on cell growth both in vitro and in vivo for the prostate cancer cells expressing p53, but not for the prostate cancer cells missing p53 expression
  • pHyde can induces apoptosis by p53 dependent pathway (such as in DU145 and LNCaP cells) and p53 independent pathway which requires an outside cell death trigger such as UV or chemical (such as methylnitrosourea) to act as a co-inducer for apoptosis.
  • p53 dependent pathway such as in DU145 and LNCaP cells
  • p53 independent pathway which requires an outside cell death trigger such as UV or chemical (such as methylnitrosourea) to act as a co-inducer for apoptosis.
  • UV or chemical such as methylnitrosourea
  • AdRSVpHyde induced p53 expression in DU145 cells One interesting and important finding of this study was that AdRSVpHyde induced p53 expression in DU145 cells. Not only this may explain that pl-Iyde acts in a more global manner to induce susceptibility to apoptosis, but also partially explains why pHyde has a partial sequence homologue with TSAP-6, a human protein claimed to be involved in p53 -associated pathway: because pHyde could be a rat homologue of TSAP-6 gene, or a member of tl e TSAP-6 like family which is involved hi p53-associated pathway.
  • pHyde is a novel a tumor suppressor gene and AdRSVpHyde effectively inhibites prostate cancer both in vitro and in vivo.
  • the monotherapy of AdRSVpHyde alone or combined therapy of AdRSVpHyde with radio- or chemo-therapy should have an effective therapeutic potential for treatment of locally advanced prostate cancer.
  • TUNEL assay The other classical method for detecting apoptosis, TUNEL assay, was also used to demonstrate that AdRSVpHyde indeed caused DU145 cells to apoptosis. Seventy two hrs after viral transduction, DU145 cells growing on culture dish were subjected to TUNEL assay. There were more fluorescence-stained cells in AdRSVpHyde transduced cells (Fig. 15C and 15F) compared to untreated control (Fig. 15A and 15D) or control virus transduced cells, (Fig.
  • apoptosis may accounts for only part of the pHyde-mediated growth inhibition, in other words, pHyde-mediated growth inhibition may be composed of apoptosis and some other unknown mechanisms.
  • AdRSVpHyde was able to inhibit cell growth of anotlier human prostate cancer cell line TSU, however, no apoptosis was observed in AdRSVpHyde transduced TSU cells.
  • AdRSVpHyde had a strong growth inhibition on DU1 5 and LNCaP cells (76.9%) and 83, 1 % inhibition compared to the untreated control, respectively, Fig. 17), tlie two cell lines that expressed p53.
  • AdRSVpHyde had no inhibitory effect on the growth of PC-3 cells, but had a minor inhibition (24.5% inhibition compared to untreated control) on the growth of TSU cells (Fig. 19).
  • Isolation of 10 differentially expressed cDNAs in p53- ⁇ nduced apoptosis Activation of the vertebrate homologue of the Drosophila seven in absentia gene, Proc.Natl Acad.Sci.USA, 93, 3953 - 3957.
  • Wild-type p53 induces apoptosis of myeloid leukemic cells that is inhibited by interlekin-6, Nature (London), 352, 345 - 347.

Abstract

This invention provides isolated nucleic acid of the p-Hyde gene, analogs, fragments, mutants, and variants thereof of the p-Hyde family. The invention provides polypeptides, fusion proteins, chimerics, fusion proteins, antisense molecules, antibodies, and uses thereof. Also, this invention is directed to a method of inducing susceptibility to apoptosis with p-Hyde, a method of suppressing tumor growth with p-Hyde, and a method of treating a subject with cancer with p-Hyde alone or in combination with radiation, chemotherapy, or UV mimetic drugs. The invention also relates to the therapy of human cancers which have a mutation in the p-Hyde gene, including gene therapy, protein replacement therapy and protein mimetics. The invention further relates to the screening of drugs for cancer therapy. Finally, the invention relates to the screening of the p-Hyde gene for mutations, which are useful for diagnosing the predisposition to cancer.

Description

ISOLATED NUCLEIC ACIDS OF THE P-HYDE FAMILY, P-HYDE
PROTEINS, AND METHODS OF INDUCING SUSCEPTIBILITY
TO INDUCTION OF CELL DEATH IN CANCER
FIELD OF INVENTION
This invention provides isolated nucleic acids of p-Hyde genes, proteins, analogs, fragments, mimetics, mutants, synthetics, and variants thereof of the p-Hyde family. This invention is directed to a method of inducing susceptibility to apoptosis with p-Hyde, a method of suppressing tumor growth with p-Hyde, and a method of treating a subject with cancer with p-Hyde alone or in combination with radiation, chemotherapy, or UV mimetic drugs.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Prostate cancer is the most common malignancy in men with over 317,000 new cases and the second leading cause of male cancer deaths in the United States (Boring et al., 1993; Steiner et. al, 1 95). The molecular mechanisms responsible for the development, progression, and metastasis of prostate cancer remain largely unknown. Up to 20% of prostate cancers occur in men under the age of 65 years of age (Silverberg, 1986) suggesting that prostate carcinogenesis is not only associated with aging, but also to hereditary factors (Silverberg, 1987; McLellan and Norman, 1995; Carter et al., 1992). Genetic linkage studies of 691 affected families have revealed that an earlier age of onset of the disease in the proband and the presence of multiple affected family members are important determinants that increase the risk of prostate cancer. The pattern of inheritance of the putative prostate cancer gene appears to be autosomal dominant with an 88% penetrance rate (Steinberg, 1990). Thus, hereditary factors play an important role in prostate oncogenesis.
Like many carcinomas, prostate cancer formation is a multistep process involving tumor initiation, promotion, conversion, and progression (Carter et al., 1990f Sandberg, 1992). This process is driven by chromosomal instability, spontaneous mutations, and carcinogen induced genetic and epigenetic changes. Chromosomal instability leads to the total or partial gain or loss of chromosomes, translocations, and other abnormalities. Spontaneous mechanisms are age-related and include activation of oncogenes or inactivation of tumor suppressor genes by genetic mutations. These mutations result in the misincorporation of nucleotides during DNA replication of the coding region, alteration of the intron-exon junction sequences affecting the splicing mechanism, and aberrations of regulatory sequences changing the control of critical genes. These mutations escape genetic surveillance by a battery of DNA repair mechanisms and its associated gene products, such as p53 (Effert et al., 1992, Isaacs et al, 1 91 ; Mellon et al , 1992) and p2t (El-Deiry et al., 1994) and PCNA (Te pleton et al., 1996). Carcinogen-induced genetic and epigenetic changes initiate tumors as a consequence of the direct damaging effects of carcinogenic agents of the DNA altering gene expression. Tumor initiation is subsequently followed by tumor promotion as affected cells have selective reproductive and clonal expansion capabilities through altered signaling transduction and proliferation responses to growth factors, resistance to cytotoxicity, and deregulation of termmal differentiation (Yuspa and Poiπer, 1988; einstein, 1987). Finally, tumor promotion is succeeded by other genetic mutational events that lead to loss of hormone sensitivity, increased cell motiJity, invasion, alterations in programmed cell death and metastasis. Accordingly, the initiation and progression of cancer is a multistep process whereby genetic alterations or mutations of critical genes ultimately dictate defined cell phenotypes which differ in regard to many important cellular activities including cell proliferation, differentiation, and programmed cell death. The exact mutational events responsible for the multistep progression of prostate cancer, however, is unknown. A better understanding of the molecular mechanisms responsible for prostate cancer may lead to new therapies to combat, and perhaps, to even prevent prostate cancer
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention provides isolated nucleic acids encoding P-Hyde genes of tire p-Hyde family. The p-Hyde gene as shown herein is associated with: (1) the regression of tumor growth in vivo (2) the induction to susceptibility to apoptosis caused by UV or chemotherapy induced DNA damage, and (3) prevention of DNA repair with the upregulation of apoptosis as the result of UV da age and the failure to repair DNA.
This invention provides a novel class of genes which act as inhibitor of a DNA repair enzyme and induce susceptibility of cancer cells to cell death. Also, this invention provides isolated nucleic acids which encodes a mammalian p-Hyde protein which induce susceptibility of a cancer cell to cell death, including allelic, analogs, fragments, mimetics, mutants, synthetics, or variants tliereof. This invention provides an isolated nucleic acids which encodes a human p-Hyde protein which induces susceptibility of a cancer cell to cell death, including allelic, analogs, fragments, mimetics, mutants, synthetics, or variants thereof.
Within this invention is provided a nucleic acid which has the nucleotide sequence as shown SEQ ID NO: 1 , SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO.5, SEQ ID NO:7 or SEQ ID NO:9.
Also, within the invention is a nucleic acid molecule which encodes a fragment of a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO 4, SEQ ID NO 6, SEQ ID NO 8 or SEQ ID NO: 10, the fragment including at least 15 (25, 30, 50, 60, or 63) contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO 2, SEQ ID NO 4, SEQ ID NO 6, SEQ ID NO 8 or SEQ ID NO 10.
Also, within the invention is a nucleic acid molecule having the nucleotide sequence which is at least about 82%, 84%, 85%, 87%, 90%, 92%, 95%, or 98% identical to the nucleic acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO. 1 , SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO:5, SEQ ID NO:7 or SEQ ID NO: 9.
Also, within this invention is a nucleic acid molecule which encodes a naturally occurring allelic variant of a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO 4, SEQ ID NO 6, SEQ ID NO 8, or SEQ ID NO 10 wherein the nucleic acid molecule hybridizes to a nucleic acid molecule comprising SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO 4, SEQ ID NO 6, SEQ ID NO 8 or SEQ ID NO 10 or the complement thereof under stringent conditions.
Also within the invention are isolated p-Hyde proteins having an amino acid sequence that is at least about 82%. 84%, 85%, 87%, 90%, 95%, or 98% identical to the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO:5, SEQ ID NO:7 or SEQ ID NO 9. Also within the invention are: an isolated p-Hyde protein protein which is encoded by a nucleic acid molecule having a nucleotide sequence that is at least about 65%, preferably 75%, 80%, 85%, or 95% identical to SEQ ID NO: _ , SEQ TD NO: 3, SEQ ID NO:5, SEQ ID NO:7 or SEQ ID NO 9; and an isolated p-Hyde protein protein which is encoded by a nucleic acid molecule having a nucleotide sequence which hybridizes under stringent hybridization conditions to a nucleic acid molecule having the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO.5, SEQ ID NO:7 or SEQ ID NO 9, or the complement thereof.
The p-Hyde protein of the present invention, or biologically active portions thereof, can be operably linked to a non- p-Hyde polypeptide (e.g., heterologous amino acid sequences) to form p-Hydc fusion proteins.
This invention provides a vector comprising the isolated nucleic acid encoding P-Hyde gene. This invention provides a replication-defective recombinant E1/Ε3 deleted adenovirus containing a truncated RSV promoter and the P-Hyde cDNA gene (AdRSVpHyde).
This invention provides an oligonucleotide of at least 15 nucleotides capable of specifically hybridizing with a sequence of nucleotides present within a nucleic acid which encodes the p-Hyde, or a sequence which is complementary to the nucleic acid which encodes the p-Hyde. This invention provides an antisense molecule, triplex oligonucleotide, or ribozyme which is capable of specifically hybridizing with the isolated nucleic acid encoding p-Hyde.
This invention provides a method for producing a polypeptide which comprises growing the host vector system under suitable conditions permitting production of the polypeptide and recovering the polypeptide so produced. In one embodiment the method of obtaining a polypeptide in purified form comprises: (a) introducing the vector into a suitable host cell; (b) culturing the resulting cell so as to produce the polypeptide; (c) recovering the polypeptide produced in step (b); and (d) purifying the polypeptide so recovered.
This invention provides a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence of a p-Hyde. This invention provides a fusion protein or chimeric comprising the polypeptide. This invention provides an antibody which specifically binds to the polypeptide. This invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising an amount of the polypeptide and a pharmaceutically effective carrier or diluent.
This invention provides a method for determining whether a subject carries a mutation in the p-Hyde gene which comprises: (a) obtaining an appropriate nucleic acid sample from the subject; and (b) determining whether the nucleic acid sample from step (a) is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde so as to thereby determine whether a subject carries a mutation in the p-Hyde gene. In one embodiment the nucleic acid sample in step (a) comprises mRNA corresponding to the transcript of DNA encoding a mutant p-Hyde, and wherein the determining of step (b) comprises: (i) contacting the mRNA with the oligonucleotide under conditions permitting binding of the mRNA to the oligonucleotide so as to form a complex; (ii) isolating the complex so formed; and (iii) identifying the mRNA in the isolated complex so as to thereby determine whether the mRNA is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde.
This invention provides a method for screening a tumor sample from a human subject for a somatic alteration in a p-Hyde gene in said tumor which comprises gene comparing a first sequence selected form the group consisting of a p-Hyde gene from said tumor sample, p-Hyde RNA from said tumor sample and p-Hyde cDNA made from mRNA from said tumor sample with a second sequence selected from the group consisting of p-Hyde gene from a nontumor sample of said subject, p-Hyde RNA from said nontumor sample and p-Hyde cDNA made from mRNA from said nontumor sample, wherein a difference in the sequence of the p-Hyde gene,ρ-Hyde RNA or p-Hyde cDNA from said tumor sample from the sequence of the p-Hyde gene, p-Hyde RNA or p-Hyde cDNA from said nontumor sample indicates a somatic alteration in the p-Hyde gene in said tumor sample.
This invention provides a method for screening a tumor sample from a human subject for the presence of a somatic alteration in a p-Hyde gene in said tumor which comprises comparing p-Hyde polypeptide from said tumor sample from said subject to p-Hyde polypeptide from a nontumor sample from said subject to analyze for a difference between the polypeptides, wherein said comparing is perfoπned by (i) detecting either a full length polypeptide or a truncated polypeptide in each sample or (ii) contacting an antibody which specifically binds to either an epitope of an altered p-Hyde polypeptide or an epitope of a wild-type p-Hyde polypeptide to the p-Hyde polypeptide from each sample and detecting antibody binding, wherein a difference between the p-Hyde polypeptide from said tumor sample from the p-Hyde polypeptide from said nontumor sample indicates the presence of a somatic alteration in the p-Hyde gene in said tumor sample.
This invention provides a method for identifyirig a chemical compound which is capable inducing susceptibility to cell death which comprises: (a) contacting the p-Hyde with a chemical compound under conditions permitting binding between the p-Hyde and the chemical compound;(b) detecting specific binding of the chemical compound to the p-Hyde; and (c) determining whether the chemical compound inhibits the p-Hyde so as to identify a chemical compound which is capable of capable inducing susceptibility to cell death.
This invention provides a method of inhibiting the growth of cancer cells, comprising the steps of obtaining the cells and contacting the cells of the subject with a replication-deficient adenovirus type 5 expression vector comprising air adenovirus genome having a deletion m the El and E3 region of the genome and an insertion within the region of a nucleic acid encoding p-Hyde under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter, thereby inhibiting the growth of tire prostate cancer cells. This invention provides a method of inhibiting the growth a prostate cancer cells, comprising: 1) obtaining a sample of prostate cells from a subject; 2) contacting the cells with a replication deficient adenovirus type 5 expression vector which comprises an adenovirus genome having a deletion in the El and E3 regions of the genome and an insertion within the regions of a p-Hyde cDNA under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter; and 3) introducing the cells into the subject, thereby inhibiting the growth of the cancer cells.
This invention provides a method of suppressing the growth of cancer cells in a subject. comprising introducing mto the cancer cell an amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein, thereby suppressing the growth of cancer cells in the subject.
This invention provides a method of suppressing growth of cancer cells in a subject, comprising administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby suppressing the growth of cancer cells in the subject.
This invention provides a method of inducing susceptibility to apoptosis of cancer cells in a subject, comprising introducing into the cancer cell an amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein, thereby inducing susceptibility to apoptosis .
This invention provides a method of inducing susceptibility to apoptosis of cancer cells in a subject, comprising admmistering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby inducing susceptibility to apoptosis.
This invention provides a method of treating a subject with cancer which comprises administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a phainiaceuticai acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby treating the subject with cancer.
This invention provides a method of treating a subject with cancer, comprising: 1) administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein in combination with radiation, chemotherapy, or UV mimetic drugs; and 2) a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby treating the subject with cancer.
This invention a method of treating a subject with cancer, comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising: 1 ) an adenovirus type 5 expression vector which comprises an adenovirus genome having a deletion in the El and E3 regions of the genome and an insertion withm the regions of a full length sense p-Hyde cDNA under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter, and 2) a suitable carrier or diluent, thereby treating the subject with cancer In one embodiment tire cancer is selected from a group consisting of. melanoma; lymphoma, leukemia; and prostate, colorectal, pancreatic, breast, brain, or gastric carcinoma.
Lastly, the present invention provides the means necessary for production of gene-based therapies directed at cancer cells. These therapeutic agents may take the form of polynucleotides comprising all or a portion of the p-Hyde locus placed in appropriate vectors or delivered to target cells in more direct ways such that the function of the p-Hyde protein is reconstituted. Therapeutic agents may also take the form of polypeptides based on either a portion of, or the entire proteui sequence of p-Hyde. These may functionally replace the activity of p-Hyde in vivo.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Figure 1. Schematic presentation of AdRSVpHyde structure. The 2664 bp inserted fragment contains a 1467 bp full-length pl yde cDNA gene (SEQ ID NO: 1) and 1 166 bp 3' untranslated downstream region. The complete sequence of AdRSVpHyde is set forth in Figure 10, Specifically, the nucleic acid sequence of region A in Figure 1 is set forth in Figure 10 Region A and the nucleic acid sequence of region B in Figure 1 is set forth in Figure 1 0 at Region B.
Figure 2. Expression of pHydc by AdRSVpHyde. DU145 cells transduced by AdRSVpHyde at MOI-200 were harvested in 48 h post infection for either mRNA or protein extraction. (A) Expression of pHyde at mRNA level in DU145 cells. Sample wells were each loaded with 10 mg of total RNA, electrophoresed in 12.5% agarose gel, transferred to nylon membrane, and hybridized with j2P-labeled pHyde cDNA. Northern blot was stripped and rehybridized with GAPDH to assess gel loading. (B) Expression of pHyde at protein level in DU145 cells. Protein extracts (50 mg) were loaded on a 12% SDS-PAGE gel. Rabbit anti-rat pHyde antibody was used as the primary antibody.
Figure 3. Inhibitory effects of pHydc on prostate cancer cell growth, DU145 (A) and LNCaP (B) cells were transduced with or without adenoviral vectors at MOI=100. Cell numbers were counted at day 5 after viral transducbon The data represent the results from two independent experiments with each in duplicates.
Figure 4. AdRSVpHyde inhibits prostate tumor growth in vivo. DU145 cells
(1.4x10^ cells) were injected subcutaneously into the flanks of nude mice. When tumors reached an average volume of 80 mm3 (about one month after tumor cell inoculation), tumors were untreated (control), or intratumorally injected (day 0) either by 5x109 pfu control virus AdRSVlacZ (control virus), or 5x109 pfu AdRSVpHyde (AdRSVpHyde). The tumor sizes were periodically measured at times shown in the figure up to day 52 days post viral injection.
Figure 5. Morphological changes of DU145 and LNCaP cells transduced by AdRSVpHyde- Cells were transduced by control adenovirus AdRSVlacZ or by AdRSVpHyde at MO 1=100. The morphologic features of untreated control cells and viral-transduced cells were recorded at day 5 post viral transduction. All the photos are at the same magnification (66X). (A) and (D): Untreated control cells; (B) and (E): Viral control AdRSVlacZ treated cells; (C) and (F) AdRSVpHyde treated cells.
Figure 6. Morphological changes of PC-3, TSU, and PPC-1 cells transduced by AdRSVpHyde. Cells were transduced by control adenovirus AdRSVlacZ or by AdRSVpHyde at MOI=100. The morphologic features of untreated control cells and viral -transduced cells were recorded at day 5 post viral transduction. All the photos are at the same magnification (66X). (A, D, G): Untreated control cells, (B, E, H): Viral control AdRSVlacZ treated cells; (C, F, I): AdRSVpHyde treated cells.
Figure 7. Expression of p53 and Rb mRNA in various prostate cancer cell lines.
Sample wells were each loaded with 10 mg of total RNA, electrophoresed in 12.5% agarose gel, transferred to nylon membrane, and hybridized with 32P-labeled p53 or Rb cDNA probe. Northern blot was stripped and rehybndized with GAPDH to normalize the gel loading.
Figure 8. AdRSVpHyde induced p53 expression in DU 5 cells. The same Northern blot in Fig. 2A was stripped and rehybridized with 32P-labeled p53 cDNA.
Figure 9. AdRSVpHyde induced apoptosis in LNCaP cells. Cells were untreated or transduced by AdRSVpHyde al MOI=100, supernatant were collected 48 h post transduction Soluble DNA was extracted from floating cells and electrophoresed on a 2% agarose gel
Figure 10. Hie sequence of AdRSVpHyde. Figure 11. Comparison of the nucleotide sequence of the p-Hyde family genes between human p-Hyde (I) and human p-Hyde 40 (II).
Figure 12-. Comparison of the amino acid sequence of the p-Hyde family genes between human p-Hyde (I) and human p-Hyde 40 (II).
Figure 13, A) Comparison of the nucleotide sequence of the p-Hyde family genes, between rat p-Hyde and human p-Hyde. B) Comparison of the amino acid sequence of the p-Hyde family genes between rat p-Hyde and human p-Hyde.
Figure 14. TUNEL, assay of DU145 cells in vitro. DU145 cells were either untreated (A,D), or transduced with control virus (B, E) or AdRSVpHyde (C, F) at MOI=200, three days after transduction the cells were fixed and proceeded for TUNEL assay. The cells were then visualized by fluorescence microscopy. The arrows indicated some apoptotic cells. Magnification: A, B, C: x20. D, E, F: x40.
Figure 15. TUNEL, assay of DU145 cells in vivo. DU145 xenograft tumors (about 80 fflm') growing on nude mice were either untreated (A) or injected with 5x109 pfu AdRSVpHyde (B). Tumors were harvested in 21 days. Tumor sections were fixed and proceeded for TUNEL assay. The sections were counter stained with propidium iodide (red) to show the nucleus of cells. The bright yellowish stained cells indicated the apoptotic cells. Tumor sections from control virus-treated DU145 tumor showed the similar results as in (A). Magnification: A, B: x20.
Figure 16. Inhibitory effects of pHyde on growth of prostate cancer cell lines DU145 and LNCaP. DU145 (A) and LNCaP (B) cells were transduced with or without adenoviral vectors (control virus or AdRSVpHyde) at MO 1=100. Cell numbers were counted at day 5 after viral transduction. The data represent the results from two independent experiments each performed in duplicate. *Some error bars were too small to see in the figure. Figure 17, Expression of Rb and pS3 in various prostate cancer cell lines. Various prostate cancer cells were screened for endogenous Rb and p53 expression at mRNA levels. Each well was loaded with 10 μg of total RNA. Samples were electrophoresed in 12.5%) agarose gel, transferred to nylon membrane, and hybridized with 32P-labeled Rb (which showed an about 4.4 kb transcript) or p53 CDNA (which showed an about 2.5 kb transcript). The Northern blot was then stripped and rchybridized with GAPDH cDNA (which showed a 1.2 kb transcript) to assess RNA integrity and gel loading.
Figure 18. Inhibitory effects of pHyde on growth of prostate cancer cell lines; PC-3 and TSU. PC-3 (A) and TSU (B) cells were transduced with or without adenoviral vectors (control vims or AdRSVpHyde) at MOI=200. Cell numbers were counted at day 5 after viral transduction. The data represent the results from two independent experiments each performed in duplicate. *Some error bars were too small to see in the figure.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
This invention provides a novel class of genes which act as inhibitor of a DNA repair enzyme and induces susceptibility of cancer cells to cell death Functionally, P-Hyde is and associated with suppression of tumor growth in vivo and increased susceptibility to apoptosis induced by UV irradiation or FUrD treatment. The upregulation of apoptosis due to UV damage is correlated with the presence of intact photoproduct in prostate cancer cell lines stably transfected with p-Hyde. Use of p-Hyde in human gene therapy as monotherapy or hi combination with radiation or chemotherapy is useful against cancei or hyperproHferative human diseases. In one embodiment, the class of proteins, such as P-Hyde, are DNA repair enzyme inhibitors which downregulate Nucleotide-Excision-Repair (NER) pathway in prostate cancer, MGMT CNA repair pathway in colon cancer cell line, 0β methyl guanine methyl transferase enzyme (06MgMT) and 6.4, photoproducts (6,4PP). The class of genes is characterized by comprising a leucine zipper binding domain and a death domain which causes the cell to be apoptotic. Human p-Hyde (I) and human p-Hyde 40 (II) are examples set forth herein, of a family of molecules (the "p-Hyde family") having certain homolgous sequences and conserved structural and functional features.
This inveniion provides an isolated nucleic acid which encodes a mammalian p-Hyde protein which induces susceptibility of a cancer cell to cell death, including allelic, analogs, fragments, mimetics, mutants, synthetics, or variants thereof. This invention provides an isolated nucleic acid which encodes a human p-Hyde protein which induces susceptibility of a cancer cell to cell death, including allelic, analogs, fragments, mimetics, mutants, synthetics, or variants thereof.
As used interchangeably herein a "p-Hyde activity", "biological activity of p-Hyde" or "functional activity of p-Hyde", refers to an activity exerted by a p-Hyde protein, polypeptide or nucleic acid molecule on a p-Hyde responsive cell as determined in vivo, or in vitro, according to standard techniques which causes apoptosis of the cell. P-Hyde refers to a family of genes having the p-Hyde activity. Examples of such genes are rat p-hyde, human p-Hyde (I), and human p-Hyde 40 (II). In one embodiment, these sequences comprise SEQ ID NO: 7 on the nucleotide level and SEQ ID NO: 8 on the ammo acid level. Also, examples, of family p-Hyde gene members include isolated nucleic sequences of SEQ ID NOS: 1, 3, 5, or 7 on the nucleotide level and amino acid sequences of SEQ ID NOS: 2, 4, 6 or 8 on the am o acid level.
In one embodiment the p-Hyde gene has a nucleotide sequence having at least 85% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1. In another embodiment the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 87% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 In another embodiment the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 90% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1. In another embodiment the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 95% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO. 1. In another embodiment the nucleic acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 1 of the SEQ ID NO: 1 and ends at position 557 of SEQ ID NO: 1. In another embodiment the nucleic acid comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO: 1 and ends at position 158 of SEQ ID NO: 1. In another embodiment the nucleic acid comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 50 of SEQ ID NO: 1 and ends at position 120 of SEQ ID NO: 1. The nucleic acid is DNA, cDNA, genomic DNA, or
RNA.
Human p-Hyde nucleic acid coding region:
1 ggggagctgc cgcggtcgct ccgagcggcg ggccgcagag ccaccaaaat gccagaagag 61 atggacaagc cactgatcag cctccacctg gtggacagcg atagtagcct tgccaaggtc 121 cccgatgagg cccccaaagt gagcatcctg ggtagcgggg actttgcccg ctccctggcc 181 acacgcctgg tgggctctgg cttcaaagtg gtggtgggga gccgcaaccc caaacgcaca 241 gccaggctgt ttccctcagc ggcccaagtg actttccaag aggaggcagl gagctccccg 301 gaggtcatct ttgtggctgt gttccgggag cactactctt cactgtgcag tctcagtgac 361 cagctggcgg gcaagatcct ggtggatgtg agcaacccta cagagcaaga gcaccttcag 421 catcgtgagt ccaatgctga gtacctggcc tcccfcttcc ccacttgcac agtggtcaag 481 gcctlcaatg tcatctctgc ctggaccctg caggctggcc caagggaigg taacgggcag 541 gtgcccatct gcggtgacca gccagaagcc aagcgtgctg tctcggagat ggcgctcgcc 601 atgggcttca tgcccgtgga catgggatcc ctggcgtcag cctgggaggt ggaggccatg 661 cccctgcgcc tcctcccggc ctggaaggtg cccaccctgc tggccctggg gctcitcgtc 721 tgcttctatg cctacaactt cgtccgggac gttctgcagc cctatgtgca ggaaagccag 781 aacaagttct tcaagctgcc cgtgtccgtg gtcaacacca cactgccgtg cgtggcctac 841 gtgctgctgl cactcgtgta cttgcccggc gtgctggcgg ctgccctgca gctgcggcgc 901 ggcaccaagt accagcgctt ccccgactgg ctggaccact ggctacagca ccgcaagcag 961 atcgggctgc tcagcttctt ctgcgccgcc ctgcacgccc tctacagctt ctgcttgccg 1021 ctgcgccgcg cccaccgcta cgacctggtc aacctggcag tcaagcaggt citggccaac 1081aagagccacc tctgggtgga ggaggtctgg cggatggaga tctacctctc cctgggagtg 1 141ctggccctcg gcacgttgtc cctgctggcc gtgacctcac tgccgtccat tgcaaactcg 120lctcaactgga gggagttcag cttcgttcag tcctcactgg gctttgtggc cctcgtgctg 1261 gcacactgc acacgctcac ctacggctgg acccgcgcct tcgaggagag ccgctacaag 132 lttctacctgc ctcccacctt cacgctcacg ctgctggtgc cctgcgtcgt catcctggcc
1381 aagccctgt ttctcctgcc ctgcatcagc cgcagactcg ccaggatccg gagaggctgg 1441gagagggaga gcaccatcaa gttcacgctg cccacagacc acgccctggc cgagaagacg 1501 gccacgtat gaggtgcctg ccctgggctc tggaccccgg gcacacgagg gacggtgccc 1 561tgagcccgtt aggttttctt ttcttggtgg tgcaaagtgg tataactgtg tgcaaatagg 1621 aggtttgagg tccaaattcc tgggactcaa atgtatgcag tactattcag aaigatatac 1681 acacatatgt gtatatgtat ttacatatat tccacatata laacaggatt tgcaattata 1741catagctagc taaaaagttg ggtctctgag atttcaactt gtagatttaa aaacaagtgc 1801 cgtacgttaa gagaagagca gatcatgcta ttgtgacatt tgcagagata lacacacact 186lttttgtacag aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa (SEQ ID NO.: 1 )
In another embodiment the nucleic acid encodes an am o acid sequence having the sequence as set forth in SEQ ID NO 2. In one embodiment the the a ino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the a ino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 2 and ends at position 101. In one embodiment the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 2 and ends at position 80. In one embodiment the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 2 and ends at position 60. In one embodiment the amino acid has at least 85% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 2 In another embodiment the amino acid has at least 90% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 2. In another embodiment the amino acid has at least 95% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 2.
Human p-Hyde amino acid sequence:
1 MPEEMDKPLI SLHLVDSDSS LAKVPDEAPK VSILGSGDFA SLATRLVGS GFKVVVGSRN 61 PKRTARLFPS AAQVTFQEEA VSSPEVIFVA VFREHYSSLC SLSDQLAGKI LVDVSNPTEQ 121 EHLQHRESNA EYLASLFPTC TWKAFNVIS AWTLQAGPRD GNGQVPICGD QPEAKRAVSE 181 MALAMGFMPV DMGSLASAWE VEAMPLRLLP AWKVPTLLAL GLFVCFYAYN FVRDVLQPYV
241 OESQNKFFKL PVS VVNTTLP CVAWLLSLV YLPGVLAAAL QLRRGTKYQR FPDWLDHWLQ 301 HRKQIGLLSF FCAALHALYS FCLPLRRAHR YDLVNLAVKQ VLANKSHLWV EEVWRMEIYL 361 SLGVLALGTL SLLAVTSLPS IANSLNWREF SFVQSSLGFV ALVLSTLHTL TYGWTRAFEE 421 SRYKFYLPPT FTLTLLVPCV VILAKALFLL PCISRRLARI RRGWEREST1 KFTLPTDHAL 481 AE TSHV* (SEQ ID NO.: 2)
In one embodiment the p-Hydc gene has a nucleotide sequence having at least 75% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO- 3 In another embodiment the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 85% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ TD NO. 3. hi another embodiment the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 90% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 3. In another embodiment the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 95% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ED NO: 3. In another embodiment the nucleic acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 1 of the SEQ ID NO: 3 and ends at position 557 of SEQ ID NO: 3. In another embodiment the nucleic acid comprises a fragment winch begins at the nucleic acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO: 3 and ends at position 158 of SEQ ID NO 3. In another embodiment the nucleic acid comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 50 of SEQ ID NO- 3 and ends at position 120 of SEQ ID NO: 3. The nucleic acid is DNA, cDNA, genomic DNA, or RNA
Human P-Hyde 40 nucleic acid sequence: 1 ggggagctgc cgcggtcgct ccgagcggcg ggccgcagag ccaccaaaat gccagaagag
61 atggacaagc cactgatcag cctccacctg gtggacagcg atagiagcct tgccaaggtc 121 cccgatgagg cccccaaagt gagcatcctg ggiagcgggg actttgcccg ctccctggcc 181 acacgcctgg tgggctctgg cttcaaagtg gtggtgggga gccgcaaccc caaacgcaca 241 gccaggctgt ttccctcagc ggcccaagtg actttccaag aggaggcagt gagctccccg 301 gaggtcatct ttgtggctgt gttccgggag cactactctt cactgtgcag lcicagtgac
361 cagctggcgg gcaagatcct ggtggatgig agcaacccta cagagcaaga gcaccttcag 421 catcgtgagt ccaatgctga gtacctggcc tccctcttcc ccacttgcac agtggtcaag 481 gccttcaatg tcatctctgc ctggaccctg caggctggcc caagggatgg taacgggcag 54] gtgcccatct gcggtgacca gccagaagcc aagcgtgctg tctcggagat ggcgctcgcc 601 atgggcttca tgcccgtgga catgggatcc ctggcgtcag cctgggaggt ggaggccatg 661 cccctgcgcc tcctcccggc ctggaaggtg cccaccctgc tggccctggg gctcttcgtc 721 tgcttctatg cctacaactt cgtccgggac gttctgcagc cctatgtgca ggaaagccag , 781 aacaagilct tcaagctgcc cglgtccgtg gtcaacacca cactgccgtg cgtggcctac 841 gtgctgctgt cactcgtgta cttgcccggc gtgctggcgg ctgccctgca gctgcggcgc 901 ggcaccaagt accagcgctt ccccgactgg ctggaccact ggctacagca ccgcaagcag 9 1 atcgggcigc tcagcttctt ctgcgccgcc ctgcacgccc tctacagctt ctgcttgccg 1021ctgcgccgcg cccaccgcta cgacctggtc aacctggcag tcaagcaggt cttggccaac 1081aagagccacc tctgggtgga ggaggtctgg cggatggaga tctacctctc ccigggagtg 1 Hl ctggccctcg gcacgttgtc cctgctggcc glgacctcac tgccgtccat tgcaaactcg 1201 ctcaactgga gggagttcag citcgttcag tgtgtggcaa cticcagtgc aggaaacaca 1261ggcagτggaa cccgaagacc tgaatctcag tcccaagacc cccacttacc tgccccgcat 1 321 catcagacaa gtttcctagg ccctcggagc ttctgctgct cacttgtgcc tgtgtccacc 1 3S lccatatggtc atcaagagga tttgagctgg acacgttaaa tgcaggatgc gtgcagccaa 1441cagtggcatg ctggcttttg agtcctcact gggctttgtg gccctcglgc igagcacact 1501 gcacacgctc acctacggct ggacccgcgc cttcgaggag agccgctaca agttctacct 1561 cctcccacc ttcacgctca cgctgctggt gccctgcgtc gtcatcctgg ccaaagccct 1621 tttctcctg ccctgcatca gccgcagact cgccaggatc cggagaggct gggagaggga 1681 gagcaccatc aagttcacgc tgcccacaga ccacgccctg gccgagaaga cgagccacgt 1741 tgaggtgcc tgccctgggc tctggacccc gggcacacga gggacggtgc cctgagcccg 1801 ttaggttttc ttttcttggt ggtgcaaagt ggtataactg tgtgcaaata ggaggtttga 1 861ggtccaaatt cctgggactc aaatgtatgc agtactattc agaatgatat acacacatat 1 21gtgtatatgt atttacatat attccacata tataacagga tttgcaatta tacatagcta 1 81gctaaaaagt tgggtctctg agatttcaac ttgtagattt aaaaacaagt gccgtacgtt 2041 agagaagag cagatcatgc tattgtgaca tttgcagaga tatacacaca ctttttgtac 21 01 agaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa (SEQ ID NO. : 3 )
In another embodiment the nucleic acid encodes an ammo acid sequence having the sequence as set forth in SEQ ID NO 4 In one embodiment the the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 4 and ends at position 101. In one embodiment the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 4 and ends at position 80. In one embodiment the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 4 and ends at position 60. In one embodiment the amino acid has at least 85% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 4. In another embodiment the amino acid has at least 90% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 4. In another embodiment the amino acid has at least 95% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 4.
Human p-Hyde 40 amino acid sequence-
1 MPEEMDKPLI SLHLVDSDSS LAKVPDEAPK VS1LGSGDFA RSLATRLVGS GFKVVVGSRN 61 PKRTARLFPS AQVTFQEEA VSSPEVTF A VFREHYSSLC SLSDQLAGKI LVDVSNPTEQ 1 1 EHLQHRESNA EYLASLFPTC TVVKAFNV1S A TLQAGPRD GNGQVP1CGD QPEAKRAVSE 181 MALAMGFMPV DMGSLASAWE VEAMPLRLLP AWKVPTLLAL GLFVCFYAYN FVRDVLQPYV 241 QESQNKFFKL PVSWNTTLP CVAYVLLSLV YLPGVLAAAL QLRRGTKY-QR FPDWLDHWLQ 301 HRKQIGLLSF FCAALHALYS FCLPLRRAHR YDLVNLAVKQ VLANKSHLWV EEVWRME1YL 361 SLG VLALGTL SLLAVTSLPS IANSLNWREF SFVQCVATSS AGNTGSGTR PESQSQDPHL 421 PAPHHQTSF GPRSFCCSLV PVSTPYGHQE DLSWTR (SEQ ID No.: 4)
In one embodiment the p-Hyde gene has a nucleotide sequence having at least 75% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 5. In another embodiment the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 85% similarity with the nucleic acid cod g sequence of SEQ ID NO: 5. In another embodiment the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence having at least 90% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 5. h another embodiment the nucleic acid has a nucleotide sequence havmg at least 95% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO: 5. In another embodiment the nucleic acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 1 of the SEQ ID NO: 5 and ends at position 557 of SEQ ID NO: 5. In an oilier embodiment the nucleic acid comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO: 5 and ends at position 1 58 of SEQ ID NO: 5. In another embodiment the nucleic acid comprises a fragment which begins at the nucleic acid at position 50 of SEQ ID NO: 5 and ends at position 120 of SEQ ID NO: 5. The nucleic acid is DNA, cDNA, genomic DNA, or RNA
Rat p-Hyde nucleic acid sequence:
1 gaattcggca cgaggctgcc gaggcactgt gatgtccggg gagatggaca aaccgctcat 61 cagtcgccgc ttggtggaca gtgatggcag tctggctgag gtccccaagg aggctcccaa 121 agtgggcatc ctgggcagcg gggattttgc ccggtccctg gccacacgcc tggtgggctc 1 81 tggcttcttt gtggtggtgg gaagccgtaa ccccaaacgc actgccggcc tcttcccctc 241 cttagcccaa gtgactttcc aggaggaggc cgtgagctct ccagaggtca tctttgtggc 301 cgtgttccgg gagcactact cctcactgtg cagtcttgct gaccagttgg ctggcaagat 361 cctagtggat gtaagcaacc ccacggagaa ggagcgtclt cagcaccgcc agtcgaacgc 421 cgagtacctg gcctccctct tccctgcctg cactgtggtc aaggccttca acgtcatctc 481 tgcatgggcc ctacaggctg gcccaaggga tgggaacagg caggtgctca fctgcggtga 541 ccagctggaa gccaagcaca ccgtctcaga gatggcgcgc gccatgggtt tcaccccact 601 ggacatggga tccctggcct cagcgaggga ggtagaggcc atacccctgc gcctccttcc 661 atcctggaag gtgcccaccc tcctggccct ggggctaagc acacaaagct atgcctacaa 721 cttcatccgg gacgttctac agccgtacat ccggaaagat gagaacaagt tctacaagat 781 gcccctgtct giggtcaaca ccacgatacc ctgtgtggct tacgtgctgc tgtccctggt
841 ttacctgcct ggtgtgctgg cagctgccct tcagctgagg agggggacca agtaccagcg 901 cttcccagac tggctggacc attggctgca gcaccgcaag cagatcgggc tactcagctt 961 ttttttcgcc atgctgcacg ctctctacag cttctgcctg ccgctgcgcc gctcccaccg 1021 ctatgatctg gtcaacctgg ctgtgaagca ggtcctggcc aacaagagcc gcctcigggt„ 108 ltgaggaagaa gtctggcgga tggagatata cctgtccctg ggtgtgctgg ctctgggcat 1 141gctgtcactg ctggcggtta cctcgatccc ttccattgca aactcactca actggaagga 1201gttcagcttt gtgcagtcca cgctgggctt cgtggccctg atgctgagca caatgcacac 126 - cctcacctac ggctggaccc gtgcttttga ggaaaaccac tacaagttct acctgccacc 1321cacattcacg ctcacgctgc tcctgccctg tgtcatcatc ctggccaagg gcctctlcct 1381 ccigccctgc ctcagccaca gactcaccaa gatccgcagg ggctgggaga gggatggtgc 1441cgtcaagitc atgctgcccg ctggccacac acagggggag aaaacaagcc acgtgtgagg 1501ccctggaaat ggagacaggc acagcttgtg ggggccctgg gctgggttcg ggtctctttt 1561ctgggatggt atatgcgtgg gtggccgagg tctgaatttc tgggatgcag gtgtatgccg 162 lagatactcag aatggcgtac cacacatgcg ataagtactc acatatattt catatataat 1 81 aggatttact attattctta gttaaaaaaa aatagtgggt ccttatattt caacttatgc 1741agggtcccta tatttcaact tgagcatttc agagcaaatg ccacacatta aacagcagat 1801cccacccttg tggtagctgc agagacagac agaaacttct ggttatgaga gagactgtat 18 1 tttgttggat tctaccttta atccccgttc tctacgttcc cctgttagcc acatcttaac 1921gttggtgcag agctgggaca agagctggct ctggtgcagc ctcccccatc ccagggctag 1981 aaacaagcc tctgatgaac agagggacca ggtctggacc ctcctgctcc cgcttccctg 2041 ggctcgagtg gggaggctca gcgggatccc ccgcaatctg tgcaggagtt ttcacaggtc 2101 tgtcctϊtct tccgggagcg gtctgaagcg gccccatctg atcctagctg agccgagatt 2161 gttccccact ccctgaaagt ccagagtcac cgtggagcct gcaaattgct ccttctgcga 2221 ggtgtgaag tcaccgtctc accagagcca ttaacgaacc tgatcttcag aagaagcata 2281 attgtttccc ctccattaag ttggtggtga ccctctttaa accactgtgc cttctcgcct 2341ttcccatcac taatttgggc atctccatgg agtggactct tgtcggggca gttcaggggg 2401gagggaagca ttagagattg cggagaataa ccatcgaagc ctcccttgga tgttcccagg 2461cgtgccttca ttaaattggt ccctaatgag aatgacaggg gacccctgtt gcctgtatgc 2521agagaaccag ccttctgagc acccaggaaa cacagtggcc ccacgccctt caggggggtc 2581 ccacgιcccc tttcccatgc ttttgcctcc ctccctcccg gttacaatca accataaaag 2641tctgcaaata ttgttttttg aattcttaaa gagaccacat cctttgttat taccaaaaaa 2701aaaaaaaaaa aaac (SEQ ID No.: 5)
In anotlier embodiment the nucleic acid encodes an amino acid sequence having the sequence as set forth in SEQ ID NO 6. In one embodiment the the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 6 and ends at position 101. In one embodiment the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 1 of SEQ ID NO 6 and ends at position 80. In one embodiment the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid al position 1 of SEQ ID NO 2 and ends at position 60. In one embodiment the the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 61 of SEQ ID NO 6 and ends at position 241 . hi one embodiment the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 81 of SEQ ID NO 6 and ends at position 361. In one embodiment the amino acid fragment comprises a fragment which begins at the amino acid at position 81 of SEQ ID NO 2 and ends at position 421. In another embodiment the amino acid has at least 70% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 6. In anotlier embodniient the ammo acid has at least 75% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 6. In another embodiment the amino acid has at least 80% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 6. In one embodiment the amino acid has at least 85% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 6. In another embodiment the amino acid has at least 90% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 6. In another embodiment the amino acid has at least 95% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO 6.
Rat p-Hyde amino acid sequence:
1 MSGEMDKPLI SRRLVDSDGS LAEVPKEAPK VG1LGSGDFA RSLATRLVGS GFFVVVGSRN 61 PKRTAGLFPS LAQVTFQEEA VSSPEVIFVA VFREHYSSLC SLADQLAGK1 LVDVSNPTEK 1 1 ERLQHRQS A EYLASLFPAC TVVKAFNVtS AWALQAGPRD GNRQVLICGD QLEAKHTVSE 181 MARAMGFTPL DMGSLASARE VEAIPLRLLP SWKVPTLLAL GLSTQSYAYN FIRDVLQPYI
24 1 RKDENKFYKM PLSVVNTTTP CVAYVLLSLV YLPGVLAAAL QLRRGTKYQR FPDWLDHWLQ 301 HRKQIGLLSF FFAMLHALYS FCLPLRRSHR YDLVNLAVKQ VLANKSRLWV EEEVWRMEIY 361 LSLGVLALGM LSLLAVTSIP SlANSLNWKE FSFVQSTLGF VALMLSTMHT LTYGWTRAFE 42 I ENHYKFYLPP TFTLTLLLPC VTILAKGLFL LPCLSHRLTK IRRGWERDGA VKFMLPAGHT 481 QGEKTSH V* (SEQ ID NO 6)
Further this invention provides an isolated nucleic acid which encodes an amino acid sequence tccctggccacacgcctggtgggctclggcttc (SEQ ID NO: 7). Further this invention provides an isolated nucleic acid which encodes an amino acid sequence: AAPCVAYVLLSLVYLPGVLAAALQLRRGTKYQRFPDWLDHWLQHRKQIGLLSF F (SEQ ID NO: 8). Further this invention provides an isolated nucleic acid winch encodes an amino acid sequence NFIRDVLQPYIRKDENK.
The invention further encompasses nucleic acid molecules that differ from the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO 1 , SEQ ID NO.3, SEQ ID NO:5, or SEQ ID NO:7, due to degeneracy of the genetic code and thus encode the same p-Hyde protein as that encoded by the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 , SEQ ID NO:3, SEQ ID NO:5,or SEQ ID NO.7. It will be appreciated by those skilled in the ait that DNA sequence polymorphisms that lead to changes in the amino acid sequences of p-Hyde may exist within a population (e.g., the human population). Such genetic polymorphism in the p-Hyde gene may exist among individuals within a population due to natural allelic variation. An all el e is one of a group of genes which occur alternatively at a given genetic locus Such natural allelic variations can typically result in 1-5% variance in the nucleotide sequence of the p-Hyde gene. Alternative alleles can be identified by sequencing the gene of interest hi a number of different individuals. This can be readily carried out by using hybridization probes to identify the same genetic locus in a variety of individuals. Any and all such nucleotide variations and resulting amino acid polymorphisms in p-Hyde that are the result of natural allelic variation and that do not alter the functional activity of p-Hyde are intended to be within the scope of the invention. Moreover, nucleic acid molecules encoding p-Hyde proteins from other species (p-Hyde homologues), which have a nucleotide sequence which differs from that of a human p-Hyde, are intended to be within the scope of the invention. Nucleic acid molecules corresponding to natural allelic variants and homologues of the p-Hyde cDNA of the invention can be isolated based on their identity to the human p-Hyde nucleic acids disclosed herein using the human cDNAs, or a portion thereof, as a hybridization probe according to standard hybridization techniques under stringent hybridization conditions. For example, splice variants of human and mouse p-Hyde cDNA can he isolated based on identity to human and mouse p-Hyde.
As used herein, the term "hybridizes under stringent conditions" is intended to describe conditions for hybridization and washing under which nucleotide sequences at least 60% (65%o. 70%, preferably 75%) identical to each other typically remain hybridized to each other. Such stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y. (1989), 6.3.1-6.3.6. A preferred, non-limiting example of stringent hybridization conditions are hybridization in 6X sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC) at about 450C, followed by one or more washes in 0.2 X SSC, 0.1% SDS at 50-650C. Preferably, an isolated nucleic acid molecule of the invention that hybridizes under stringent conditions to the coding or non-coding (or "sense" or "anti-sense") sequence of SEQ ID NO: l , SEQ ID NO:2, SEQ ID NO:5, or SEQ ID NO:7, corresponds to a naturally- occurring nucleic acid molecule. As used herein, a "naturally-occurring" nucleic acid molecule refers to an RNA or DNA molecule having a nucleotide sequence that occurs in nature (e.g., encodes a natural protein). In addition to naturally-occtirring allelic variants of the p-Hyde sequence that may exist in the population, the skilled artisan will further appreciate that changes can be introduced by mutation into the nuclectide sequence of SEQ ID NO: l , SEQ ID NO:3, SEQ ID NO:5, or SEQ ID NO.7, thereby leading to changes in the amino acid sequence of the encoded p-Hyde protein, without altering the biological ability of the p-Hyde protein. Mutations can be introduced by standard techniques, such as site-directed mutagenesis and PCR-niediated mutagenesis. Preferably, conservative amino acid substitutions are made at one or more predicted non- essential amino acid residues.
A "conservative amino acid substitution" is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain. Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art. These families include amino acids with basic side chains (e.g., lysine, arginine, histidine), acidic side chains (e.g., aspartic acid, glutamic acid), uncharged polar side chains (e.g., glycine, asparagine, glutamine, serine, threonine, tyrosine, cysteine), nonpolar side chains (e.g., alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan), beta- branched side chains (e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine) and aromatic side chains (e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine). Thus, a predicted nonessential amino acid residue in P-Hyde is preferably replaced with another amino acid residue from the same side chain family. Alternatively, mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part of a P-Hyde coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for P-Hyde biological activity to identify mutants that retain activity. Following mutagenesis, the encoded protein can be expressed recombinantly and the activity of the protein can be determined.
In order to avoid severely reducing or eliminating biological activity, amino acid residues that are conserved among the p-Hyde proteins of various species are not altered (except by conservative substitution). Both murine and human p-Hyde protein have a conserved pattern of six cysteine residues. Such conserved domains and cysteine residues are less likely to be amenable to mutation. Other amino acid residues, however, (e.g., those that are not conserved or only semi- conserved among p-Hyde of various species e.g., between murine and human p-Hyde) may not be essential for activity and thus are likely to be amenable to alteration. Accordingly, another aspect of the invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules encoding p-Hyde proteins that contain changes in amino acid residues that are not essential for activity. Such p-Hyde proteins differ in amino acid sequence from SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4 yet retain biological activity. In one embodiment, the isolated nucleic acid molecule includes a nucleotide sequence encoding a protein that includes an amino acid sequence that is at least about 84% identical, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 98% identical to the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO-2, 4, 6, or 8.
The nucleotide encoding p-Hyde includes RNA, cDNA, genomic DNA, synthetic forms, and mixed polymers, both sense and antisense strands, and may be chemically or biochemically modified or may contain non-natural or derivatized nucleotide bases, as will be readily appreciated by those skilled in the ait. Such modifications include, for example, labels, methylation, substitution of one or more of the naturally occurring nucleotides with an analog, inlernucleotide modifications such as uncharged linkages (e g , methyl phosphonates, phosphotriesters, phosphoamidates, carbamates, etc.), charged linkages (e g . phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, etc.), pendent moieties (e g , polypeptides), intercalators (e.g , acridine, psoralen, etc.), chelators, alkylators, and modified linkages (e.g., alpha anomeπc nucleic acids, etc ). Also included are synthetic molecules that mimic nucleotides in their ability to bind to a designated sequence via hydrogen bonding and other chemical interactions. Such molecules are known in the art and mclude, for example, those in which peptide linkages substitute for phosphate linkages the backbone of the molecule, substantially homologous to primary structural sequence but which include, e.g , in vivo or in vitro chemical and biochemical modifications or which incorporate unusual amino acids The nucleic acid may be modified. Such modifications include, for example, acetylation, carboxylation, phosphorylation, glycosylation, ubiquitination, labeling, e.g., with radionuchdes. and various enzymatic modifications, as will be readily appreciated by those well skilled m the art. A variety of methods for labeling polypeptides and of substituents or labels useful for such purposes are well known in the art, and include ladioacuve isotopes such as 32 P, ligands which bind to labeled antiligands (e.g., antibodies), fluorophores, chemiluminescent agents, enzymes, and antiligands which can serve as specific bmding pair members for a labeled ligand. The choice of label depends on the sensitivity required, ease of conjugation with the primer, stability requirements, and available instrumentation. Methods of labeling polypeptides are well known in the art. See, e.g., Sambrook et al , 1989 or Ausubel et al., 1 92 Besides substantially full-length p-Hyde, the present invention provides for biologically active fragments of the p-hyde which arc known to those skilled in the art. As defined herein an "isolated" or "substantially pure" nucleic acid (e.g., an RNA, DNA or a mixed polymer) is one which is substantially separated from other cellular components which naturally accompany a native human sequence or protein, e.g., ribosomes, polymerases, many other human genome sequences and proteins. The term embraces a nucleic acid sequence or protein which has been removed from its naturally occurring environment, and includes recombinant or cloned DNA isolates and chemically synthesized analogs or analogs biologically synthesized by heterologous systems.
"p-Hyde AUele" refers to normal alleles of the p-Hyde locus as well as alleles carrying variations that predispose individuals to develop cancer of many sites including, for example, breast, ovarian, colorectal and prostate cancer. Such predisposing alleles are also called "p-Hyde susceptibility alleles".
"p-Hyde Locus," "p-Hyde Gene," "p-Hyde Nucleic Acids" or "p-Hyde Polynucleotide" each refer to polynucleotides, all of which are in the p-Hyde region, thai are likely to be expressed in normal tissue, certain alleles of which predispose an individual to develop breast, ovarian, colorectal and prostate cancers which have p-Hyde activity.. Mutations at the p-Hyde locus may be involved in the initiation and/or progression of other types of tumors. The locus is indicated in part by mutations that predispose individuals to develop cancer These mutations fall within the p-Hyde region described infra. The p-Hyde locus is intended to include coding sequences, intervening sequences and regulatory elements controlling transcription and/or translation. The p-Hyde locus is intended to include all allelic variations of the DNA sequence.
A "nucleic acid" refers to the phosphate ester polymeric for of ribonucleosides (adenosine, guanosine, uridine or cytidine; "RNA molecules") or deoxyribonucleosides (deoxyadenosinc, deoxy guanosine. deoxythyniidine, or deoxy cytidine, "DNA molecules") in either smgle stranded form, or a double-stranded helix. Double stranded DNA-DNA, DNA-RNA and RNA-RNA helices are possible. The term icleic acid molecule, and in particular DNA or RNA molecule, refers only to the primary and secondary structure of the molecule, an does not lirn it to any particular tertiary forms. Thus, this term includes double-stranded DNA found, inter alia, in linear or circular DNA molecules (e.g.. restriction fragments), plasmids, and chromosomes. In discussing the structure of particular double-stranded DNA molecules, sequences may be described herein according to the normal convention of giving only the sequence in the 5' to 3 ' direction along the nontranscribed strand of DNA (i.e. , the strand having a sequence homologous to the mRNA). A "recombinant DNA" is a DNA that has undergone a molecular biological manipulation.
The phrase "nucleic acid encoding" refers to a nucleic acid molecule which directs the expression of a specific protein or peptide. The nucleic acid sequences include both the DNA strand sequence that is transcribed into RNA and the RNA sequence that is translated into protein. The nucleic acid molecule include both the full length nucleic acid sequences as well as non-full length sequences derived from the full length protein. It being further understood that the sequence includes the degenerate codons of the native sequence or sequences which may be introduced to provide codon preference in a specific host cell
"Recombinant nucleic acid" is a nucleic acid which is not naturally occurring, or which is made by the artificial combination of two otherwise separated segments of sequence. This artificial combination is often accomplished by either chemical synthesis means, or by the artificial manipulation of isolated segments of nucleic acids, e.g., by genetic engineering techniques. Such is usually done to replace a codon with a redundant codon encoding the same or a conservative amino acid, while typically introducing or removing a sequence recognition site. Alternatively, it is performed to join together nucleic acid segments of desired functions to generate a desired combination of functions.
As used herein, the term "cancer cell" means a tissue that grows by cellular proliferation more rapidly than normal, e.g. , more rapidly than adjoining cells, or other cells in the tissue. Neoplastic cells continue to grow after growth stimuli cease. Generally, tumors represent or form a distinct mass of tissue. The present invention relates to both types of tumors, but is particularly valuable in the treatment of cancers.
In one embodiment the cancer cells are selected from a group consisting of: melanoma; lymphoma; leukemia; and prostate, colorectal, pancreatic, breast, brain, or gastric carcinoma. Examples of tumors include but are not limited to: include sarcomas and carcinomas such as, but not limited to: fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma. chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's sarcoma, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyo sarcoma, colon carcinoma, pancreatic cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary caicinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duel carcinoma, choriocarcinonia, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilms1 tumor, cervical cancer, germ tumor, non-small cell lung carcinoma, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, epithelial carcinoma, glioma, astrocytoma, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma, hemangioblastoma, acoustic neuroma, oligodendroglioma, meningioma, melanoma, neuroblastoma, and retinoblastoma. In a preferred embodiment the tumor is a melanoma or a prostate cell.
Mutations can be made in a nucleic acid encoding p-Hyde such that a particular codon is changed to a codon which codes for a different ammo acid but the induction of susceptibility to cell death is maintained. Such a mutation is generally made by making the fewest nucleotide changes possible. A substitution mutation of this sort can be made to change an ammo acid in the resulting protein in a non-conservative manner (i.e., by changing the codon from an ammo acid belonging to a grouping of amino acids having a particular size or characteristic to an amino acid belonging to another grouping) or in a conservative manner (i.e., by changing the codon from an amino acid belonging to a grouping of amino acids having a particular size or characteristic to an amino acid belonging to the same grouping). Such a conservative change generally leads to less change in the structure and function of the resulting protein. A non-conservative change is more likely to alter the structure, activity or function of the resultmg protein. The present invention should be considered to include sequences containing conservative changes which do not significantly alter the activity or bmding characteristics of the resulting protein. Substitutes for an amino acid within the sequence may be selected from other members of the class to which the amino acid belongs. For example, the nonpolar (hydrophobic) amino acids include alanine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan and methionine Amino acids containing aromatic ring structures are phenylalanine, tryptophan, and tyrosine. The polar neutral amino acids include glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine. tyrosine, asparagine, and glutamine. The positively charged (basic) amino acids include arginine, lysine and histidine The negatively charged (acidic) amino acids include aspartic acid and glutamic acid Such alterations will not be expected to affect apparent molecular weight as determined by polyacrylarnide gel electrophoresis, or isoelectric point. Tins isolated nucleic acid also encodes mutant p-Hyde or the wildtype protein
The invention further provides a recombinant expression vector comprising a DNA molecule of the invention cloned into the expression vector in an antisense orientation. That is, the DNA molecule is operably linked to a regulatory sequence in a manner which allows for expression (by transcription of the DNA molecule) of an RNA molecule which is antisense to p-Hyde mRNA. Regulatory sequences operably linked to a nucleic acid cloned in the antisense orientation can be chosen which direct the continuous expression of the antisense RNA molecule in a variety of cell types, for instance viral promoters and/or enhancers, or regulatory sequences can be chosen which direct constitutive, tissue specific or cell type specific expression of antisense RNA The antisense expression vector can be in the form of a recombinant plasmid, phageraid or attenuated virus in which antisense nucleic acids are produced under the control of a high efficiency regulatory region, the activity of which can be determined by the cell type into which the vector is introduced. For a discussion of the regulation of gene expression using antisense genes see Weintraub et al. (Reviews - Trends in Genetics, Vol 1(1) 1986).
This invention provides for a rephcable vector comprising the isolated nucleic acid molecule of the DNA virus. The vector includes, but is not limited to: a plasmid, cosmid, phage or yeast artificial chromosome (YAC) which contains at least a portion of the isolated nucleic acid molecule. As an example to obtain these vectors, insert and vector DNA can both be exposed to a restriction enzyme to create complementary ends on both molecules which base pair with each other and are then ligated together with DNA ligase. Alternatively, linkers can be ligated to the insert DNA which correspond to a restriction site in the vector DNA, which is then digested with the restriction enzyme which cuts at that site. Other means are also available and known to an ordinary skilled practitioner. In one embodiment the adenovirus vector is a replication-deficient adenovirus type 5 expression vector. In another embodiment the adenovirus vector comprises an adenovirus genome having a deletion in the El and E3 region of the genome and an insertion within the region of a nucleic acid encoding p-Hyde under the control of a promoter. The promoter may be a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter.
Knowledge of the genetic organization of adenovirus, a 36 kB, linear and double-stranded DNA virus, allows substitution of a large piece of adenoviral DNA with foreign sequences up to 7 kB (Grunhaus and Horwitz, 1992). In contrast to retrovirus, the infection of adenoviral DNA into host cells does not result in chromosomal integration because adenoviral DNA can replicate in an episomal manner without potential genotoxicity. Also, adeno viruses are structurally stable, and no genome rearrangement has been detected after extensive amplification. Adenovirus can infect virtually all epithelial cells regardless of their cell cycle stage. So far, adenoviral infection appears to be linked only to mild disease such as acute respiratory disease in the human
Adenovirus is particulaiiy suitable for use as a gene transfer vector because of its mid-sized genome, ease of manipulation, high titer, wide target-cell range, and high infectivity. Both ends of the viral genome contain 100-200 base pair Cop) inverted terminal repeats (ITR), which axe cis elements necessary for viral DNA replication and packaging. The early (E) and late (L) regions of the genome contain different transcription units that are divided by the onset of viral DNA replication. The El region (El A and E1B) encodes proteins responsible for the regulation of transcription of the viral genome and a few cellular genes. The expression of the E2 region (E2A and E2B) results in the synthesis of the proteins for viral DNA replication. These proteins are involved in DNA replication, late gene expression, and host cell shut off (Renan, 1990) The products of the late genes, including the majority of the viral capsid proteins, are expressed only after significant processing of a single primary transcript issued by the major late promoter (MLP). The MLP (located at 16.8 m.u.) is particularly efficient during the late phase of infection, and all the mRNAs issued from this promoter possess a 5' tripartite leader (TL) sequence which makes them preferred mRNAs for translation.
In the current system, recombinant adenovirus is generated from homologous recombination between shuttle vector and provhus vectoi Due to the possible recombination between two proviral vectors, wild-type adenovirus may be generated from this process. Therefore, it is critical to isolate a single clone of virus from an individual plaque and examine its genomic structure. Use of the YAC system is an alternative approach for the production of recombinant adenovirus.
Generation and propagation of the current adenovirus vectors, which are replication deficient, depend on a unique helper cell line, designated 293, which was transformed from human embryonic kidney cells by Ad5 DNA fragments and constitutively expresses El proteins (Graham, et al., 1 77). Since the E3 region is dispensable from the adenovirus genome (Jones and Shenlc, 1978), the current adenovirus vectors, with the help of 293 cells, cany foreign DNA in either the El, the E3 or both regions (Graham and Prevec, 1991). In nature, adenovirus can package approximately 105%> of the wild-type genome (Ghosh-Choudhury, et al , 1987), providing capacity for about 2 extra kB of DNA. Combined with the approximately 5.5 kB of DNA that is replaceable in the El and E3 regions, the maximum capacity of the current adenovirus vector is under 7.5 kB, or about 15% of the total length of the vector. More than 80% of the adenovirus viral genome remains in the vector backbone and is the source of vector-borne cytotoxicity. Also, the replication deficiency of the El deleted virus is incomplete. For example, leakage of viral gene expression has been observed with the currently available adenovirus vectors at high multiplicities of infection (Mulligan, 1993). Helper cell lines may be derived from human cells such as human embryonic kidney cells, muscle cells, hematopoietic cells or other human embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells. Alternatively, the helper cells may be derived from tlie cells of other mammalian species that are permissive for human adenovirus. Such cells include, e.g., Vero cells or other monkey embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells As stated above, the preferred helper cell line is 293.
Other than the requirement that the adenovnus vector be replication defective, or at least conditionally defective, the nature of the adenovirus vector is not believed to be crucial to the successful practice of the invention. The adenovirus may be of any of the 42 different known serotypes or subgroups A-F. Adenovirus type 5 of subgroup C is the preferred starting material in order to obtain the conditional replication-defective adenovirus vector for use in the method of the present invention. This is because Adenovirus type 5 is a human adenovirus about which a great deal of biochemical and genetic information is known, and it has historically been used for most constructions employing adenovirus as a vector.
As stated above, the typical vector according to the present invention is replication defective and will not have an adenovirus El region. Thus, it will be most convenient to introduce the nucleic acid encoding p-Hyde at the position from which the El coding sequences have been removed. However, the position of insertion of the p-Hyde coding region within the adenovirus sequences is not critical to the present invention. The nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde transcription unit also may be inserted in lieu of the deleted E3 region in E3 replacement vectors as described previously by Karlsson et. al. (1986) or in the E4 region where a helper ceil line or helper virus complements the E4 defect.
Adenovirus is easy to grow and manipulate and exhibits broad host range in vitro and in vivo. This group of viruses can be obtained in high titers, e.g., 1 09 -1011 plaque-forming unit (PFU)/ml, and they are highly infective The life cycle of adenovirus does not require integration into the host cell genome. The foreign genes delivered by adenovirus vectors are episomal, and therefore, have low genotoxicity to host cells. No side effects 00/71564
have been reported in studies of vaccination with wild-type adenovirus (Couch et al., 1963; Top et al., 1971), demonstrating their safety and therapeutic potential as in vivo gene transfer vectors.
Adenovirus vectors have been used in eulkaryotic gene expression (Levrero et al., 1991;
Gomez-Foix et al., 1992) and vaccine development (Grunhaus and Horwitz, 1992;
Graliam and Prevec, 1992). Recently, animal studies suggested that recombinant adenovirus could be used for gene therapy (Slratford-Perricaudet and Perricaudet, -1991 ;
Stratford-Penϊcaudet et al., 1990; Rich et al.. 1993). Experiments in administering recombinant adenovirus to different tissues include trachea instillation (Rosenfeld et al.,
1991 ; Rosenfeld et a]., 1992), muscle injection (Ragot et al., 1993), peripheral intravenous injection (Herz and Gerard, 1 93), and stereotactic inoculation into the brain
(Le Gal La Salle et al., 1993).
An appropriate promoter and other necessary vector sequences will be selected so as to be functional in tlie host, and may include, when appropriate, those naturally associated with p-Hyde genes. Examples of workable combinations of cell lines and expression vectors are described in Sambrook et al., 1989 or Ausubel et al., 1992; see also, e.g., Metzger el al , 1988. Many useful vectors are known in the art and may be obtained from such vendors as Stratagene, New England Biolabs, Prornega Biotech, and others. Promoters such as the trp, lac and phage promoters, tRNA promoters and glycolytic enzyme promoters may be used in prokaryotic hosts. Useful yeast promoters include promoter regions for metallotliionein, 3-phosphoglycerate kinase or other glycolytic enzymes such as enolase or gly ceraidehyde-3 -phosphate dehydrogenase, enzymes responsible for maltose and galactose utilization, and others. Vectors and promoters suitable for use hi yeast expression are further described in Hitzeman et al., EP 73.675A. Appropriate non-native mammalian promoters might include the early and late promoters from SV40 (Fiers et al., 1 78) or promoters derived from murine Moloney leukemia virus, mouse inor vfrus, avian sarcoma viruses, adenovirus II. bovine papilloma virus or polyoma. In addition, the construct may be joined to an amplifiable gene (e.g., DHFR) so that multiple copies of the gene may be made. For appropriate enhancer and other expression control sequences, see
11 O
also Enhancers and Eukaryotic Gene Expression, Cold Spring Harbor Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y. (1 83).
While such expression vectors may replicate autonomously, they may also replicate by being inserted into the genome of the host cell, by methods well known in the art. Expression and cloning vectors will likely contain a selectable marker, a gene encoding a protein necessary for survival or growth of a host cell transformed with the vector. The presence of this gene ensures growth of only those host cells which express the inserts. Typical selection genes encode proteins that a) confer resistance to antibiotics or other toxic substances, e.g. ampicillin, neomycin, methotrexaie, etc.; b) complement auxotrophic deficiencies, or c) supply critical nutrients not available from complex media, e.g., the gene encodhig D-alanine racemase for Bacilli. The choice of tlie proper selectable marker will depend on the host cell, and appropriate markers for different hosts are well known in the art.
The vectors containing tlie nucleic acids of interest can be transcribed in vitro, and the resulting RNA introduced into the host cell by well-known methods, e.g., by injection (see, Kubo et al ., 1 988), or the vectors can be introduced directly into host cells by methods well known in the art, which vary depending on the type of cellular host, including electroporation, transfection employing calcium chloride, rubidium chloride, calcium phosphate, DEAE-dextran, or other substances; n icroprojectile bombardment; hpofection; infection (where the vector is an infectious agent, such as a retroviral genome); and other methods. See generally, Sambrook et al., 1989 and Ausubel et al., 1992. The introduction of the polynucleotides into the host cell by any method known in the art, including, inter alia, those described above, will be referred to herein as "transformation." The cells into which have been introduced nucleic acids described above are meant to also include the progeny of such cells.
Regulatory elements required for expression include promoter or enhancer sequences to bind RNA polymerase and transcription initiation sequences for ribosome binding. For example, a bacterial expression vector includes a promoter such as tlie lac promoter and for transcription initiation the Shine-Dalgarno sequence and the start codon AUG. _ _ -
Similarly, a eukaryotic expression vector includes a heterologous or homologous promoter for RNA polymerase II, a downstream polyadenylation signal, the start codon AUG, and a termination codon for detachment of the ribosome. Such vectors may be obtained commercially or assembled from the sequences described by methods well-known in the art, for example tlie methods described above for constructing vectors in general.
Viral promoters, cellular promoters/enhancers and inducible promoters/enhancers that could be used in combination with the nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde in an expression construct include but are not limited to tlie following: Immuno globulin Heavy Chain; Tmmunoglobulin Light Chain; T-Cell Receptor; HLA DQ alpha and DQ beta; beta -Interfcron, lnterleukin-2 ; Interleukin-2 Receptor; MHC Class II 5 alpha; MHC Class II HLA-DR alpha; beta -Aclm; Muscle Creatine Kinase; Prealbumin (Transtliyτetin); Elastase I, Metalloihionein; Collagenase; Albumin Gene; alpha -Fetoprotein; tau -Globin; beta -Globin; c-fos; c-HA-ras; Neural Cell Adhesion Molecule (NCAM); alpha 1-Antitrypsin; I-I2B (TH2B) Histone; Mouse or Type I Collagen; Glucose-Regulated Proteins (GRP94 and GRP78); Rat Growth Hormon, Human Serum Amyloid A (SAA); Troponin I (TN I); Platelet-Derived Growth Factor, Duchenne Muscular; SV40; Polyoma; Retroviruses; Papilloma Virus; Hepatitis B Virus; Human Immunodeficiency Virus; Cytomegalovirus; Gibbon Ape Leulcemia Virus; MT II; MMTV (mouse mammary Glucocorticoids, Adenovirus 5 E2.
Additionally any promoter/enhancer combination (as per the Eukaryotic Promoter Data Base EPDB) could also be used to dπve expression of a p-Hyde. Use of a T3, T7 or SP6 cytoplasmic expression system is another possible embodiment. Eukaryotic cells can support cytoplasmic transcription from certain bacterial promoters if the appropriate bacterial polymerase is provided, either as part of the delivery complex or as an additional genetic expression construct.
This invention provides a host cell containing the above vector. The host cell may contain the isolated DNA molecule artificially introduced into the host cell. The host cell may be a eukaryotic or bacterial cell (such as E.coli . yeast cells, fungal cells, insect cells and animal cells Suitable animal cells include, but are not limited to Vero cells, HeLa cells, Cos cells, CV1 cells and various primary mammalian cells.
Another aspect of the invention pertains to host cells into which a recombinant expression vector of the invention has been introduced. The terms "host cell" and "recombinant host cell" are used interchangeably herein, it is understood that such terms refer not only to the particular subject cell but to the progeny or potential progeny of such a cell Because certain modifications may occur in succeeding generations due to either mutation or environmental influences, such progeny may not, in fact, be identical to the parent cell, but are still included withm the scope of the term as used herein. A host cell can be any prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell. For example, p-Hyde protein can be expressed in bacterial cells such as E. coh, insect cells, yeast or mammalian cells (such as Chinese hamster ovary cells (CHO) or COS cells) other suitable host cells are known to those skilled in the art. Vector DNA can be introduced into prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells via conventional transformation or transfection techniques. As used herein, the terms "transformation" and "transfection" are intended to refer to a variety of art-recognized techniques for introducing foreign nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) into a host cell, including calcium phosphate or calcium chloride co- precipitation, DEAE-dextran-mediated transfection, hpofection, or electroporation. Suitable methods for transforming or transfecting host cells can be found in Sambrook, et al. (supra), and other laboratory manuals. For stable transfection of mammalian cells, it is known that, depending upon the expression vector and transfection technique used, only a small ft action of cells may mtegiate tl e foreign DNA into their genome. In order to identify and select these integrants, a gene that encodes a selectable marker (e.g., for resistance lo antibiotics) is generally introduced into the host cells along with the gene of interest.
Preferred selectable markers include those which confer resistance to drugs, such as G418, hygromycm and methotrexate. Nucleic acid encoding a selectable marker can be introduced into a host cell on the same vector as that encoding p-Hyde or can be introduced on a separate vector. Cells stably transfected with the introduced nucleic acid can be identified by drug selection (e.g., cells that have incorporated the selectable marker gene will survive, while the other cells die). A host cell of the invention, such as a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host cell in culture, can be used to produce (i.e., express) p-Hyde protein.
Accordingly, the invention further provides methods for producing p-Hyde protein using the host cells of the invention. In one embodiment, the method comprises cultnring tlie host cell of invention (into which a recombinant expression vector encoding p-Hyde has been introduced) in a suitable medium such that p-Hyde protein is produced. In another embodiment, tlie method further comprises isolating p-Hyde from the medium or the host cell. The host cells of the invention can also be used to produce nonhuman transgenic animals.
For example, in one embodiment, a host cell of the invention is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which p-Hyde-coding sequences have been introduced. Such host cells can then he used to create non-human transgenic animals in which exogenous p-Hyde sequences have been introduced into their genome or homologous recombinant animals in which endogenous p-Hyde sequences have been altered. Such animals are useful for studying the function and/or activity of p-Hyde and for identifying and/or evaluating modulators of p-Hyde activity. As used herein, a "transgenic animal', is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a rodent such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more of the cells of the animal includes a transgene. Other examples of transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, amphibians, etc.
A transgenic animal of the invention can be created by introducing p-I yde-encoding nucleic acid into tl e male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection, retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal. The p-Hyde cDNA sequence e.g., that of (SEQ ID NO:l,3, 5, or 7) can be introduced as a transgene into the genome of a non-human animal. Alternatively, a nonhuman homologue of the human p-Hyde gene, can be isolated based on hybridization to the human p-Hyde cDNA and used as a transgene. Intronic sequences and polyadenylation signals can also be included in the transgene to increase the efficiency of expression of the transgene. A tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to the p-Hyde transgene to direct expression of p-Hyde protein to particular cells Methods for generating transgenic animals via embryo manipulation and microinjection, particularly animals such as mice, have become conventional in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,736,866 and 4,870,009, U.S. Patent No. 4,873, 191 and in Hogan, Manipulating the Mouse Embryo, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1986). Similar methods are used for production of other transgenic animals. A transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence of tlie p-Hyde transgene in its genome and/or expression of p-Hyde mRNA hi tissues or cells of the animals. A transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying tlie transgene. Moreover, transgenic animals carrying a transgene encoding p-Hyde can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes.
To create an homologous recombinant animal, a vector is prepared which contains at least a portion of a p-Hyde gene (e.g., a human or a non-human homolog of the p-Hyde gene, e.g., a murine p-Hyde gene) into which a deletion, addition or substitution has been introduced to thereby alter, e.g., functionally disrupt, the p-Hyde gene. In a preferred embodiment, the vector is designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous p-Hyde gene is functionally disrupted (i.e., no longer encodes a functional protein; also referred to as a "knock out" vector). Alternatively, tlie vector can be designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous p-Hyde gene is mutated or otherwise altered but still encodes functional protein (e.g., the upstream regulatory region can be altered lo thereby alter the expression of the endogenous p-Hyde protein).
The term "vector", refers to viral expression systems, autonomous self-replicating circular DNA (plasmids), and includes both expression and nonexpression plasmids. Where a recombinant microorganism or cell culture is described as hosting an "expression vector," this includes both extrachromosomal circular DNA and DNA that has been incorporated into the host chromosome(s). Where a vector is being maintained by a host cell, tlie vector may either be stably replicated by the cells during mitosis as an autonomous structure, or is incorporated within the host's genome. 00/71564
The term "plasmid" refers to an autonomous circular DNA molecule capable of lephcation in a cell, and includes both the expression and nonexpression types. Where a recombinant microorganism or cell culture is described as hosting an "expression plasmid", tins includes latent viral DNA integrated into the host chιomosome(s). Where a plasmid is being maintained by a host cell, the plasmid is either bemg stably replicated by the cells during mitosis as an autonomous structure 01 is incorporated within the host's genome.
The following tenns are used to describe the sequence relationships between two or more nucleic acid molecules or polynucleotides: "reference sequence", "comparison window", "sequence identity", "percentage of sequence identity", and "substantial identity" A "ieference sequence" is a defined sequence used as a basis for a sequence comparison, a ieference sequence may be a subset of a larger sequence, for example, as a segment of a full-length cDNA or gene sequence given in a sequence listing or may comprise a complete cDNA or gene sequence.
Optimal alignment of sequences for aligning a comparison window may be conducted by the local homology algorithm of Smith and Waterman (1981) Adv Appl Math 2-482, by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman and Wunsch (1970) J. Mol Biol 48 443, by the search for similarity method of Pearson and Lipman (1988) Proc Nail Acad S i (USA) 8 - AAA, or by computerized implementations of these algoπthms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package Release 7.0, Genetics Computer Group, 575 Science Dr., Madison, WI).
"Substantial identity" or "substantial sequence identity" mean that two peptide sequences, when optimally aligned, such as by the programs GAP or BESTFIT using default gap which share at least 90 percent sequence identity, preferably at least 95 percent sequence identity, more preferably at least 99 percent sequence identity or more. "Peicentage amino acid identity" or "percentage amino acid sequence identity" refers to a comparison of the amino acids of two polypeptides which, when optimally aligned, have approximately tlie designated percentage of the same amino acids. For example, 00/71564
"95% amino acid identity" refers to a comparison of the amino acids of two polypeptides which when optimally aligned have 95% amino acid identity Preferably, residue positions which are not identical differ by conservative amino acid substitutions For example, the substitution of amino acids havmg similar chemical properties such as charge or polarity are not likely to effect the properties of a protein. Examples include glutamine for asparagine or glutamic acid for aspartic acid.
The percent identity between the two sequences is a function of the number of identical positions shared by the sequences (i.e., % identity of identical positions/total # of positions (e.g., overlapping) x 100). Preferably, the two sequences are the same length. The determination of percent homology between two sequences can be accomplished usmg a mathematical algorithm. A preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for tlie comparison of two sequences is the algorithm of Karlin and AJtschul (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:2264-2268, modified as in Karlin and Altschul (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5877. Such an algorithm is incorporated into the NBLAST and XBLAST programs of Altschul, et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410. BLAST nucleotide searches can be performed with the NBLAST program, score = 100, wordlength = 12 to obtain nucleotide sequences homologous to p-Hyde nucleic acid molecules of the invention. BLAST protein searches can be performed with the X13LAST program, score = 50, wordlength = 3 to obtain amino acid sequences homologous to p-Hyde protein molecules of the invention. To obtain gapped alignments for comparison purposes, Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et aL, (1997) Nucleic Acids Res. .3389-3402. When utilizing BLAST and Gapped BLAST programs, the default parameters of the respective programs (e.g., X13LAST and NBLAST) can be used. See http //www.ncbi, nlm.nih.gov. Anotlier preferred, non- limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of sequences is the algorithm of Myers and Miller, CABIOS 4: 1 1-17 (1988). Such an algorithm is incorporated into the ALIGN program (version 2.0) which is part of the GCG sequence alignment software package. When utilizing the ALIGN program for comparing ammo acid sequences, a PAM120 weight residue table, a gap length penalty of 12, and a gap penalty of 4 can be used. The percent identity between two sequences 00/71564
can be determined using techniques similar to those described above, with or without allowing gaps. In calculating percent identity, only exact matches are counted.
This invention provides a nucleic acid having a sequence complementary to the sequence of the isolated nucleic acid of the human p-Hyde gene. Specifically, this invention provides an oligonucleotide of at least 15 nucleotides capable of specifically hybridizing with a sequence of nucleotides present within a nucleic acid which encodes the human p-Hyde In one embodiment the nucleic acid is DNA or RNA. In another embodiment the oligonucleotide is labeled with a detectable marker. In another embodiment the oligonucleotide is a radioactive isotope, a fluorophor or an enzyme.
Oligonucleotides which are complementary may be obtained as follows: The polymerase chain reaction is then carried out using the two primers. See PCR Protocols A Guide to Methods and Applications [74] Following PCR amplification, the PCR-amplificd regions of a viral DNA can be tested for their ability to hybridize to the three specific nucleic acid probes listed above. Alternatively, hybridization of a viral DNA to the above nucleic acid probes can be performed by a Southern blot procedure without viral DNA amplification and under stringent hybridization conditions as descπbed herein
Oligonucleotides for use as probes or PCR primers arc chemically synthesized according to the solid phase phosphoramidite tnester method first described by Beaucage and Carruthers [19] using an automated synthesizer, as described in Needham-VanDevanter [69]. Purification of oligonucleotides is by either native acrylamide gel electrophoresis or by anion-exchange HPLC as described in Pearson, J.D. and Regnier, F E. [75A]. The sequence of the synthetic oligonucleotide can be verified using the chemical degradation method of Maxa , A.M. and Gilbert, W. [63].
High stπngent hybridization conditions are selected at about 5? C lower than the thermal melting point (Tm) for the specific sequence at a defined ionic strength and pH.
The T is the temperature (under defined ionic strength and pH) at which 50% of tlie target sequence hybridizes to a perfectly matched probe. Typically, stringent conditions
59 will be those hi which the salt concentration is at least about 0.02 molar at pH 7 and the temperature is at least about 60C. As other factors may significantly affect the stringency of hybridization, including, among others, base composition and size of the complementary strands, the presence of organic solvents, ie. salt or formamide concentration, and tlie extent of base mismatching, the combination of parameters is more important than tl e absolute measure of any one. For Example high stringency may be attained for example by overnight hybridization at about 68C in a 6x SSC solution, washing at room temperature with 6x SSC solution, followed by washing at about 68C in a 6x SSC in a 0.6x SSX solution.
Hybridization with moderate stringency may be attained for example by: 1) filter pre-hybridizing and hybridizing with a solution of 3x sodium chloride, sodium citrate (SSC), 50% formamide, 0.1M Tris buffer at Ph 7.5, 5x Denhardt's solution; 2.) pre-hybridization at 37? C for 4 hours; 3) hybridization at 37? C with amount of labelled probe equal to 3,000,000 cpm total for 16 hours; 4) wash in 2x SSC and 0.1% SDS solution; 5) wash 4x for 1 minute each at room temperature at 4x at 60? C for 30 minutes each; and 6) dry and expose to film.
The phrase "selectively hybridizing to" refers to a nucleic acid probe that hybridizes, duplexes or binds only to a particular target DNA or RNA sequence when the target sequences are present in a preparation of total cellular DNA or RNA. By selectively hybridizing it is meant that a probe binds to a given target in a manner that is detectable in a different manner from non-target sequence under high stringency conditions of hybridization, in a different "Complementary" or "target" nucleic acid sequences refer to those nucleic acid sequences which selectively hybridize to a nucleic acid probe. Proper annealing conditions depend, for example, upon a probe's length, base composition, and the number of mismatches and their position on the probe, and must often be determined empirically. For discussions of nucleic acid probe design and annealing conditions, see, for example, Sambrook et al., [81 ] or Ausubel, F., et al., [8].
It will be readily understood by those skilled in the art and it is intended here, that when reference is made to particular sequence listings, such reference includes sequences which substantially correspond to its complementary sequence and those described including allowances for minor sequencing errors, single base changes, deletions, substitutions and the like, such that any such sequence variation corresponds to the nucleic acid sequence of the pathogenic organism or disease marker to which the relevant sequence listing relates.
The primer pairs of the present invention are useful for deteπnination of the nucleotide sequence of a particular p-Hyde allele using PCR. The pairs of single-stranded DNA primers can be annealed to sequences within or surrounding the p-Hyde gene in order to prime amplifying DNA synthesis of the p-Hyde gene itsel f. A complete set of these primers allows synthesis of all of tl e nucleotides of the p-Hyde gene coding sequences, i.e., the exons. The set of primers preferably allows synthesis of both intron and exon sequences Allele-specific primers can also be used. Such primers anneal only to paiticular p-Hyde mutant alleles, and thus will only amplify a product in the presence of the mutant allele as a template
Nucleic acid probe technology is well known to those skilled in the art who readily appreciate that such probes may vary greatly in length and may be labeled with a
' detectable label, such as a radioisotope or fluorescent dye, to facilitate detection of the probe. DNA probe molecules may be produced by insertion of a DNA molecule having the full-length or a fragment of the isolated nucleic acid molecule of the DNA virus into suitable vectors, such as plasmids or bacteriophages, followed by transforming into suitable bacterial host cells, replication in the transformed bacterial host cells and harvesting of the DNA probes, using methods well known in the art. Alternatively, probes may be generated chemically from DNA synthesizers.
RNA probes may be generated by inserting the full length or a fragment of tlie isolated nucleic acid molecule of the DNA virus downstream of a bacleriophage promoter such as T3, T7 or SP6. Large amounts of RNA probe may be produced by incubating the labeled nucleotides with a linearized isolated nucleic acid molecule of the DNA virus or its fragment where it contains an upstream promoter h the presence of the appropriate RNA polymerase, As defined herein nucleic acid probes may be DNA or RNA fragments. DNA fragments can be prepared, for example, by digesting plasmid DNA, or by use of PCR, or synthesized by either the phosphoramidite method described by Beaucage and Carruthers, [19], or by the triester method according to Matteucci, et al., [62], both incorporated herein by refereuce. A double stranded fragment may then be obtained, if desired, by annealing tl e chemically synthesized single strands together under appropriate conditions or by synthesizing the complementary strand using DNA polymerase with an appropriate primer sequence. Where a specific sequence for a nucleic acid probe is given, it is understood that the complementary strand is also identified and included. The complementary strand will work equally well in situations where the target is a double-stranded nucleic acid. It is also understood that when a specific sequence is identified for use a nucleic probe, a subsequence of the listed sequence which is 25 basepairs or more in length is also encompassed for use as a probe.
The nucleic acid of the subject invention also include DNA molecules coding for polypeptide analogs, fragments or derivatives of antigenic polypeptides which differ from naturally-occurring forms in terms of the identity ot location of one or more amino acid residues (deletion analogs containing less than all of tl e residues specified for the protein, substitution analogs wherein one or more residues specified are replaced by other residues and addition analogs where in one or more amino acid residues is added to a terminal or medial portion of the polypeptides) and which share some or all properties of naturally-occurring forms. These molecules include: the incorporation of codons "preferred" for expression by selected non-mammalian hosts; the provision of sites for cleavage by restriction endonuclease enzymes; and the provision of additional initial, terminal or intermediate DNA sequences that facilitate construction of readily expressed vectors.
Also, this invention provides an antisense molecule capable of specifically hybridizing with the isolated nucleic acid of the human p-Hyde gene. This invention provides an antagonist capable of blocking the expression of the peptide or polypeptide encoded by the isolated DNA molecule. In one embodiment the antagonist is capable of hybridizing 00/71564
with a double stranded DNA molecule, in another embodiment the antagonist is a triplex oligonucleotide capable of hybridizing to the DNA molecule. In another embodiment the triplex oligonucleotide is capable of binding to at least a portion of tlie isolated DNA molecule with a nucleotide sequence..
The antisense molecule may be DNA or RNA or valiants thereof (i.e. DNA or RNA with a protein backbone). The present invention extends to tlie preparation of antisense nucleotides and ribozymes that may be used to mterfere with the expression of the receptor recognition proteins at the translation of a specific mRNA, either by masking that MRNA with an antisense nucleic acid or cleaving it with a ribozyme.
Antisense nucleic acids are DNA or RNA molecules that are complementary to at least a portion of a specific MRNA molecule. In the cell, they hybridize to that MRNA, forming a double stranded molecule. The cell does not translate an MRNA in this double-stranded form. Therefore, antisense nucleic acids interfere with the expression of MRNA into protein.
Antisense nucleotides or polynucleotide sequences are useful in preventing or diminishing the expression of tlie p-Hyde gene, as will be appreciated by those skilled the art. For example, polynucleotide vectors containing all or a portion of the p-Hyde gene or other sequences from the p-Hyde region (particularly those flanking the p-Hyde gene) may be placed under the control of a promoter in an antisense orientation and introduced into a cell Expression of such an antisense construct within a cell will interfere with p-Hyde transcription and/or translation and/or replication. Oligomers of about fifteen nucleotides and molecules that hybridize to the AUG initiation codon are particularly efficient, since they are easy to synthesize and are likely to pose fewer problems than larger molecules upon introduction to cells.
This invention provides a transgenic nonhuman mammal which comprises at least a portion of the isolated DNA molecule uitroduced into the mammal at an embryonic stage. Methods of producing a transgenic nonhuman mammal are known to those skilled in the art. This invention provides a polypeptide comprising the ammo acid sequence of a human p-Hyde In one embodiment the amino acid sequence is set forth in SEQ ID NOs. 2, 4, 6 or 8 This invention provides a fusion protein or chimeric comprising the polypeptide. This invention provides an antibody which specifically binds to the polypeptide. In one embodiment the antibody is a monoclonal or polycional antibody.
The invention also provides p-Hyde chimeric or fusion proteins. As used herein, a p-Hyde "chimeric protein" or "fusion protein" comprises a p-Hyde polypeptide operably linked to a non-p-Hyde polypeptide. A "p-Hyde polypeptide" refers to a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence correspondmg to p-Hyde, whereas a "non-p-Hyde polypeptidell refers to a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence corresponding to a protein which is not substantially identical to the p-Hyde protein, e.g., a protein which is different from the p-Hyde protein and which is derived from the same or a different organism. Within a p-Hyde fusion protein the p-Hyde polypeptide can correspond to all or a portion of a p-Hyde protein, preferably at least one biologically active portion of a p-Hyde pioiein
00/71564
Within the fusion protein, the term "operably linked" is intended to indicate that the p-Hyde polypeptide and the non-p-Hyde polypeptide are fused in-frame to each other. The non-p-Hyde polypeptide can, be fused to the N-terminus or C-terminus of the p-Hyde polypeptide. In yet another embodiment, tlie fusion protein is an p-Hyde-immunoglobuIin fusion protehi hi which all or part of p-Hyde is fused to sequences derived from a member of the imniu oglobulin protein family. Tl e p-Hyde immunoglobulin fusion proteins of the invention can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions and administered to a subject
The present invention furtlier provides methods of preparing a polynucleotide comprising polymerizing nucleotides to yield a sequence comprised of at least eight consecutive nucleotides of the p-Hyde locus; and methods of preparing a polypeptide comprising polymerizing amino acids to yield a sequence comprising at least five amino acids encoded within the p-Hyde locus.
The present invention provides an isolated polynucleotide comprising all, or a portion of the p-Hyde locus or of a mutated p-Hyde locus. Such polynucleotides may be antisense polynucleotides. The present invention also provides a recombinant construct comprising such an isolated polynucleotide, for example, a recombinant construct suitable for expression in a transformed host cell.
Also provided by the present invention are methods of detecting a polynucleotide comprising a portion of the p-Hyde locus or its expression product in an analyte. Such methods may further comprise the step of amplifying tl e portion of the p-Hyde locus, and may further include a step of providing a set of polynucleotides which are primers for amplification of said portion of the p-Hyde locus. The method is useful for either diagnosis of the predisposition to cancer or the diagnosis or prognosis of cancer.
This invention also provides a method of producing a polypeptide encoded by isolated DNA molecule, which comprises growing the above host vector system under suitable conditions permitting production of the polypeptide and recovering the polypeptide so produced.
Furtlier, tlie isolated polypeptide encoded by the isolated DNA molecule may be linlced 5 to a second polypeptide encoded by a nucleic acid molecule to form a fusion protein by expression in a suitable host cell In one embodiment the second nucleic acid molecule encodes beta-galactosidase Other nucleic acid molecules which are used to form a fusion protein are known to those skilled in the art.
l o This invention provides an antibody which specifically binds to the polypeptide encoded by the isolated DNA molecule. In one embodiment the antibody is a monoclonal antibody. In another embodiment tlie antibody is a polycional antibody. The antibody or DNA molecule may be labelled with a detectable marker including, but not limited to: a radioactive label, or a colorimetric, a luminescent, or a fluorescent marker, or gold.
15 Radioactive labels include, but are not limited to: 3H, l4C, 32P, 33P, 35S, 36C1, 5 lCr, 57Co, 5yCo, 5 Fe, ϋY, 125I, 131L and ] 86Re. Fluorescent markers include but are not. limited to: fluorescein, rhodaπune and auramine. Colorimetric markers include, but are not limited to: biotin, and digoxigenin. Methods of producing the polycional or monoclonal antibody are known to those of ordinary skill in tlie art. 0
Further, the antibody or nucleic acid molecule complex may be detected by a second antibody which may be linked to an enzyme, such as alkaline phosphatase or horseradish peroxidase. Other enzymes which may be employed are well known to one of ordinary skill in the ait.
"Specifically binds to an antibody" or "specifically immunoreactive with", when referring to a protein or peptide, refers to a binding reaction which is determinative of the presence of the p-Hyde of tlie invention in the presence of a heterogeneous population of proteins and other biologies including viruses other than the p-Hyde. 0 Thus, under designated immunoassay conditions, the specified antibodies bind to tlie p-Hydc antigens and do not bind in a significant amount to other antigens present in the sample. Specific binding to an antibody under such conditions may require an antibody 00/71564
thai is selected for its specificity for a particular protein. For example, antibodies raised to the human p-Hyde immunogen descnbed herein can be selected to obtain antibodies specifically mimunoreactive with the p-Hyde proteins and not with other proteins. These antibodies recognize proteins homologous to the human p-Hyde protein. A variety of lm unoassay formats may be used to select antibodies specifically immunorcactive with a particular protein For example, solid-phase ELISA l munoassays are routinely used to select monoclonal antibodies specifically immuiioreactive with a protein. See Harlow and Lane [32] for a description of hnmunoassay formats and conditions that can be used to deteπnine specific lmniunoreactivity.
This invention provides a method to select specific regions on the polypeptide encoded by the isolated DNA molecule of the DNA vims to generate antibodies. The protein sequence may be detenniπed from tl e cDNA sequence. Amino acid sequences may be analyzed by methods well known to those skilled in tlie art to determine whether they produce hydrophobic or hydrophilic regions in the proteins which they build. In the case of ceil membrane proteins, hydrophobic regions are well known to form the part of the protein that is inserted into the lipid bilayεr of tlie cell membrane, while hydrophilic legions are located on the cell surface, in an aqueous envnonment. Usually, the hydrophilic regions will be more immunogenic than the hydrophobic regions. Therefore tlie hydrophilic amino acid sequences may be selected and used to generate antibodies specific to polypeptide encoded by the isolated nucleic acid molecule encoding the DNA virus. The selected peptides may be prepared using commercially available machines As an alternative, DNA, such as a cDNA or a fragment thereof, may be cloned and expressed and the resulting polypeptide recovered and used as an immunogen.
Polycional antibodies against these peptides may be produced by immunizing animals using tlie selected peptides. Monoclonal antibodies aie prepared using hybridoma technology by fusing antibody producing B cells from immunized animals with myeloma cells and selecting the resulting hybridoma cell line producing the desired antibody. Alternatively, monoclonal antibodies may be produced by in vitro techniques known to a person of ordinary skill in the art. These antibodies are useful to detect the expression of polypeptide encoded by tlie isolated DNA molecule of the DNA virus in living animals, in humans, or in biological tissues or fluids isolated from animals or humans.
The antibodies may be detectably labelled, utilizing conventional labelling techniques well-known to the art. Thus, the antibodies may be radiolabelled using, for example, radioactive isotopes such as 3H, ]2sI, 131I, and 3:>S. The antibodies may also be labelled using fluorescent labels, enzyme labels, free radical labels, or bacteriophage labels, using techniques known in the art. Typical fluorescent labels include fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, phycoerytlirin, phycocyanin, alophycocyanin, and Texas Red.
Since specific enzymes may be coupled to other molecules by covalent links, the possibility also exists that they might be used as labels for the production of tracer materials. Suitable enzymes include alkaline phosphatase, beta-galactosidase, glucose-6-plιosphate dehydrogenase, maleate dehydrogenase, and peroxidase. Two principal types of enzyme immunoassay are the enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), and the homogeneous enzyme immunoassay, also known as enzyme-multiplied immunoassay (EMIT, Syva Corporation, Palo Alto, CA). In the ELISA system, separation may be achieved, for example, by the use of antibodies coupled to a solid phase. The EMIT system depends on deactivation of the enzyme in the bracer-antibody complex; the activity can thus be measured without the need for a separation step.
Additionally, chemiluminescent compounds may be used as labels. Typical chemiluminescent compounds include luminol, isoluininόl, aromatic acridinium esters, imidazoles, acridinium salts, and oxalate esters. Similarly, bioluminescent compounds may be utilized for labelling, tlie bioluminescent compounds including luciferin, luciferase, and aequorin. Once labeled, the antibody may be employed to identify and quantify inimunologic counterparts (antibody or antigenic polypeptide) utilizing techniques well-known to the art. A description of a radioimmunoassay (RIA) may be found in Laboratory Techniques in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology [52], with particular reference to the chapter entitled "An Introduction to Radioimmune Assay and Related Techniques" by Chard, T., incorporated by reference herein. A description of general immunometric assays of various types can be found in the following U.S. Pat. Nos 4,376,1 10 (David et al.) or 4,098,876 (Piasio).
One can use immunoassays to detect for the p-Hyde gene, specific peptides, or for antibodies to tlie λάrus or peptides. A general overview of the applicable technology is in Harlow and Lane [32], incorporated by reference herein
In one embodiment, antibodies to tlie human p-Hyde can be used to detect the agent in the sample. In brief, to produce antibodies to tlie agent or peptides, the sequence being targeted is expressed in transfected cells, preferably bacterial cells, and purified. The product is injected into a mammal capable of producing antibodies. Either monoclonal or polycional antibodies (as well as any recombinant antibodies) specific for the gene product can be used in various immunoassays. Such assays include competitive immunoassays, radioimmunoassays, Western blots, ELISA, indirect im unofluorescent assays and the like. For competitive immunoassays, see Harlow and Lane [32] at pages 567-573 and 584-589.
In a further embodiment of this invention, commercial test lots suitable for use by a medical specialist may be prepared to deleπnine the presence or absence of predetermined binding activity or predetermined binding activity capability to suspected target cells. In accordance with the testing techniques discussed above, one class of such kits will contain at least the labeled polypeptide or its binding partner, for instance an antibody specific thereto, and directions, of course, depending upon the method selected, e.g., "competitive," "sandwich," "DASP" and tlie like The kits may also contain peripheral reagents such as buffers, stabilizers, etc. Monoclonal antibodies or recombinant antibodies may be obtained by various techniques familiar to those skilled in the art. Briefly, spleen cells or other lymphocytes from an animal immunized with a desired antigen are immortalized, commonly by fusion with a myeloma cell (see, Kohler and Milstein [50], incorporated herein by reference). Alternative methods of immortalization include transformation with Epstein Barr Virus, oncogenes, or retroviruses, or other methods well known in tlie art. Colonies arising from single immortalized cells are screened for production of antibodies of the desired specificity and affinity for tlie antigen, and yield of the monoclonal antibodies produced by such cells may be enhanced by various techniques, including injection into tlie peritoneal cavity of a vertebrate host. New techniques using recombinant phage antibody expression systems can also be used to generate monoclonal antibodies. See for example: McCafferty, J et al. [64]; Hoogenboom, H.R. et al. [39]; and Marks, J.D. et al. [60].
Such peptides may be produced by expressing the specific sequence in a recombinantly engineered cell such as bacteria, yeast, filamentous fungal, insect (especially employing baculoviral vectors), and mammalian cells. Those of skill in the art are knowledgeable in the numerous expression systems available for expression of herpes virus protein.
Briefly, the expression of natural or synthetic nucleic acids encoding viral protein will typically be achieved by operably linking the desired sequence or portion thereof to a promoter (which is either constitutive or inducible), and incorporated into an expression vector. The vectors are suitable for replication or integration in either prokaryotes or eukaryoies. Typical cloning vectors contain antibiotic resistance markers, genes for selection of transformants, inducible or regulatable promoter regions, and translation terminators that are useful for the expression of viral genes.
Methods for the expression of cloned genes in bacteria are also well known. In general, to obtain high level expression of a cloned gene in a prokaryotic system, it is advisable to construct expression vectors containing a strong promoter to direct mRNA transcription. The inclusion of selection markers in DNA vectors transformed in E. coh is also useful. Examples of such markers include genes specifying resistance to 00/71564
antibiotics See [81] supra, for details concerning selection markers and promoters for use in E coh Suitable eukaryote hosts may include plant cells, insect cells, mammalian cells, yeast, and filamentous fungi
The peptides derived form the nucleic acids, peptide fragments are produced by recombinant technology may be purified by standard techniques well known to those of skill in the art Recombinantly produced sequences can be directly expressed or expressed as a fusion protein The protein is then purified by a combination of cell lysis (e.g , sonication) and affinity chromatography. For fusion products, subsequent digestion of the fusion protein with an appropriate proteolytic enzyme releases tlie desired peptide.
The proteins may be purified to substantial purity by standard techniques well known in the art, including selective precipitation with such substances as ammonium sulfate, column chromatography, immunopurification methods, and others. See, for instance, Scopes, R [84], incorporated herein by reference.
This invention is directed to analogs of the isolated nucleic acid and polypeptide which comprise the amino acid sequence as set forth above The analog may have an N-iermmal methionine or an N-terminal polyhistidine optionally attached to tlie N or COOH terminus of tlie polypeptide which comprise the ammo acid sequence
In another embodiment, this invention contemplates peptide fragments of the polypeptide which result from proteolytic digestion products of the polypeptide. In another embodiment, the deπvative of the polypeptide has one or more chemical moieties attached thereto, hi another embodiment the chemical moiety is a water soluble polymer In anotlier embodiment the chemical moiety is polyethylene glycol In another embodiment the chemical moiety is mon-, di-, tπ- or tetrapegylated. In another embodiment the chemical moiety is N-terminal monopegylated.
A polypeptide "fragment," "portion" or "segment" is a stretch of amino acid residues of at least about five lo seven contiguous amino acids, often at least about seven to nine contiguous amino acids, typically at least about nine to 13 contiguous amino acids and, most preferably, at least about 20 to 30 or more contiguous amino acids.
Tlie polypeptides of tl e present invention, if soluble, may be coupled to a solid-phase support, e.g., nitrocellulose, nylon, column packing materials (e.g., Sepharose beads), magnetic beads, glass wool, plastic, metal, polymer gels, cells, or other substrates. Such supports may take the form, for example, of beads, wells, dipsticks, or membranes.
"Target region" refers to a region of the nucleic acid which is amplified and/or detected. The teπn "target sequence" refers to a sequence with which a probe or primer will form a stable hybrid under desired conditions.
Attachment of polyethylene glycol (PEG) to compounds is particularly useful because PEG has very low toxicity in mammals (Carpenter et al., 1971). For example, a PEG adduct of adenosine deaminase was approved in the United States for use in humans for the treatment of severe combined immunodeficiency syndrome. A second advantage afforded by the conjugation of PEG is that of effectively reducing the immunogenicty and antigenicity of heterologous compounds. For example, a PEG adduct of a human protein might be useful for the treatment of disease in other mammalian species without the risk of triggering a severe immune response. The compound of the present invention may be delivered in a microencapsulation device so as to reduce or prevent an host immune response against the compound or against cells which may produce the compound. The compound of the present mvention may also be delivered microencapsulated in a membrane, such as a liposome.
Numerous activated forms of PEG suitable for direct reaction with proteins have been described. Useful PEG reagents for reaction with protein amino groups include active esters of carboxylic acid or carbonate derivatives, particulaiiy those in which the leaving groups are N-hydroxysuccinimide, p-nitrophenol, imidazole or l -hydroxy-2-nitiObenzene-4-sulfonate. PEG derivatives containing maleimido or haloaceiyl groups are useful reagents for the modification of protein free sulfhydryl groups. Likewise, PEG reagents containing amino hydrazine or hydrazide groups are useful for reaction with aldehydes generated by peπodate oxidation of carbohydrate groups in proteins.
In one embodiment, the amino acid residues of tlie polypeptide described herein are preferred to be hi the "L" isomeric form. In another embodiment, the residues in the "D" lsomcric form can be substituted for any L-amino acid residue, as long as the desired functional pioperty of lectin activity is retained by the polypeptide. NH2 refers to the free amino group present at the am o terminus of a polypeptide. COOH refers to the free carboxy group present at the carboxy teimmus of a polypeptide. Abbreviations used herein are in keeping with standard polypeptide nomenclature, J Biol Chem , 243 3552-59 (1969).
It should be noted that all ammo-acid residue sequences are represented herein by formulae whose left and right orientation is in the conventional direction of a ino-teπninus to carboxy-ter inus Furthermore, it should be noted that a dash at the beginning or end of an amino acid residue sequence indicates a peptide bond to a further sequence of one or more amino-acid residues
Synthetic polypeptide, prepared using the well known techniques of solid phase, liquid phase, or peptide condensation techniques, or any combination thereof, can include natural and unnatural a o acids. Amino acids used for peptide synthesis may be standard Boc (N-amino protected N-t-butyloxycarboπyl) amino acid resin with the standard deproiecting, neutralization, coupling and wash protocols of the original solid phase procedure of Mcrrifield (1963, J Am Chem. Soc. 85:2149-2154), or the base-labile N-amino protected 9-fiuorenylmethoxycarbonyl (Fmoc) amino acids first described by Carpmo and Han (1972. j. Org Chem 37.3403-3409). Thus, polypeptide of the invention may comprise D-amino acids, a combination of D- and L-amino acids, and various "designer" amino acids (e.g. , methyl amino acids, C-methyl amino acids, and N-methyl amino acids, etc.) to convey special properties Synthetic amino acids include omithmc for lysine, fluorophenylalatiine for phenylalanine, and noiieucine for leucine or isoJeucine. Additionally, by assigning specific amino acids at specific 00/71564
coupling steps, alpha-helices, alpha turns, beta sheets, beta-rums, and cyclic peptides can be generated.
In one aspect of the invention, the peptides may compnse a special amino acid at the C-terminus which incorporates either a C02H or CONH2 side chain to simulate a free glycine or a glycine-amide group Another way to consider this special residue would be as a D or L amino acid analog with a side chain consisting of the linker or bond to the bead. In one embodiment, the pseudo-free C-terminal lesidue may be of tlie D or the L optical configuration, in another embodiment, a racenuc mixture of D and L-isomers may be used.
In an additional embodiment, pyroglutamate may be included as tlie N-terminal residue of the peptide. Although pyroglutamate is not amenable to sequence by Edman degradation, by limiting substitution to only 50% of the peptides on a given bead with N-teπninal pyroglutamate, there will remain enough non-pyroglutamate peptide on the bead for sequencing. One of ordinary skill would readily recognize that this technique could be used for sequencing of any peptide that incorporates a residue resistant to Edman degradation at the N-tenmnus. Other methods to characterize individual peptides that demonstrate desired activity are described in detail infra. Specific activity of a peptide that comprises a blocked N-terminal group, e g., pyroglutamate, when tl e particular N-terminal group is present in 50% of the peptides, would readily be demonstrated by comparing activity of a completely (100%) blocked peptide with a non-blocked (0%>) peptide
In addition, tlie present invention envisions preparing peptides that have more well defined structural properties, and the use of peptidomimetics, and peptidomimetic bonds, such as ester bonds, to prepare peptides with novel properties. In another embodiment, a peptide may be generated that incorporates a reduced peptide bond, i.e., Rι-CH2-NH-R2, where Ri and R2 are ammo acid residues or sequences. A reduced peptide bond may be introduced as a dipeptide subunit. Such a molecule would be resistant to peptide bond hydrolysis, e.g. , protease activity. Such peptides would provide ligands with unique function and activity, such as extended half-lives in vivo due to resistance to metabolic breakdown, or protease activity. Furthermore, it is well known that in certain systems constrained peptides show enhanced functional activity (Hruby, 1982, Life Sciences 31 : 189-199; Hruby et al., 1990, Biochem J. 268:249-262); the present invention provides a method to produce a constrained peptide that incorporates random sequences at al) other positions.
A constrained, cyclic or rigidized peptide may be prepared synthetically, provided that in at least two positions in the sequence of the peptide an amino acid or amino acid analog is inserted that provides a chemical functional group capable of cross-linking to constrain, cyclise or rigidize the peptide after treatenenl to form the cross-link. Cyclization will be favored when a turn-inducing amino acid is incorporated. Examples of a ino acids capable of cross-linking a peptide are cysteine to form disulfide, aspartic acid to form a lactone or a lactase, and a chelator such as carboxyl-glutarnic acid (Gla) (Bachem) to chelate a transition metal and form a cross-link. Protected carboxyl glutamic acid may be prepared by modifying the synthesis described by Zee-Cheng and Olson (1980, Biophys. Biochem. Res. Commun. 94: 1 128-11 32). A peptide in which the peptide sequence comprises at least two amino acids capable of cross-linking may be treated, e.g. , by oxidation of cysteine residues to form a disulfide or addition of a metal ion to form a chelate, so as to cross-link the peptide and form a constrained, cyclic or rigidized peptide.
The present invention provides sttategies to systematically prepare cross-links. For example, if four cysteine residues are incorporated in the peptide sequence, different protecting groups may be used (Hiskey, 1981, in The Peptides: Analysis, Synthesis, Biology. Vol. 3, Gross and Meienliofer, eds., Academic Press: New York, pp. 137-167; Ponsanti et aL, 1990, Tetrahedron 46:8255-8266). The first pah of cysteine may be deprotected and oxidized, then the second set may be deprotected and oxidized. In this way a defined set of disulfide cross-links may be foπned. Alternatively, a pah of cysteine and a pair of collating amino acid analogs may be incorporated so that the cross-links are of a different chemical nature. The following non-classical amino acids may be incorporated in the peptide in order to introduce particular conformational motifs: l,2,3.4-tetrahydroisoquinohne-3-carboxylate (Kazmierski et al., 1991 , J Am. Chem Soc. 1 13 :2275-2283), (2S,3S)-methyl-phenylalanine, (2S,3R)-metlιyI-phenylalanine) (2R,3S)-methyl-phenylalanine and (2R,3R)-methyl-phenylaIanine (Kazmierski and Hruby, 1991, Tetrahedron Lett.); 2-aininotetrahydronaphthalene-2-carboxylic acid (Landis, 1989. Ph.D Thesis, University of Arizona), hydroxy- 1 ,2, 3, 4-tctrahydroisoquhιoline-3-carboxylatc (Miyake et al., 1989, J. Takeda Res. Labs. 43 :53-76), ? -carboline (D and L) (Kazmierski, 1988, Ph.D. Thesis, University of Arizona); HIC (histidine lsoqu ohne carboxylic acid) (Zechel et al., 1991 , Int. J Pep. Protein Res. 43); and HIC (histidine cyclic urea) (Dharanipragada).
The following ammo acid analogs and peplidominielics may be incorporated into a peptide to induce or favor specific secondary structures: LL-Acp
(LL-3-ammo-2-propenidone-6-carboxylic acid), a dipeptide analog (Kemp et al., 1985,
J. Org. Chem. 50:5834-5838); and analogs provided by the following references: Nagai and Sato, 1985, Tetrahedron Lett. 26:647-650; DiMaio et al., 1989, J. Chem. Soc. Perkin
Trans p. 1687; also a Gly-Ala turn analog (Kahn et al , 1989, Tetrahedron Lett. 30:2317), amide bond isostere (Jones et al., 1988, Tetrahedron Lett. 29:3853-3856); u-etrazol (Zabroclα ct al., 1988, J. Am Chem. Soc. 1 10:5875-5880), DTC (Samanen et al , 1 90, Int. J. Protein Pep. Res. 35:501 :509); and analogs taught in Olson et al., 1990,
J Am Chem. Sci 1 12.323-333 and Garvey et al., 1990. J. Org Chem. 56:436.
Conformationally restricted mimetics of beta turns and beta bulges, and peptides containing them, are described in U.S. Patent No. 5,440,013, issued August 8, 1995 to
Kahn
The present invention further provides for modification or derivatization of the polypeptide or peptide of the invention. Modifications of peptides are well known to one of ordinary skill, and include phosphorylation, carboxymethylation, and acylation. Modifications may be effected by chemical or enzymatic means. In another aspect, glycosylaled or fatty acylated peptide derivatives may be prepared. Preparation of O 00/71564
glycosylated or fatty acylated peptides is well Icnown in the art. Fatty acyl peptide derivatives may also be prepared. For example, and not by way of limitation, a free amino group (N-terminal or lysyl) may be acylated, e.g. , myristoylated. In another embodiment an amino acid comprising an aliphatic side chain of the structure -(CH2)nCH3 may be incorporated in tlie peptide. This and other peptide-fatty acid conjugates suitable for use in the present invention are disclosed in U.K. Patent GB-8809162.4, International Patent Application PCT/AU89/001 6, and reference 5, supra.
In accordance with the present invention there may be employed conventional molecular biology, microbiology, and recombinant DNA techniques within the skill of the art. Such techniques are explained fully in the literature. See, e.g., Sambrook et al, "Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual" (1989); "Current Protocols in Molecular Biology" Volumes Mil [Ausubel, R. M., ed. (1994)]; "Cell Biology: A Laboratory Handbook" Volumes I-III [J. E. Celis, ed. (1994))]; "Current Protocols in Immunology" Volumes I-III [Coligan, J. E., ed. (1994)]; "Oligonucleotide Synthesis" (M.J Gait ed. 1984); "Nucleic Acid Hybridization" [B.D. Ha es & S.J. Higgins eds. (1985)]; "Transcription And Translation" [B.D. Hames & S.J. Higgins, eds. (1984)]; "Animal Cell Culture" [R.L Freshney, ed. (1986)]; "Immobilized Cells And Enzymes" [IRL Press, (1986)]; B. Perbal, "A Practical Guide To Molecular Cloning" (1984).
Chemical Moieties For Derivatization. Chemical moieties suitable for derivatization may be selected from among water soluble polymers. The polymer selected should be water soluble so that the component to which it is attached does not precipitate in an aqueous environment, such as a physiological environment. Preferably, for therapeutic use of the end-product preparation, the polymer will be pharmaceutically acceptable. One skilled in the ait will be able to select the desired polymer based on such considerations as whether the polymer/component conjugate will be used therapeutically, and if so, the desired dosage, circulation time, resistance to proteolysis, and other considerations. For the present component or components, these may be ascertained using the assays provided herein. O 00/71564
The water soluble polymer may be selected from tlie group consisting of, for example, polyethylene glycol, copolymers of etliylene glycol/propylene glycol, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, poly-1 , 3-dioxolane, poly-1 , 3, -trioxane, ethylene/maleic anliydride copolyroer, polyamino cids (either homopolymers or random copolymers), and dextran or poly(n-vinyl pyrrolidone)polyεthyiene glycol, propropylene glycol homopolymers, prolypropylene oxide/ethyl ene oxide co- polymers, polyoxyethylated polyols and polyvinyl alcohol. Polyethylene glycol propionaldenhyde may have advantages in manufacturing due to its stability in water.
The number of polymer molecules so attached may vary, and one skilled in the art will be able to ascertain the effect on function. One may mono-derivatize, or may provide for a di-, tri-, tetra- or some combination of derivatization, with the same or different chemical moieties (e g. , polymers, such as different weights of polyethylene giycols). The proportion of polymer molecules to component or components molecules will vary, as will their concentrations in the reaction mixture. In general, the optimum ratio (in tenns of efficiency of reaction in that there is no excess unreacted component or components and polymer) will be deteπnined by factors such as the desired degree of derivatization (e.g., mono, di-, tri-, etc.), the molecular weight of the polymer selected, whether the polymer is branched or unbranched, and the reaction conditions.
This mvention provides a method for determining whether a subject carries a mutation in the p-Hyde gene which comprises- a) obtaining an appropriate nucleic acid sample from the subject; and(b) deteπnining whether the nucleic acid sample from step (a) is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde so as to thereby determine whether a subject carries a mutation in the p-Hyde gene. In one embodiment, the nucleic acid sample in step (a) comprises mRNA coπesponding to the transcript of DNA encoding a mutant p-Hyde, and wherein the determining of step (b) comprises: (i) contacting the mRNA with the oligonucleotide under conditions permitting binding of tlie mRNA to the oligonucleotide so as to fonn a complex; (ii) isolathig the complex so formed; and (iii) identifying the mRNA in the isolated complex so as to thereby determine whether the mRNA is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes O 00/71564
mutant p-Hyde. h another embodiment, the determining of step (b) comprises: i) contacting the nucleic acid sample of step (a), and the isolated nucleic acid with restriction enzymes under conditions permitting the digestion of tl e nucleic acid sample, and the isolated nucleic acid mto distinct, distinguishable pieces of nucleic acid; (ii) isolating the pieces of nucleic acid; and (iii) comparing the pieces of nucleic acid deπved from the nucleic acid sample with the pieces of nucleic acid derived from the isolated nucleic acid so as to thereby determine whether the nucleic acid sample is, or is deπved from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-FIyde.
The present invention further provides methods of preparing a polynucleotide comprising polymerizing nucleotides to yield a sequence comprised of at least eight consecutive nucleotides of the p-Hyde gene, and methods of preparing a polypeptide comprising polymerizing amino acids to yield a sequence comprising at least five amino acids encoded within the p-Hyde gene.
This invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising an amount of tlie polypeptide and a pharmaceutically effective carrier or diluent
This invention provides a method for determining whether a subject carries a mutation m the p-Hyde gene which comprises, (a) obtaining an appropriate nucleic acid sample from the subject; and (b) determining whether the nucleic acid sample from step (a) is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde so as to thereby determine whether a subject carries a mutation in the p-Hyde gene, h one embodiment the nucleic acid sample in step (a) comprises mRNA corresponding to the transcript of DNA encoding a mutant p-Hyde, and wherem the determining of step (b) comprises: (i) contacting the mRNA with the oligonucleotide under conditions permitting binding of the mRNA to the oligonucleotide so as to form a complex, (ii) isolating the complex so formed; and (iii) identifying the mRNA in the isolated complex so as to thereby determine whether the mRNA is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde. In anotlier embodiment the determining of step (b) comprises1 (i) contacting the nucleic acid sample of step (a), and the isolated nucleic acid of claim 1 with restriction enzymes under conditions permitting the digestion of the nucleic acid O 00/71564
sample, and the isolated nucleic acid into distinct, distinguishable pieces of nucleic acid; (ii) isolating tlie pieces of nucleic acid; and (iii) comparing the pieces of nucleic acid derived from the nucleic acid sample with the pieces of nucleic acid derived from the isolated nucleic acid so as to thereby determine whether the nucleic acid sample is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde.
Detection of point mutations or variations may be accomplished by molecular cloning of tlie p-Hyde allele(s) and sequencing tlie allele(s) using techniques well known in the art. Alternatively, the gene sequences can be amplified directly from a genomic DNA preparation from the tumor tissue, using known techniques. The DNA sequence of the amplified sequences can then be determined. There are six well known methods for a more complete, yet still indirect, test for confirming the presence of a susceptibility allele: 1) single stranded confoπnation analysis (SSCA) (Orita et al., 1989); 2) denaturing gradient gel electrophoresis (DGGE) (Wartell et al., 1990; Sheffield et al., 1989); 3) RNase protection assays (Finkelstein et al„ 1990; Kinszler et al, 1991); 4) ailele-specific oligonucleotides (ASOs) (Conner et al., 1983); 5) the use of proteins which recognize nucleotide mismatches, such as the E. coli mutS protein (Modrich, 1991 ); and 6) ailele-specific PCR (Rano & Kidd, 198.9). For ailele-specific PCR, primers are used which hybridize at their 3' ends to a particular p-Hyde mutation. If the particular p-Hyde mutation is not present, an amplification product is not observed. Amplification Refractory Mutation System (ARMS) can also be used, is disclosed in European Patent Application Publication No. 0332435 and in Newton et al., 1989. Insertions and deletions of genes can also be detected by cloning, sequencing and amplification. In addition, restriction fragment length polymorphism (RFLP) probes for the gene or surrounding marker genes can be used to score alteration of an allele or an insertion in a polymorphic fragment. Such a method is particularly useful for screening relatives of an affected individual for the presence of the p-Hyde mutation found in that individual. Other techniques for detecting insertions and deletions as Icnown in the art can be used.
In similar fashion, DNA probes can be used to detect mismatches, through enzymatic or chemical cleavage. See, e.g., Cotton et al., 1988; Shenk et al., 1975; Novack et al., O 00/71564
1986. Alternatively, mismatches can be detected by shifts in the electrophoretic mobility of mismatched duplexes relative to matched duplexes. See, e.g., Caxiello, 1988. With either riboprobes or DNA probes, tlie cellular mRNA or DNA which might contain a mutation can be amplified using PCR (see below) before hybridization. Changes in DNA of the p-Hyde gene can also be detected using Southern hybridization, especially if the changes are gross rearrangements, such as deletions and insertions.
As noted above, non-PCR based screening assays are also contemplated in this invention This procedure hybridizes a nucleic acid probe (or an analog such as a methyl phosphonate backbone replacing the normal phosphodiester), to the low level DNA target. This probe may have an enzyme covalently linked to tlie probe, such that the covalent linkage does not interfere with tlie specificity of the hybridization. This enzyme-probe-conjugate-target nucleic acid complex can then be isolated away from the free probe enzyme conjugate and a substrate is added for enzyme detection. Enzymatic activity is observed as a change in color development or luminescent output resulting in a 10 sup 3 -10 sup 6 increase in sensitivity. For an example relating to the preparation of oligodeoxynucleotide-alkaline phosphatase conjugates and their use as hybridization probes see Jablonski et al., 1986.
Two-step label amplification methodologies are known in the art. These assays work on the principle that a small ligand (such as digoxigcnin, biotin, or the like) is attached to a nucleic acid probe capable of specifically binding p-Hyde. Allele specific probes are also contemplated within the scope of this example. In one example, the small ligand attached to the nucleic acid probe is specifically recognized by an antibody-enzyme conjugate. In one embodiment of this example, digoxigerun is attached to the nucleic acid probe. Hybridization is detected by an antibody-alkaline phosphatase conjugate which turns over a chemiluminescent substrate. For methods for labeling nucleic acid probes according to this embodiment see Martin et al. , 1990.
In a second example, the small ligand is recognized by a second Iigand-enzyme conjugate that is capable of specifically complexing to the first ligand. A well known embodiment of this example is the biotin-avidin type of interactions. For methods for 00/71564
labeling nucleic acid probes and their use in biotin-avidin based assays see Rigby et al., 1977 and Nguyen et al., 1992.
It is also contemplated within- the scope of this invention that the nucleic acid probe assays of this invention will employ a cocktail of nucJeic acid probes capable of detecting p-Hyde. Thus, in one example to detect the presence of p-Hyde in a cell sample, more than one probe complementary to p-Hyde is employed and in particular the number of different probes is alternatively 2, 3, or 5 different nucleic acid probe sequences. In another example, to detect the presence of mutations in the p-Hyde gene sequence in a patient, more than one probe complementary to p-Hyde is employed where the cocktail includes probes capable of patients with alternate-specific mutations identified in populations of patients with alterations in p-Hyde. In this embodiment, any number of probes can be used, and will preferably include probes corresponding to the major gene mutations identified as predisposing an individual to breast cancer.
This invention provides a method for screening a tumor sample from a human subject for a somatic alteration in a p-Hyde gene in said tumor which comprises gene comparing a first sequence selected form the group consisting of a p-Hyde gene from said tumor sample, p-Hyde RNA from said tumor sample and p-Hyde cDNA made from mRNA from said tumor sample with a second sequence selected from the group consisting of p-Hyde gene from a nontumor sample of said subject, p-Hyde RNA from said nontumor sample and p-Hyde cDNA made from mRNA from said nontumor sample, wherein a difference in the sequence of the p-Hyde gene,p-Hyde RNA or p-Hyde cDNA from said tumor sample from the sequence of the p-Hyde gene, p-Hyde RNA or p-Hyde cDNA from said nontumor sample indicates a somatic alteration in the p-Hyde gene in said tumor sample.
This invention provides a method for screening a tumor sample from a human subject for the presence of a somatic alteration in a p-Hyde gene in said tumor which comprises comparing p-Hyde polypeptide from said rumor sample from said subject to p-Hyde polypeptide from a nontumor sample from said subject to analyze for a difference between the polypeptides, wherein said comparing is performed by (i) detecting either a full length polypeptide or a truncated polypeptide in each sample or (ii) contacting an antibody which specifically binds to either an epitope of an altered p-Hyde polypeptide or an epitope of a wild-type p-Hyde polypeptide to the p-Hyde polypeptide from each sample and detecting antibody binding, wherein a difference between the p-Hyde polypeptide from said tumor sample from the p-Hyde polypeptide from said nontumor sample indicates the presence of a somatic alteration in the p-Hyde gene in said tumor sample.
This invention is particularly useful for screening compounds by using the p-Hyde polypeptide or binding fragment thereof in any of a variety of drug screening techniques. The p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment employed in such a test may either be free in solution, affixed to a solid support, or borne on a cell surface. One method of drug screening utilizes eucaryotic or procaryotic host cells which are stably transformed with recombinant polynucleotides expressing tlie polypeptide or fragment, preferably in competitive binding assays. Such cells, either in viable or fixed form, can be used for standard binding assays. One may measure, for example, for the formation of complexes between a p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment and the agent being tested, or examine the degree to which tlie formation of a complex between a p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment and a Icnown ligand is interfered with by the agent being tested.
Thus, the present invention provides methods of screening for drugs comprising contacting such an agent with a p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment thereof and assaying (i) for the presence of a complex between the agent and the p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment, or (ii) for the presence of a complex between the p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment and a ligand, by methods well Icnown in the art. In such competitive binding assays the p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment is typically labeled. Free p-Hyde polypeptide or fragment is separated from that present in a proteimprotein complex, and the amount of free (i.e., uncomplexed) label is a measure of the binding of the agent being tested to p-Hyde or its interference with p-Hyde :ligand binding, respectively. Anotlier technique for drug screening provides high throughput screening for compounds having suitable binding affinity to the p-Hyde polypeptides and is described in detail in Geysen, PCT published application WO 84/03564, published on Sep. 13, 1984. Briefly stated, large numbers of different small peptide test compounds are synthesized on a solid substrate, such as plastic pins or some other surface. The peptide test compounds are reacted with p-Hyde polypeptide and washed. Bound p-Hyde polypeptide is then detected by methods well known in the art.
Purified p-Hyde can be coated directly onto plates for use in the aforementioned drug screening techniques. However, non-neutralizing antibodies to the polypeptide can be used to capture antibodies to immobilize the p-Hyde polypeptide on the solid phase. This invention also contemplates the use of competitive drug screening assays in which neutralizing antibodies capable of specifically binding the p-Hyde polypeptide compete with a test compound for binding to the p-Hyde polypeptide or fragments thereof. In this manner, the antibodies can be used to detect the presence of any peptide which shares one or more antigenic determinants of the p-Hyde polypeptide.
A further technique for drug screening involves the use of host eukaryotic cell lines or cells (such as described above) which have a nonfunctional p-Hyde gene. These host cell lines or cells are defective at the p-Hyde polypeptide level. The host cell lines or cells are grown in the presence of drug compound. The rate of growth of the host cells is measured to determine if the compound is capable of regulating the growth of p-Hyde defective cells.
The goal of rational drug design is to produce structural analogs of biologically active polypeptides of interest or of small molecules with which they interact (e.g., agonists, antagonists, inhibitors) in order to fashion drags which are, for example, more active or stable forms of the polypeptide, or which, e.g., enhance or interfere with the function of a polypeptide in vivo. See, e.g., Hodgson, 1991. In one approach, one first determines tlie three-dimensional structure of a protein of interest (e.g., p-Hyde polypeptide) or, for example, of the p-Hyde-receptor or ligand complex, by x-ray 00/71564
crystallography, by computer modeling or most typically, by , combination of approaches. Less often, useful information regarding the structure of a polypeptide may be gained by modeling based on the structure of homologous proteins. An example of rational drug design is the development of HIV protease inhibitors (Erickson et aL, 1990). In addition, peptides (e.g., p-Hyde polypeptide) are analyzed by an alanine scan (Wells, 1991). In this technique, an amino acid residue is replaced by Ala, and its effect O the peptide's activity is determined. Each of the amino acid residues of the peptide is analyzed in this manner to determine the important regions of the peptide.
It is also possible to isolate a target-specific antibody, selected by a functional assay, and then to solve its crystal structure. In principle, this approach yields a pharmacore upon which subsequent drug design can be based. It is possible to bypass protein crystallography altogether by generating anti-idiotypic antibodies (anti-ids) to a functional, pharmacologically active antibody. As a mirror image of a mirror image, the binding site of the anti-ids would be expected to be an analog of the original receptor. The anti-id could then be used to identify and isolate peptides from banks of chemically or biologically produced banks of peptides. Selected peptides would then act as tl e pharmacore.
Thus, one may design drugs which have, e.g., improved p-Hyde polypeptide activity or stability or which act as inhibitors, agonists, antagonists, etc. of p-Hyde polypeptide activity. By virtue of the availability of cloned p-Hyde sequences, sufficient amounts of the p-Hyde polypeptide may be made available to perform such analytical studies as x-ray crystallography. In addition, the knowledge of the p-Hyde protein sequence provided herein will guide those employing computer modeling techniques in place of, or in addition to x-ray crystallography.
This invention provides a method for identifying a chemical compound which is capable inducing susceptibility to cell death which comprises: (a) contacting the p-Hyde with a chemical compound under conditions permitting binding between the p-Hyde and the chemical compound;(b) detecting specific binding of the chemical compound to the p-Hyde; and (c) determining whether the chemical compound inhibits the p-Hyde so as to identify a chemical compound which is capable of capable inducing susceptibility to cell death. Useful diagnostic techniques include, but are not limited to fluorescent in situ hybridization (FISH), direct DNA sequencing, PFGE analysis, Southern blot analysis, single stranded conformation analysis (SSCA), Rnase protection assay, ailele-specific oligonucleotide (ASO), dot blot analysis and PCR-SSCP, as discussed in detail further below.
A rapid preliminary analysis to detect polymorphisms in DNA sequences can be performed by looking at a series of Southern blots of DNA cut with one or more restriction enzymes, preferably with a large number of restriction enzymes. Each blot contains a series of normal individuals and a series of tumors. Southern blots displaying hybridizing fragments (differing in length from control DNA when probed with sequences near or including the p-Hyde gene) indicate a possible mutation. If restriction enzymes which produce very large restriction fragments are used, then pulsed field gel electrophoresis (PFGE) is employed.
Detection of point mutations may be accomplished by molecular cloning of the p-Hyde allele(s) and sequencing the allele(s) using techniques well known tn the art. Alternatively, the gene sequences can be amplified directly from a genomic DNA preparation from the tumor tissue, using known techniques. The DNA sequence of the amplified sequences can then be deteπnined. There are six well known methods for a more complete, yet still indirect, test for confirming the presence of a susceptibility allele: 1 ) single stranded conformation analysis (SSCA) (Orita et al., 1989); 2) denaturing gradient gel electrophoresis (DGGE) (Wartell et al., 1990; Sheffield et al., 1989); 3) RNase protection assays (Finkelstein et al., 1990; Kinszleret al., 1991); 4) ailele-specific oligonucleotides (ASOs) (Conner et al., 1983); 5) the use of proteins which recognize nucleotide mismatches, such as the E. coli mutS protein (Modrich, 1991); and 6) ailele-specific PCR (Ratio & Kidd, 1989). For ailele-specific PCR, primers are used which hybridize at their 3' ends to a particular p-Hyde mutation. If the particular p-Hyde mutation is not present, an amplification product is not observed. Amplification Refractory Mutation System (ARMS) can also be used, as disclosed in European Patent Application Publication No. 0332435 and in Newton et al., 1989. Insertions and deletions of genes can also be detected by cloning, sequencing and amplification. In addition, restriction fragment length polymorphism (RFLP) probes for the gene or surrounding marker genes can be used to score alteration of an allele or an insertion in a polymorphic fragment. Such a method is particularly useful for screening relatives of an affected individual for the presence of the p-Hyde mutation found in that individual. Other techniques for detecting insertions and deletions as known in the art can be used.
In similar fashion, DNA probes can be used to detect mismatches, through enzymatic or chemical cleavage. See, e.g., Cotton et al., 1988; Shenk et aL, 1975; Novack et al., 1986. Alternatively, mismatches can be detected by shifts in the electrophoretic mobility of mismatched duplexes relative to matched duplexes. See, e.g., Cariello, 1988. With either riboprobes or DNA probes, the cellular mRNA or DNA which might contain a mutation can be amplified using PCR (see below) before hybridization. Changes in DNA of the p-Hyde gene can also be detected using Southern hybridization, especially if the changes are gross rearrangements, such as deletions and insertions.
DNA sequences of the p-Hyde gene which have been amplified by use of PCR may also be screened using ailele-specific probes. These probes are nucleic acid oligomers, each of which contains a region of the p-Hyde gene sequence harboring a known mutation. For example, one oligomer may be about 30 nucleotides in length, corresponding to a portion of the p-Hyde gene sequence. By use of a battery of such ailele-specific probes, PCR amplification products can be screened to identify the presence of a previously identified mutation in the p-Hyde gene. Hybridization of ailele-specific probes with amplified p-Hyde sequences can be performed, for example, on a nylon filter. Hybridization to a particular probe under stringent hybridization conditions indicates the presence of the same mutation in the tumor tissue as in the ailele-specific probe.
Alteration of p-Hyde mRNA expression can be detected by any techniques known in the art. These include Northern blot analysis, PCR amplification and RNase protection. Diminished mRNA expression indicates an alteration of the wild-type p-Hyde gene. 00/7156
Alteration of wild-type p-Hyde genes can also be detected by screening for alteration of wild-type p-Hyde protein. For example, monoclonal antibodies immunoreactive with p-Hyde can be used to screen a tissue. Lack of cognate antigen would indicate a p-Hyde mutation. Antibodies specific for products of mutant alleles could also be used to detect mutant p-Hyde gene product. Such immunological assays can be done in any convenient formats Icnown in the art. These include Western blots, immiinohistochemical assays and ELISA assays. Any means for detecting an altered p-Hyde protein can be used to detect alteration of wild-type p-Hyde genes. Functional assays, such as protein binding determinations, can be used. In addition, assays can be used which detect p-Hyde biochemical function. Finding a mutant p-Hyde gene product indicates alteration of a wild-type p-Hyde gene. Mutant p-Hyde genes or gene products can also be detected in other human body samples, such as serum, stool, urine and sputum.
The present invention also provides for fusion polypeptides, comprising p-Hyde polypeptides and fragments. Homologous polypeptides may be fusions between two or more p-Hyde polypeptide sequences or between the sequences of p-Hyde and a related protein. Likewise, heterologous fusions may be constructed which would exhibit a combination of properties or activities of tlie derivative proteins. For example, ligand-binding or other domains may be "swapped" between different new fusion polypeptides or fragments. Such homologous or heterologous fusion polypeptides may display, for example, altered strength or specificity of binding. Fusion partners include immunoglobulins, bacterial beta -galactosidase, trpE, protein A, beta -lactamase, alpha amylase, alcohol dehydrogenase and yeast alpha mating factor. See, e.g., Godowski et al. , 1988. Fusion proteins will typically be made by either recombinant nucleic acid methods, as described below, or may be chemically synthesized. Techniques for the synthesis of polypeptides are described, for example, in Merrifield, 1963.
Probes for p-Hyde alleles may be derived from tlie sequences of the p-Hyde region or its cDNAs. The probes may be of any suitable length, which span all or a portion of the p-Hyde region, and which allow specific hybridization to the p-Hyde region. If the target sequence contains a sequence identical to that of the probe, the probes may be short, e.g., in the range of about 8-30 base pairs, since tl e hybrid will be relatively stable under even stringent conditions. If some degree of mismatch is expected with the probe, i.e., if it is suspected that the probe will hybridize to a variant region, a longer probe may be employed which hybridizes to tlie target sequence with the requisite specificity.
The probes will include an isolated polynucleotide attached to a label or reporter molecule and may be used to isolate other polynucleotide sequences, having sequence similarity by standard methods. For techniques for preparing and labeling probes see, e.g., Sambrook et al. , 1989 or Ausubel et al., 1992.
Probes comprising synthetic oligonucleotides or other polynucleotides of the present invention may be derived from naturally occurring or recombinant single- or double-stranded polynucleotides, or be chemically synthesized. Probes may also be labeled by nick translation, Klenow fill-in reaction, or other methods known in the art.
Portions of tl e polynucleotide sequence having at least about eight nucleotides, usually at least about 15 nucleotides, and fewer than about 6 kb, usually fewer than about 1.0 kb, from a polynucleotide sequence encoding p-Hyde are preferred as probes. Tlie probes may also be used to determine whether mRNA encoding p-Hyde is present in a cell or tissue.
This invention provides a method of inhibiting the growth of cancer cells, comprising the steps of obtaining the cells and contacting the cells of tlie subject with a replication-deficient adenovirus type 5 expression vector comprising an adenovirus genome having a deletion in the El and E3 region of the genome and an insertion within the region of a nucleic acid encoding p-Hyde under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter, thereby inhibiting the growth of the prostate cancer cells.
This invention provides a method of inhibiting the growth a prostate cancer cells, comprising: 1) obtaining a sample of prostate cells from a subject; 2) contacting the cells with a replication deficient adenovirus type 5 expression vector which comprises an adenovirus genome having a deletion in the El and E3 regions of the genome and an insertion within the regions of a p-Hyde cDNA under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter; and 3) introducing the cells into the subject, thereby inhibiting the growth of the cancer cells.
This invention provides a method of suppressing the growth of cancer cells in a subject, comprising introducing into tlie cancer cell an amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein, thereby suppressing the growth of cancer cells in the subject.
This invention provides a method of suppressing growth of cancer cells in a subject, comprising administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby suppressing the growth of cancer cells in the subject.
As demonstrated herein apoptotic response was assessed using DNA laddering assay. DNAs were extracted after the respective treatment (24 hours with 1 mM Hydroxyurea followed by 24 hours with 0.1 mM 5'-dFUrd) and analyzed on 1.6% agarose gel electrophoresis. In agreement with cell cycle analyses, apoptotic response of the stable transfectants ATI -HI and AT3-H1 (pcHYDE transfected AT-1 and AT-3) are consistently and significantly higher relative to both parental (AT-1 and AT-3) and pcDNA-transfected parental cell lines (ATI -pel and AT3-pcl). In particular, the highest apoptotic response occurred hi synchronized culture under the induction with 0.1 mM 5'-dFUrd as shown in Fig.15. The enhanced apoptotic response in AT1-H1 and AT3-H1 transfectant after hydroxyurea treatment is the result of "thymineless death" (Kyprianou, 1994, Kyprianou et al., 1994) leading to depletion of intracellular thymidJne-5-triphosρhate (TTP) pools through indirect inhibition of thymidylate synthetase by fluorodeoxyuridine. However, the exact mechanism of the apoptosis itself in association with TTP depletion is not Icnown. Taken together, these data suggest that the apoptotic response in the pcHYDE stable trausfectants is likely due to the downstream effect of pcHYDE gene product.
This invention provides a method of inducing susceptibility to apoptosis of cancer cells, comprising introducing into the cancer cell an amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein, thereby inducing susceptibility to apoptosis.
This invention provides a method of inducing susceptibility to apoptosis of cancer cells in a subject, comprising administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby inducing susceptibility to apoptosis.
As demonstrated herein, p-Hyde suppresses cancer growth in vivo. The lowest level of p-Hyde expression was observed in AT3 cell line as shown in Fig. 9 . For this reason, AT3 cell line was transfected with pcHYDE, a construct of p-Hyde in mammalian expression vector of ρcDNA3.1(-) under G418 selection. As negative control, AT-3 cell line was also transfected with the vector only and the stable transfectants obtained was designated as AT3-pc. The tumor growth of the parental cell line of AT-3 and in stable transfectaπt AT3-H1 and AT3-H2 have been evaluated in vivo. One million cells of each cell lines in 0.3 ml of Hanks solution were inoculated subcutaneously in each flank of inbred male Copenhagen rat. In this initial experiment, three groups of each five rats were injected with each cell line. The size of tumors were scored after a thne schedule shown in Fig.18. These preliminary results indicated that both AT3-H1 and AT3-H2 stable transfectant grew significantly slower than the AT-3 parental cell line demonstrating that the tumor growth regression in both stable transfectants and regulated by the pcHYDE gene product.
Interestingly, p-Hyde l as the dual ability to act like a tumor suppressor gene and induce susceptibility to apoptosis by what may be p53 independent pathways. The growth of prostate tumors in rats was greatly inhibited by p-Hyde. Moreover, prostate cancer cells expressing p-Hyde were more sensitive to UV DNA damage driving these cells into cell programmed death. Analysis of DNA repair enzyme activity suggests a defect resulting in the presence of intact (6-4) PP and decreased cell survival by colony forming assay. However, the capacity of p-Hyde to induce susceptibility to apoptosis is not limited to UV DNA damage. Chemotherapy agent, Fluorodeoxyuridine, a pyrimidine antimetabolite which is related to fluorouraciJ (5-FU) and has been used for treatment of a wide variety of human epithelial malignancies, also more readily induces apoptosis in prostate cancer cell expressing p-Hyde. Moreover, cancer cells expressing p-Hyde are also more susceptible to gamma radiation. Thus, the mechanisms of cellular DNA injury are different for UV, gamma radiation, and Fluorodeoxyuridine suggesting that the ability to make cells more susceptible to apoptosis is more global in action. This unique function of p-Hyde may represent a new class genes that induce susceptibility to apoptosis. This is different than tlie function ascribed to tumor suppressor genes like p53 which directly induces apoptosis, not sensitivity to apoptosis (Yonish-Rouach et al., 1991). Moreover, p-Hyde activity is in contrast to bcl-2 where the absence of bc -2, not the presence of, makes the cancer cell more susceptible to cell programmed death (McDormellet aL, 1992).
This invention provides a method of suppressing cancer cells, comprising hitroducing into the cancer cell an amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein, thereby inducing susceptibility to apoptosis.
This invention provides a method of suppressing cancer cells a subject, comprising administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby suppressing cancer cells.
This invention provides a method of treating a subject with cancer which comprises administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protehi, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or tl e nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby treating tlie subject with cancer.
This invention provides a method of treating a subject with cancer, comprising: 1) administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein in combination with radiation, chemotherapy, or UV mimetic drugs; and 2) a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby treating the subject with cancer.
The unique functional features of the p-Hyde gene may be exploited for the treatment of hyperproliferative disorders and cancer. One effective therapeutic strategy, for example, may be tlie treatment of carcinoma cells expressing p-Hyde with chemotherapy agents or UV mimetic drugs (such as acetylaminofluorine). However, cancer cells are not likely to produce significant levels of the growth inhibition p-Hyde. Consequently, the p-Hyde gene my be introduced into cancer cells by gene therapy. Tumors transduced with vectors containing p-Hyde may not only be directly suppressed by p-Hyde as demonstrated in this study, but also when treated in combination with DNA damaging therapy such as chemotherapy, UV mimetic drugs, or radiation, have even a greater anti -cancer effect. Since gene therapy will target cancer cells, then enhancement of apoptosis will occur more selectively in cancer cells following DNA damage (UV, radiation, or chemotherapy).
Three DNA enzyme repair systems were evaluated in parental compared to p-Hyde transfected cells: uridine phosphorylase, uridine kinase, and UV damage repair. UV damage repair was impaired in the p-Hyde transfected cells. Figure 16 shows that decreased DNA repair activity results in higher levels of intact photoproducts (64PP). Consistent with these data, pHyde transfected cells also had a significant reduction in survival following UV exposure compared to parental AT3 cells as determined by colony formation assay. Thus, DNA repair enzyme impairment correlated with shorter survival and induction of apoptosis in prostate cancer cells transfected with p-Hyde .
This invention a method of treating a subject with cancer, comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising 1 ) an adenovirus type 5 expression vector which comprises an adenovirus genome having a deletion h the El and E3 regions of the genome and an insertion within the regions of a full length sense p-Hyde cDNA under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter, and 2) a suitable carrier or diluent, thereby treating the subject with cancer In one embodiment the cancer is selected from a group consisting of: melanoma; lymphoma; leulcemia; and prostate, colorectal, pancreatic, breast, brain, or gastric carcinoma.
The present invention provides the means necessary for production of gene-based therapies diiected at cancer cells These therapeutic agents may take the form of polynucleotides comprising all or a portion of the p-Hyde locus placed in appropriate vectors or delivered to target cells in more direct ways such that the function of the p-Hyde protein is reconstituted. Therapeutic agents may also take the form of polypeptides based on either a portion of, or the entire protehi sequence of p-Hyde. These may functionally replace the activity of p-Hyde in vivo.
A suitable bodily fluid includes, but is not limited to- serum, plasma, cerebrospinal fluid, lymphocytes, urine, transudates, or exudates. In the preferred embodiment, the suitable bodily fluid sample is serum or plasma. In addition, the bodily fluid sample may be cells from bone marrow, or a supernatant from a cell culture Methods of obtaining a suitable bodily fluid sample from a subject are known to those skilled in the art. Methods of determining tl e level of antibody or antigen include, but are not limited to: ELISA, IF A, and Western blotting.
The diagnostic assays of the invention can be nucleic acid assays such as nucleic acid hybridization assays and assays which detect amplification of specific nucleic acid to detect for a nucleic acid sequence of the human p-Hyde described herein. Target specific probes may be used in the nucleic acid hybridization diagnostic. The probes are specific for or complementary to tlie target of interest. For precise allelic differentiations, the probes should be about 14 nucleotides long and preferably about 20-30 nucleotides. For more general detection of the human p-Hyde of the invention, nucleic acid probes are about 50 to about 1000 nucleotides, most preferably about 200 to about 400 nucleotides.
The specific nucleic acid probe can be RNA or DNA polynucleotide or oligonucleotide, or their analogs. The probes may be single or double stranded nucleotides. The probes of the invention may be synthesized enzymatically, usmg methods well known in the art (e g., nick translation, primer extension, reverse transcription, the polymerase chain reaction, and others) or chemically (e.g., by methods such as the phosphora idite method described by Beaucage and Carruthers [19], or by the triester method according to Matteucci, et al. [62], both incorporated herein by reference).
An alternative means for determining tlie presence of the human p-Hyde is in situ hybridization, or more recently, in situ polymerase chain reaction. In situ PCR is described in Neuvo et al. [71], Intracellular localization of polymerase chain reaction (PCR)-amplifιed Hepatitis C cDNA; Bagasra et al. [10], Detection of Human Immunodeficiency virus type 1 provirus in mononuclear cells by in situ polymerase chain reaction; and Heniford et al. [35], Variation in cellular EGF receptor mRNA expression demonstrated by in situ reverse transcriptase polymerase chain reaction. In situ hybridization assays are well Icnown and are generally described in Methods Enzymol. [67] incorporated by reference herein, hi an in situ hybridization, cells are fixed to a solid support, typically a glass slide. The cells are then contacted with a hybridization solution at a moderate temperature to permit annealing of target-specific probes that are labelled. The probes are preferably labelled w th radioisotopes or fluorescent reporters. The above described probes are also useful for in-situ hybridization or in order to locate tissues which express this gene, or for other hybridization assays for the presence of this gene or its MRNA in various biological tissues. In-situ hybridization is a sensitive localization method which is not dependent on expression of antigens or native vs. 5 denatured conditions.
In brief, inhibitory nucleic acid therapy approaches can be classified into those that target DNA sequences, those that target RNA sequences (including pre-mRNA and mRNA), those that target proteins (sense strand approaches), and those that cause l o cleavage or chemical modification of the target nucleic acids.
Approaches targeting DNA fall into several categories. Nucleic acids can be designed to bind to the major groove of the duplex DNA to fonn a triple helical or "triplex" structure. Alternatively, inhibitory nucleic acids are designed to bind to regions of 1 single stranded DNA resulting from the opening of the duplex DNA during replication •or transcription.
More commonly, inhibitory nucleic acids are designed to bind to mRNA or mRNA precursors. Inhibitory nucleic acids are used to prevent maturation of pre-mRNA. 20 Inhibitory nucleic acids may be designed to interfere with RNA processing, splicing or translation.
The inhibitory nucleic acids can be targeted to mRNA. In this approach, tlie inhibitory nucleic acids are designed to specifically block translation of the encoded protein. Using
25 this approach, the inhibitory nucleic acid can be used to selectively suppress certain cellular functions by inhibition of translation of mRNA encoding critical proteins. For example, an inhibitory nucleic acid complementary to regions of c-myc mRNA inhibits c-myc protein expression in a human promyelocytic leukemia cell line, HL60, which overexpresses the c-myc proto-oncogene. See Wiclcstrom EX., et al. [93] and
30 Harel-Bellan, A., et al. [ 1 A], As described in Helene and Touhne, inhibitory nucleic acids targeting mRNA have been shown to work by several different mechanisms to inhibit translation of the encoded protein(s). Lastly, the inhibitory nucleic acids can be used to induce chemical inactivation or cleavage of the target genes or mRNA. Chemical inactivation can occur by the induction of crosslinks between the inhibitory nucleic acid and tl e target nucleic acid withm the cell. Other chemical modifications of the target nucleic acids induced by appropriately derivatized inhibitory nucleic acids may also be used.
Cleavage, and therefore inactivation, of the target nucleic acids may be effected by attaching a substituent to the inhibitory nucleic acid which can be activated to induce cleavage reactions. The substituent can be one that affects either chemical, or enzymatic cleavage. Alternatively, cleavage can be induced by the use of ribozymes or catalytic RNA. hi this approach, the inhibitory nucleic acids would comprise either naturally occurring RNA (ribozymes) or synthetic nucleic acids with catalytic activity,
As used herein, "pharmaceutical composition" could mean therapeutically effective amounts of polypeptide products of the invention together with suitable diluents, preservatives, solubilizers, emulsifiers, adjuvant and or earners useful in SCF (stem cell factor) therapy. A "therapeutically effective amount" as used herein refers to that amount which provides a therapeutic effect for a given condition and administration regimen. Such compositions are liquids or lyophilized or otherwise dried foniiulations and include diluents of various buffer content (e.g., Tris-HCL, acetate, phosphate), pH and ionic strength, additives such as albumin or gelatin to prevent absorption to surfaces, detergents (e.g.. Tween 20, Tween 80, Pluronic F68, bile acid salts), solubilizing agents (e.g., glycerol, polyethylene glycerol), anti-oxidants (e.g., ascorbic acid, sodium metabisulfite), preservatives (e.g., Thimerosal, benzyl alcohol, parabens), bulking substances or tonicity modifiers (e.g., lactose, mannitol), covalent attachment of polymers such as polyethylene glycol to the protein, coraplexation with metal ions, or incorporation of tlie material into or onto particulate preparations of polymeric compounds such as polylactic acid, polglycolic acid, hydrogels, etc, or onto liposomes, microemulsions, micelles, unilamellar or multilamellar vesicles, erythrocyte ghosts, or spheroplasts. Such compositions will influence tl e physical state, solubility, stability, rate of in vivo release, and rate of in vivo clearance of SCF. The choice of compositions will depend on the physical and chemical properties of the protein having SCF activity. For example, a product derived from a membrane-bound form of SCF may require a formulation containing detergent. Controlled or sustained release compositions include formulation in lipophilic depots (e.g., fatty acids, waxes, oils). Also comprehended by the invention are paniculate compositions coated with polymers (e.g., poloxamers or poloxamines) and SCF coupled to antibodies directed agamst tissue-specific receptors, ligands or antigens or coupled to ligands of tissue-specific receptors. Other embodiments of the compositions of tlie invention incorporate particulate forms protective coatings, protease inhibitors or permeation enhancers for various routes of administration, including parenteral, pulmonary, nasal and oral. In one embodiment the pharmaceutical composition is administered parenterally, paracancerally, transmucosally, transdeπnally, intramuscularly, intravenously, intradermaly, subcutaneously, intraperitonealy, intraventricularly, intracranialy.
Further, as used herein "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" are well known to those skilled in the art and include, but are not limited to, 0.01-0. IM and preferably 0.05M phosphate buffer or 0.8% saline. Additionally, such pharmaceutically acceptable carriers may be aqueous or non-aqueous solutions, suspensions, and emulsions. Examples of non-aqueous solvents are propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, vegetable oils such as olive oil, and mjectable organic esters such as ethyl oieate. Aqueous carriers include water, alcoholic/aqueous solutions, emulsions or suspensions, including saline and buffered media. Parenteral vehicles include sodium chloride solution, Ringer's dextrose, dextrose and sodium chloride, lactated Ringer's or fixed oils. Intravenous vehicles include fluid and nutrient replenishers, electrolyte replenishers such as those based on Ringer's dextrose, and the like. Preseivatives and other additives may also be present, such as, for example, antimicrobials, antioxidants, collating agents, inert gases and the like.
The teπn "adjuvant" refers to a compound or mixture that enhances the immune response to an antigen. An adjuvant can serve as a tissue depot that slowly releases the antigen and also as a lymphoid system activator that non-specifically enhances the immune response (Hood et al., Immunology, Second Ed , 1984, Benjamin/Cummings: Menlo Park, California, p. 384). Often, a primary challenge with an antigen alone, in the absence of an adjuvant, will fail to elicit a humoral or cellular immune response. Adjuvant include, but are not limited to, complete Freund's adjuvant, incomplete Freund's adjuvant, saponin, mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil or hydrocarbon emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanins, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful human adjuvant such as BCG (hacille Calmette-Gυenn) and Corynebacterium parvum. Preferably, the adjuvant is pharmaceutically acceptable.
Conn-oiled or sustained release compositions include foπnulation in hpophilic depots (e.g. fatty acids, waxes, oils). Also comprehended by tlie invention are particulate compositions coated with polymers (e.g. poloxamers or poloxamines) and the compound coupled lo antibodies directed against tissue-specific receptors, ligands or antigens or coupled to ligands of tissue-specific receptors. Other embodiments of the compositions of the invention incorporate particulate forms protective coatings, protease inhibitors or permeation enhancers for various routes of administration, including parenteral, pulmonary, nasal and oral.
When administered, compounds are often cleared rapidly from mucosal surfaces or the circulation and may therefore elicit relatively short-lived pharmacological activity. Consequently, frequent administrations of relatively large doses of bioactive compounds may by required to sustain therapeutic efficacy. Compounds modified by tlie covalent attacliment of water-soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, copolymers of polyethylene glycol and polypropylene glycol, carboxy ethyl cellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinylpyrrόlidone or polyproline are Icnown to exhibit substantially longer half-lives in blood following innavenous injection than do the corresponding unmodified compounds (Abuchowslci et al., 1981 ; Newmark et al., 1982; and Katre et al., 1987). Such modifications may also increase the compound's solubility in aqueous solution, eliminate aggregation, enhance the physical and chemical stability of the compound, and greatly reduce the immunogenicity and reactivity of the compound. As a result, the desired in vivo biological activity may be achieved by the administration of such polymer-compound abducts less frequently or in lower doses than with the unmodified compound. Dosages. The sufficient amount may include but is not limited to from about 1 μg/kg to about 1000 mg/kg. The amount may be 10 mg/ g. The pharmaceutically acceptable form of tl e composition includes a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
The preparation of therapeutic compositions which contain an active component is well understood in the art. Typically, such compositions are prepared as an aerosol of the polypeptide delivered to tlie nasopharynx or as injectables, either as liquid solutions or suspensions, however, solid forms suitable for solution hi, or suspension in, liquid prior to injection can also be prepared. The preparation can also be emulsified. The active therapeutic ingredient is often mixed with excipients which are pharmaceutically acceptable and compatible with the active ingredient. Suitable excipients are, for example, water, salme, dextrose, glycerol, ethanol, or the like and combinations thereof. In addition, if desired, the composition can contain minor amounts of auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents which enhance the effectiveness of the active ingredient.
An active component can be formulated into the therapeutic composition as neutralized pharmaceutically acceptable salt forms. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include the acid addition salts (fanned with the free amino groups of the polypeptide or antibody molecule) and which are formed with inorganic acids such as, for example, hydrochloric or phosphoric acids, or such organic acids as acetic, oxalic, tartaric, mandelic, and the like. Salts formed from the free carboxyl groups can also be derived from inorganic bases such as, for example, sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, or ferric hydroxides, and such organic bases as isopropylamine, trimethylamine, 2-ethylaroino ethanol, histidine, procaine, and the like.
A composition comprising "A" (where "A" is a single protein, DNA molecule, vector, etc.) is substantially free of "B" (where "B" comprises one or more contaminating proteins, DNA molecules, vectors, etc.) when at least about 75%> by weight of the proteins, DNA, vectors (depending on the category of species to which A and B belong) in the composition is "A" Preferably, "A" comprises at least about 90% by weight of the A+B species in the composition, most preferably at least about 99% by weight.
The phrase "therapeutically effective amount" is used herein to mean an amount sufficient to reduce by at least about 15 percent, preferably by at least 50 percent, more preferably by al least 90 percent, and most preferably prevent, a clinically significant deficit in the activity, function and response of the host.
According to the invention, the component or components of a therapeutic composition of tlie invention may be introduced parenterally, traπsmucosally, e.g , orally, nasally, pulmoiiarailly, or rectally, or transdeπnally. Preferably, administration is parenteral, e.g., via intravenous injection, and also including, but is not limited to, intra-arteriole, intramuscular, intradermal, subcutaneous, lnttaperitoneal, intraventricular, and mtracranial administration. Oral or pulmonary delivery may be preferred to activate mucosal immunity; since pneuniococci generally colonize the nasopharyngeal and pulmonary mucosa, mucosal immunity may be a particularly effective preventive treatment. The term "unit dose" when used in reference to a therapeutic composition of the present invention refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosage for humans, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce tlie desired therapeutic effect in association with tlie required diluent; i.e., carrier, or vehicle.
According to the present invention, a method is also provided of supplying wild-type p-Hyde function to a cell which carries mutant p-Hyde alleles. Supplying such a function should suppress neoplastic growth of tl e recipient cells. The wild-type p-Hyde gene or a part of tl e gene may be introduced into the cell in a vector such that tlie gene remains extrachromosomal. In such a situation, the gene will be expressed by the cell from the extrachromosomal location. If a" gene fragment is introduced and expressed in a cell carrying a mutant p-Hyde allele, the gene fragment should encode a part of the p-Hyde protein wliich is required for non-neoplastic growth of the cell. More preferred is the situation where the wild-type p-Hyde gene or a part thereof is introduced into the mutant cell in such a way that it rcco bines with the endogenous mutant p-Hyde gene present in the cell. Such recombination requires a double recombination event which results in the coπection of the p-Hyde gene mutation. Vectors for introduction of genes both for recombination and for extrachromosomal maintenance are known in the art, and any suitable vector may be used. Methods for introducing DNA into cells such as electroporation, calciumphospb te co-precipitation and viral transduction are known in the art, and the choice of method is within the competence of the routineer. Cells transformed with the wild-type p-Hyde gene can be used as model systems to study cancer remission and drug treatments which promote such remission.
As generally discussed above, the p-Hyde gene or fragment, where applicable, may be employed in gene therapy methods in order to increase the amount of the expression products of such genes in cancer cells. Such gene therapy is particulaiiy appropriate for use in both cancerous and pre-cancerous cells, in which the level of p-Hyde polypeptide is absent or diminished compared to normal cells. It may also be useful to increase the level of expression of a given p-Hyde gene even in those rumor cells in which the mutant gene is expressed at a "normal" level, but the gene product is not fully functional
Gene therapy would be carried out according to generally accepted methods, for example, as described by Friedman, 1991. Cells from a patient's tumor would be first analyzed by the diagnostic methods described above, to ascertain the production of p-Hyde polypeptide in the rumor cells. A virus or plasmid vector (see further details below), containing a copy of the p-Hyde gene linked to expression control elements and capable of replicating inside the rumor cells, is prepared. Suitable vectors are known, such as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,252,479 and PCT published application WO 93/07282. The vector is then inj ected into the patient, either locally at the site of tlie rumor or systemically (in order to reach any rumor cells That may have metastasized to other sites). If the transfected gene is not permanently incorporated into the genome of each of the targeted minor cells, the treatment may have to be repeated periodically. Gene transfer systems known in the art may be useful in tlie practice of the gene therapy methods of the present invention. These include viral and nonviral transfer methods. A number of viruses have been used as gene transfer vectors, including papovaviruses, e.g., SV40 (Madzak et al., 1992), adenovirus (Berlcner, 1992; Berlcner et al., 1988; Gorziglia and Kapikian, 1992; Quanthi et aL, 1992; Rosenfeld et al., 1992; Wilkinson et al., 1992; Stratford-Penϊcaudet et al., 1990), vaccinia virus (Moss, 1 92), adeno-associated virus (Muzyczka, 1992; Ohi et al., 1990), herpesviruses including HSV and EBV (Margolskee, 1992; Johnson et al., 1992; Fink et al., 1992; Breakfield and Geller, 1987; Freese et aL, 1990), and retroviruses of avian (Brandyo adhy y and Temin, 1984; Petropoulos et al., 1992), murine (Miller, 1992; Miller et al., 1985; Sorge et aL, 1984; Mann and Baltimore, 1985; Miller et al., 1988), and human origin (Shimada et aL, 1991; Helseth et al., 1990; Page et al., 1990; Buclischacher and Panganiban, 1992). Most human gene therapy protocols have been based on disabled murine retroviruses.
Peptides which have p-Hyde activity can be supplied to cells which carry mutant or missing p-Hyde alleles. Tl e sequence of the p-Hyde protein is disclosed (SEQ ID NO:2). Protein can be produced by expression of the cDNA sequence in bacteria, for example, using Icnown expression vectors. Alternatively, p-Hyde polypeptide can be extracted from p-Hyde-producing mammalian cells. In addition, the techniques of synthetic chemistry can be employed to synthesize p-Hyde protein. Any of such techniques can provide the preparation of the present invention which comprises the p-Hyde protein. The preparation is substantially free of other human proteins. This is most readily accomplished by synthesis in a microorganism or m vitro.
P-Hyde molecules can be introduced into cells by microinjection or by use of liposomes, for example. Alternatively, some active molecules may be taken up by cells, actively or by diffusion. Extracellular application of the p-Hyde gene product may be sufficient to affect rumor growth. Supply of molecules with p-Hyde activity should lead to partial reversal of the neoplastic state. Other molecules with p-Hyde activity (for example, peptides, drugs or organic compounds) may also be used to effect such a reversal. Modified polypeptides having substantially similar function are also used for peptide therapy.
In another embodiment, the active compound can be delivered in a vesicle, in particular a liposome (see Langer, Science 249:1527-1533 (1990); Treat et aL, in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 353-365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 317-327; see generally ibid).
In yet another embodiment, the therapeutic compound can be delivered in a controlled release system. For example, the polypeptide may be administered using intravenous infusion, an implantable osmotic pump, a transdermal patch, liposomes, or other modes of administration. In one embodiment, a pump may be used (see Langer, supra; Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref. Biomed. Eng. 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et al., Surgery 88:507 (1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 321:574 (1989)), In another embodiment, polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Florida (1974); Controlled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J. Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol. Chem. 23:61 (1983); see also Levy et al., Science 228:190 (1985); During et al., Ann. Neurol. 25:351 (1989); Howard et al., J. Neurosurg. 71 :105 (1989)). In yet another embodiment, a controlled release system can be placed in proximity of the therapeutic target, i.e., the brain, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115-138 (1984)). Preferably, a controlled release device is introduced into a subject in proximity of the site of inappropriate immune activation or a tumor Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (Science 249:1527-1533 (1990)).
A subject in whom administration of an active component as set 'forth above is an effective therapeutic regimen for a bacterial infection is preferably a human, but can be any animal. Thus, as can be readily appreciated by one of ordinary slcill in the art, tlie methods and pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention are particularly suited to administration to any animal, particularly a mammal, and including, but by no means limited to, domestic animals, such as feline or canine subjects, farm animals, such as but not limited to bovine, equine, caprine, ovine, and porcine subjects, wild animals (whether in the wild or in a zoological garden), research animals, such as mice, rats, rabbits, goats, sheep, pigs, dogs, cats, etc., i.e. , for veterinary medical use.
In the therapeutic methods and compositions of the invention, a therapeutically effective dosage of the active component is provided. A therapeutically effective dosage can be deteπnined by the ordinary skilled medical worker based on patient characteristics (age, weight, sex, condition, complications, other diseases, etc.), as is well Icnown in the art. Furthermore, as further routine studies are conducted, more specific information will emerge regarding appropriate dosage levels for treatment of various conditions in various patients, and tlie ordinary skilled worker, considering tlie therapeutic context, age and general health of the recipient, is able to ascertain proper dosing. Generally, for intravenous injection or infusion, dosage may be lower than for intraperitoneal, intramuscular, or other route of administration. The dosing schedule may vary, depending on tlie circulation half-life, and the foπuulation used. The compositions are administered in a manner compatible with the dosage formulation ui the therapeutically effective amount. Precise amounts of active ingredient required to be administered depend on the judgment of the practitioner and are peculiar to each individual. However, suitable dosages may range from about 0.1 to 20, preferably about 0.5 to about 10, and more preferably one to several, milligrams of active ingredient per kilogram body weight of individual per day and depend on tl e route of administration. Suitable regimes for initial administration and booster shots are also variable, but are typified by an initial administration followed by repeated doses at one or more hour intervals by a subsequent injection or other administration. Alternatively, continuous intravenous infusion sufficient to maintain concentrations of ten nanomolar to ten micromolar in the blood are contemplated
It is contemplated by this invention that p-Hyde replacement therapy could be used similarly in conjunction with chemo- or radiotherapeutic intervention. To induce susceptibility to cell death or to inhibit cell growth or to kill cells, such as malignant or metastatic cells, ushig tlie methods and compositions of the present invention, one would contact a "target" cell with the expression vector and at least one DNA damaging agent. In oen embodiment the cell is contacted with a single composition or pharmacological formulation that includes both agents, or by contacting the cell with two distinct compositions or formulations, at the same time, wherein one composition includes the vectoi and the other includes the DNA damaging agent. In another embodiment, treatment with the vector may precede or follow the DNA damaging agent treatment by intervals ranging from minutes to weeks. Protocols and methods are Icnown to those skilled in tlie art.
DNA damaging agents or factors are known to those skilled in the art and means any chemical compound or treatment method that induces DNA damage when applied to a cell. Such agents and factors mclude radiation and waves that induce DNA damage such as, gamma -irradiation, X-rays, UV-irradiation, microwaves, electronic emissions, and the like. A variety of chemical compounds, also described as "chemotherapeutic agents", function to induce DNA damage, all of which are intended to be of use in the combined treatment methods disclosed herein. Chemotherapeutic agents contemplated to be of use. include, e.g., adriamycin, 5-fiuorouracil (5FU), etoposide (VP-1 6), camptothecin, actinomycin-D, mitomycin C, cisplatin (CDDP) and even hydrogen peroxide. The invention also encompasses the use of a combmation of one or more DNA damaging agents, whether radiation-based or actual compounds, -such as tlie use of X-rays with cisplatui or the use of cisplatin with etoposide.
In another embodiment one may hradiate the localized tumor site with DNA damaging radiation such as X-rays, UV-light, gamma -rays or even microwaves. Alternatively, the tumor cells may be contacted with the DNA damaging agent by administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a DNA damaging compound such as, adπamycin, 5-fluorouracιI, etoposide, camptothecin, aclinomycin-D, mitomycin C, or more preferably, cisplatin. The DNA damaging agent may be prepared and used as a combined therapeutic composition, or kit, by combining it with a p-Hydc expression construct, as descnbed above. Agents that directly cross-link nucleic acids, specifically DNA, are envisaged and are shown herein, to eventuate DNA damage leading to a synergistic antineoplastic combination. Agents such as cisplatin, and other DNA alkylating may be used. Cisplatin has been widely used to treat cancer, with efficacious doses used in clinical applications of 20 mg/m<2 > for 5 days every three weeks for a total of three courses. Cisplatin is not absorbed orally and must therefore be delivered via injection intravenously, subcutaneously, intratumorally or intraperitoneally. Agents that damage DNA also include compounds that interfere with DNA replication, mitosis and chromosomal segregation. Such chemotherapeutic compounds include adriamycin, also known as doxorubicin, etoposide, verapamil, podophyllotoxin, and tlie like. Widely used in a clinical setting for the treatment of neoplasms, these compounds are administered through bolus injections intravenously at doses ranging from 25-75 mg/m<2 > at 21 day intervals for adriamycin, to 35-50 mg/m<2 > for etoposide intravenously or double the intravenous dose orally.
Agents that disrupt the synthesis and fidelity of nucleic acid precursors and subunits also lead to DNA damage. As such a number of nucleic acid precursors have been developed. Particularly useful are agents that have undergone extensive testing and are readily available. As such, agents such as 5-fluorouracil (5-FU), are preferentially used by neoplastic tissue, making this agent particularly useful for targeting to neoplastic cells. Although quite toxic, 5-FU, is applicable in a wide range of carriers, including topical, however intravenous administration with doses ranging from 3 to 15 mg/kg/day being commonly used.
Other factors that cause DNA damage and have been used extensively include what are commonly known as gamma -rays, X-rays, and/or the directed delivery of radioisotopes to tumor cells. Other forms of DNA damaging factors are also contemplated such as microwaves and UV-irradiation. It is most likely that all of these factors effect a broad range of damage DNA, on the precursors of DNA, the replication and repair of DNA, and the assembly and maintenance of chromosomes. Dosage ranges for X-rays range from daily doses of 50 to 200 roentgens for prolonged periods of time (3 to 4 weeks), to single doses of 2000 to 6000 roentgens. Dosage ranges for radioisotopes vary widely, and depend on the half-life of the isotope, the strength and type of radiation emitted, and the uptake by the neoplastic cells. Several non-viral methods for the transfer of expression constructs into cultured mammalian cells also are contemplated by the present invention. These include calcium phosphate precipitation (Graham and Van Der Eb, 1973; Chen and Okayama, 1987; Rippe et al,, 1990) DEAE-dextran (Gopal, 1985), electroporation (Tur-Kaspa et al., 1986; Potter et al„ 1984), direct microinjection (Harland and Weintraub, 1985), DNA-loaded liposomes (Nicolau and Sene, 1982; Fraley et al., 1979) and lipofectamiue-DNA complexes, cell sonication (Fechheimer et al., 1987), gene bombardment using high velocity microprojectiles (Yang et al., 1990), and receptor-mediated transfection (Wit and Wu, 1987; Wu and Wu, 1988). Some of these techniques may be successfully adapted for in vivo or ex vivo use. Also, helper cell lines may be derived from human cells such as human embryonic kidney cells, muscle cells, hematopoietic cells or other human embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells. Alternatively, the helper cells may be derived from the cells of other mammalian species that are permissive for hunian adenovirus. Such cells include, e.g , Vero cells or other monkey embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells. As stated above, the preferred helper cell line is 293.
Tn another embodiment, the active compound can be delivered in a vesicle, in particular a liposome (see Langer, Science 249:1527-1533 (1990); Treat et al., in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 353-365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 317-327; see generally ibid).
In yet another embodiment, tlie therapeutic compound can be delivered in a controlled release system. For example, the polypeptide may be administered using intravenous infusion, an implantable osmotic pump, a transdermal patch, liposomes, or other modes of administration. In one embodiment, a pump may be used (see Langer, supra; Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref. Bionied. Eng. 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et aL, Surgery 88:507 (1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 321 :574 (1989)). In another embodiment, polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Florida (1974); Controlled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J. Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol. Chem. 23:61 (1983); see also Levy et al., Science 228: 190 (1985); During et al., Ann. Neural. 25:351 (1989); Howard et al., J. Neui-osurg. 71 : 105 (1989)). In yet another embodiment, a controlled release system can be placed in proximity of the therapeutic target, i.e., the brain, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115-138 (1984)). Preferably, a controlled release device is introduced into a subject in proximity of the site of inappropriate immune activation or a tumor. Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (Science 249: 1527-1533 (1990)).
As can be readily appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art, the methods and pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention are particularly suited to administration to a mammal, preferable a human subject.
In the therapeutic methods and compositions of the invention, a therapeutically effective dosage of the active component is provided. A therapeutically effective dosage can be determined by the ordinary skilled medical worker based on patient characteristics (age, weight, sex, condition, complications, other diseases, etc.), as is well known in the art. Furthermore, as further routine studies are conducted, more specific information will emerge regarding appropriate dosage levels for treatøient of various conditions in variotis patients, and the ordinary skilled worker, considering the therapeutic context, age and general health of the recipient, is able to ascertain proper dosing. Generally, for intravenous injection or infusion, dosage may be lower than for intraperitoneal, intramuscular, or other route of administration. The dosing schedule may vary, depending on the circulation half-life, and the formulation used. The compositions are administered in a manner compatible with the dosage formulation in the therapeutically effective amount. Precise amounts of active ingredient required to be administered depend on the judgment of the practitioner and are peculiar to each individual. However, suitable dosages may range from about 0.1 to 20, preferably about 0.5 to about 10, and more preferably one to several, milligrams of active ingredient per kilogram body weight of individual per day and depend on the route of administration. Suitable regimes for initial administration and booster shots are also variable, but are typified by an initial administration followed by repeated doses at one or more hour intervals by a subsequent injection or other administration. Alternatively, continuous intravenous infusion sufficient to maintain concentrations of ten nanomolar to ten micromolar in the blood are contemplated.
The present invention provides a kit comprising the all tlie essential materials and reagents required for inhibiting prostate tumor cell proliferation, transforming prostate cells or detecting prostate cancer cells, may be assembled together hi a kit. This generally will comprise selected expression constructs. Also included may be various media for replication of the expression constructs and host cells for such replication. Such kits will comprise distinct containers for each individual reagent. When the components of the kit are provided in one or more liquid solutions, the liquid solution preferably is an aqueous solution, with a sterile aqueous solution being particularly preferred. For in vivo use, the expression construct may be formulated into a pharmaceutically acceptable syringeable composition. In this case, the container means may itself be an inhalent, syringe, pipette, eye dropper, or other such like apparatus, from which tlie formulation may be applied to an infected area of the body, such as the lungs, injected into an animal, or even applied to and mixed with the other components of the kit. The components of the kit may also be provided in dried or lyophilized forms. When reagents or components are provided as a dried form, reconstitution generally is by the addition of a suitable solvent. It is envisioned that the solvent also may be provided ui another container means.
The kits of the present invention also will typically include a means for containing the vials in close confinement for commercial sale such as, e.g., injection or blow-molded plastic containers into which the deshed vials are retained. Irrespective of the number or type of containers, the kits of the mvention also may comprise, or be packaged with, an instrument for assisting with the injection/administration or placement of the ultimate complex composition within the body of an animal. Such an instrument may be an inhalent, syringe, pipette, forceps, measured spoon, eye dropper or any such medically approved delivery vehicle. The following examples are presented in order to more fully illustrate the preferred embodiments of the invention. They should in. no way be construed, however, as limiting the broad scope of the invention.
EXPERIMENTALDETAILS SECTION
EXAMPLE: p-Hyde induces susceptibility to induction of cell prograπimed cell death in prostate cancer
MATERIALS AND METHODS
Cell lines. Two rat prostatic cancer cell lines (anaplastic tumor, low metastatic AT-1 and highly metastatic MAT-LyLu) were used for tlie cDNA competition hybridization strategy (Rhialdy and Steiner, 1997). Other Dumiing rat prostate cancer cell lines used for Northern analyses were AT-3, MAT-LyLu, MAT-Lu and G. These cell lines were derived from established in-vivo Dtmning R3327 rat prostatic tumor sublines and further developed as m-vilro cell lines by Isaacs et al at Johns Hopkins Oncology Center, Baltimore, Maryland (Isaacs et al., 1986). Human prostate cancer cell lines PPC-1, LNCaP, TSU and DU145 used for Northern analyses were obtained from American Tissue Culture Collection, Roclcville, Maryland. All cells were grown in RPMI 1640 medium (Mediatech, Herndon, Virginia) in the presence of 10% fetal calf serum, 50 units of penicillin G and 50 μg streptomycin sulfate per l and 250 μM dexamethasone as previously described (Isaacs et al, 1986).
Cloning strategy: Radiolabeled MAT-LyLu cDNA population in the presence of vast excess amount of competitor non~radiolabeled AT-1 cDN population was used to identify cDNAs clones in the MAT-LyLu cDNA library (Rmaldy and Steiner, 1997). One of these cDNAs was novel and designated as p-Hyde The prostate cancer associated p-Hyde cDNA was further characterized.
Characterization of cDNA: Sequencing- p-Hyde cDNA was originally obtained as a ? ZAP Uni XR clone, and was further subcloned into pBlυescript SK" vector through in vivo excision protocol as described (Stratagene, La Jolla, California). This double-stranded cDNA was further subjected for Dye Terminator Cycle Sequencing (Perkin Elmer, Foster City, California) using ABI 377 automatic DNA sequencer Version 3.0. Tlie open reading frame of p-Hyde cDNA was determined using the DNA Strider program (Pasteur Institute, Paris).
Northern blot analyses. Total R As were isolated from cell lines during exponential growth (70% confluence) by using RNAZol B as suggested by the supplier (Tel-Test, Inc., Friendswood, Texas) and subjected to Northern blot analyses. Reverse and forward PCR primer were designed and used to amplify 1.35 kb of the p-Hyde sequence representing the 1467 bases of its open reading frame. The PCR product was radiolabeled by random oligo labeling technique (Multiprime DNA Labeling System, Amersha ) and used as a probe for Northern analyses. Relative expression of p-Hyde gene was compared to an internal control (cyclophylin) by scanning of the autoradio ram with a PDI Discovery Series Scanner equipped with Quantity One software.
In vitro transcription and translation: The open reading frame of the cDNA was confirmed using in-vitro transcription (capped mRNA) as described followed by in-vitro translation using rabbit reticulocyte lysate (Stratagene, La Jolla, California) in the presence of 75 Ci of L-[3SS] Methionine (Amersham, Arlington Heights, Illinois). The in vitro translation product was further identified on 10% SDS polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis by autoradiography.
Subcloning of p-H de into pcDNA3.1 (-): cDNA insert was released from the pBluescripi SK" vector througji double digests by Kpnl and Sad (SK fragment). This fragment represents the intact p-Hyde sequence and was then ligated into dephosphorylated Kpnl-Sacl double digests of mammalian shuttle vector pcDNA 3.1 (-) (InvitTOgen). Ligation mix was used to transfect competent DH5? , selected for ampicillin resistance followed by plasmid preparation using standard cesium chloride density gradient centrifugation. The new construct of p-Hyde was then used to transfect AT3 rat prostatic cancer subline by using lipofectamine (Gibco/BRL) followed by G418 selection (Rhialdy et al., 1988). Eight clones were obtained and two of them, AT3-H1 and AT3-H2, were used to assess the function of p-Hyde in its association with apoptosis. In addition, AT3 cell line was also transfected with pcDNA3.1(-) vector only and its stable transfected eel 1 line, designated as AT3-pc was used as negative control relative to stable transfectant of AT3-H1 and AT3-H2 for the functional assessment of the p-Hyde.
Apoptosis assay: Apoptosis intensity in AT3 parental cell line was assessed in comparison with AT3-H1 , AT3-H2 and AT3-pc as negative control. Two apoptotic agents were employed for this assessment: (1) UV damage of tlie DNA using UV dosage of 200 J/m2; apoptosis intensity was assayed at 36 h post-UV iι adiation and (2) 100 μM Fluorodeoxyυridiiie (FUrD) treatment for 36 hours followed by the apoptosis assay. After these apoptotic induction, cells were collected in two fractions: floating and attached cells. Both cell fractions were counted using Neubaue chamber and trypan blue exclusion. DNA were extracted separately from both fractions and analyzed on 1.6 % agarose gel electrophoresis to visualize the DNA laddering.
UV-da agc repair assay: Ultraviolet induced damage in the DNA was assayed using mouse monoclonal antibody specifically cross reacts with cyclobutane pyrimidine dhner (TDM-2) and photoproduct (64M-2). The presence of cyclobutane dimer and 64 photoproducts in DNAs were assessed in microtiter plates (1 0 and 200 ng/well) using both antibodies separately in a standard ELISA technique. In addition, the UV resistance was also assessed by using UV gradient assay as published (Rinaldy et al, 1988).
Uridine Phosphorylase Assay: Cell extract will be prepared from the cell pellet Before and after tlie induction with 1 mM 5-dFUrd for 24 hours, the corresponding cell extract will be prepared in 50 mM Potassium Phosphate buffer pH 7.4 through sonication followed by dialysis against the reaction buffer (50 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.4). The amount of protein will be determined by using standard Lowry or Biorad assay. The same amount of protein from all cell lines will be assayed for UP activity in 50 mM potassium phosphate buffer (pH 7.4) containing 10 mM uridine or thymidine as substrate. After 30 min incubation at 37° C, the reaction will be terminated by adding methanol followed by centrifugation. An aliquot of the supernatant will be run on HPLC column (6 x 200 mm) of ERC-ODS-1171 (ERMA CR, Ine). The amount of reaction product Uracil or Thymidine can be measured with UV detector at 265 nm compared to tlie standard. As negative controL the similar reaction mixture will be boiled before the incubation.
Construction of cDNA libraries: hi the first stage, cDNA libraries derived from AT-1 and MAT-LyLu cell lines were generated using Uni ZAP XR vector based on the protocol of Sttatagene. The independent clones obtained were 1.9 and 3.4 million clones for MAT-LyLu and AT-1, respectively. These unamplified libraries were subjected to PCR amplification of the cDNA insert population. Reverse primers (RP) and forward primers (FP), downstream and upstream of Xhol and Eco RI cloning site, were used to amplify the cDNA insert population. Tlie distance between both primers in ? Uni ZAP or pBluescript was 228 bases.
Design of competition probes. Two PCR probes were amplified: radiolabeled MAT-LyLu cDNA population probe and the non-radiolabeled AT-1 cDNA population probe (the cold competitor). The radiolabeled MAT-LyLu PCR product was enriched using S400 Sephacryl spin column. The majority of tlie unincorporated 32P-dCTP, prhner dimer, and 228 bp of PCR product resulting from tl e amplification of ? DNA without insert, was separated from the cDNAs. The purified radiolabeled cDNAs were mixed with 30 fold excess of non-radiolabeled cold competitor AT-1 PCR products and used as a competition-probe to screen the MAT-LyLu cDNA library.
Two kinds of unexpected radiolabeled PCR products that may potentially interfere with the hybridization between the radiolabeled cDNA of the competition probe and the screened cDNA of the library were: 1) the non-exponential amplification of the cDNAs, and 2) 228 bp PCR product derived from the ? DNA without cDNA insert. In order to reduce the possible cross-hybridization between these two unexpected PCR products with the vector of tlie screened library, excess amounts of I-ImdIϋ-digested_DNA, PvuII-digested-pBluescript DNA, and the 228 bp PCR product of the pBluescript based on both primers were mixed with the competition probe. Preliminary assessment of this complete mixed competition probe indicated that the hybridization of the MAT-LyLu cDNA library with this probe was extremely weak; whereas the duplicate filter hybridized with the same probe, but without non-radiolabeled AT-1 PCR product, was extremely positive. This clearly indicate that the positive hybridization of the MAT-LyLu products was due to the radiolabeled MAT-LyLu cDNAs of the PCR products which was not competed by tlie AT-1 cDNAs.
Screening of MAT-LyLu cDNA Libraries, Independent cDNA clones of the unamplified MAT-LyLu phage cDNA library (250,000 clones) were screened with the competition probe as described above. Nineteen enhanced signals were observed; these putative prostate cancer- or metastasis-associated plaques were then rescreened. As the result of this rescreening, 12 individual plaques were purified. The cDNAs were excised and subcloned into plasmid based vectors (pBluescript). This is possible due to the ability of helper phage ExAssist (Stratagene) to excise the cDNA with the pBluescript sequence h circular form as a filamentous phage and secreted from the cell (Fig. 2). Recombinant pBluescript plasmids were recovered by infecting an F' strain of E. coli (SOLR strain, Stratagene), ampicilliii resistant colonies were selected, and the plasmid DNA was extracted. The obtained plasmids were digested with Eco RI and Xhol to identify the cDNA inserts by agarose geJ electrophoresis. The results indicated that only four plasmids carried cDNA inserts.
Sequencing of four candidate genes: All four cDNAs were partially sequenced at both the 3' and 5 '-ends. These initial sequences were used to search the Genbank nucleic acid database of NCBI for homology or similarities. Three of the cDNAs matched known sequences: 1) rat mitochondrial genes coding for 16s and 12s rRNAs and tRNAs specific for valine and phenylalanine (Accession # emb/"V00680/MlRNR2). 2) rat nucleolar proteins B23.1 nRNA (Accession # gb/J03969/RATB23NP) and 2\ rat nucleolar proteins B23.1 and B23.2 (Accession # gb/M37041/ RATNUCBA7). The results of this competitive hybridization were consistent with the recognized phenotypic difference between both cell lines. MAT-LyLu exhibits twice the number of both nucleoli and mitochondria (Isaacs et al, 1986). This also suggests that the MAT-LyLu cell line is metabolically more active due to higher gene-dosage or gene-amplification of nucleolar and mitochondrial rRNA and its associated genes.
The complete sequence of the putative gene, p-Hyde: The fourth cDNA (lane 1), designated as p-Hyde, had an initial sequence which did not match any known full length sequences in the BLASTN nucleic acid database of the NCBI. Accordingly, p-Hyde cDNA was completely sequenced by using a walk-through sequencing strategy in both directions for three redundancies. Nine contigs from each sequencing direction were obtained and compounded as a full length composite of 2694 bases. Tiie poly(A) tail on the 3 '-end and polyadenylation signal sequence of GAGAAA (a slight modification of the conserved AATAAA sequence) located at the position 27 upstream from the poly(A) was also identified. Fig.6 shows the sequencing strategy and the restriction map illustrating the open reading frame of p-Hyde. SEQ ID No. 3 sets forth the resulting nucleic acid sequence of the rat p-Hyde and the resulting amino acid sequence of the rat p-Hyde.
Generation of PCR probe representing open reading frame p-Hyde Gene: Figure 8 shows the PCR amplification of the cDNA insert using three sets of sequencing primers. PCR product based on primer 11 and 5 represents the open reading frame of 0a& p-Hyde cDNA . It was further radiolabeled by Random-Oligo-Labeling technique and used as a representative probe for the cDNA insert in Northern analysis.
Northern blot analysis of p-H de. Some of the rat prostate- cancer sublines (AT-1, MAT-LyLu, MAT-Lu, AT-3 and G) and human prostate cancer cell line (PPC, LNCaP, DU145 and TSU) were assessed by Northern blot analysis using PCR radiolabeled probe. The result indicated that the transcript of the human counterpart was slightly smaller relative to the rat p-Hyde mRNA. Tlie same blot was further hybridized with cyclophylin cDNA as internal conttol. In this antoradiogram, 28S and 18S ribosomal RNA were used as marker. The length of tlie transcπpt was calculated based on the Spirin's formula M = 1550 X S2 ' where M = molecular weight and S = Svedberg's constant (McConkey, 1967). Signals of tlie p-Hyde and cyclophylin transcripts were quantitated and normalized using a computerized densitometer (Quantity-One software, PDI). Tlie levels of p-Hyde mRNA expression from both rat and human prostate cancer cell lines were compared (Table I). The data indicated that there was differential expression of p-Hyde gene in both Dunning rat and human prostate cancer cell lines which suggests that there may be a functional correlation between p-Hyde expression and prostate cancer progression. MAT-Lu showed the highest level of transcription, whereas AT-3 had the lowest. These data also indicated that the level of transcription in MAT-LyLu was relatively higher than that of AT-1, suggesting that the novel cDNA was the result of cDNA competition between MAT-LyLu and AT-1 cDNAs. More importantly, the human homologue of p-Hyde does exist as demonstrated in the human prostate cancer cell lines The highest level of p-Hyde transcription occurred in PPC-1, whereas tlie lowest was in LNCaP cell line (Table 1).
Analysis of the deduced amino acid sequence of p-Hyde derived from ORF: Open reading of the cDNA consists of 1467 bases coding for 489 amino acid residues; the calculated molecular weight of this protein is 54.8 kD. Further molecular analyses of this deduced amino acid sequence is based on the Kyte-Doolittle hydrophilicity plot, James-Wolf antigenic index and Emini surface probability plot using Laser Gene DNAstar software. In addition, hydrophilicity profile of the deduced amino acid sequence was deduced based on Hopp and Woods using Antigen program for the prediction of its antigenic deteπninants (Table II). The results of the first three analyses were in agreement with the fourth one. Two peptide regions (residues 113 through 131 and residues 223 through 249) exhibited the highest points of hydrophilicity and the antigenic index. Both peptide sequences can be used as immunogenic peptide to generate antibody. Its application to detect the translation product of p-Hyde hi Western analysis was in agreement with the highest score of its surface probability.
Table II. Average Hydrophilicity Amino-Acid Sequence
2.53 241 to 246
1.93 117 to 122
1.73 119 to 124
Confirmation of the ORF by in vitro transcription and translation: To confirm the reading frame based on the sequencing data, the p-Hyde cDNA which is constructed in pBluescript was digested with Kpnl rendering the linearized construct to be accessible for T3-RNA polymerase. This enzyme directs the synthesis of the riboprobe with 5'caρ structure (5'me7Gρpp5,G analog) similar to those present in eukaryotic mRNA (Stratagene). The 51caρ is important to increase the yield and the stability of the synthesized mRNA as well as to enhance the in-vitro translation efficiency of the mRNA. This capped mRNA was then used as a template for in-vitro translation using rabbit reticulocyte lysates (Stratagene) in tl e presence of 35S-Methionine. The translation products were identified under denaturing conditions using polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis containing 8 M urea. The autoradiograph shown in Fig.13 revealed that two translation products (55 and 55.5 kDa protein) were observed.
Moleculai- weights of these two protems are in agreement with the calculated molecular weight of the deduced amino acid sequence of the reading frame. In addition, two start codons were also identified in this reading frame correlating with the two translation products obtained through in vitro translation of the riboprobe. The difference in molecular weight between both translation products is hi agreement with the difference in 4 amino acid residues (MSGE) on the C terminal between both start codons. The molecular weight difference between both translation products is in agreement with the 0.5 kDa molecular weight of MSGE.
Subcloning of p-Hyde insert into pcDNA 3.1 (-) and transfection into rat and human prostate cancer cell lines: Referring to the data of differential expression of p-Hyde in rat and human prostate cancer cell lines, it is tempting to integrate this gene into cell line expressing the lowest level of p-Hyde followed by the assessment of the function of this gene in its stable transfectants. For this purpose, p-Hyde cDNA was subcloned into pcDNA3.1 (-) mammalian expression vector (Invitrogen). The following features of pcDNA3.1 facilitate both subcloning and gene expression: ( 1) An extensive multiple cloning site to facilitate cloning in one direction. (2) A CMV promoter to drive the constitutive transcription and translation of the inserted p-Hyde cDNA, and (3) An SV40 splice acceptor linked to a SV40 polyadenylation signal to facilitate expression. Tl e Kpnl-Xbal fragment of the p-Hyde cDNA containing an intact open reading frame was successfully subcloned into pcDN 3.1 (-) vector. The CsCl-banding-purified-pcDNA containing HYDE insert (designated as pcHYDE) was then transfected into rat (AT-1 and AT-3) and human (DU145 and PPC-1) prostate cancer cell line using Lipofectamine (Gibco/BRL) under G418 selection. Iu addition to this pcHYDE, all cell lines were also successfully transfected with the pcDNA3.1(-) vector as negative control. The results of obtaining the stable transfectants indicated that pcHYDE gene product is not toxic to the host cell.
In vitro assessment of stable p- Hyde transfectants: Tl e function of pcHYDE in stable transfectants (ATI and AT3 group) listed were assessed in vitro hi association with the cell cycle and apoptosis. The objective for the apoptosis assessment is based on the hypothesis that p-Hyde is a rat homologue of the murine putative TSAP-6 gene which is associated with the upregulation of apoptosis response under the induction of tumor suppressor p53 (Amson et al., 1996). Whereas the cell cycle analysis is referred to the fact that MAT-LyLu cell line is highly metastatic and the level of p-Hyde expression in this cell line is relatively higher than AT-1 cell line.
Cell cycle analysis: The strategy of the cell cycle analysis is based on the arrest of cell population in GI and S boundary after 24 hours treatment with 1 mM Hydroxyurea (Iwasaki et al., 1995). As a result, the G2 phase should be zero. Cells were harvested after hydroxyurea release at 0, 10 and 24 hours and subjected to flowcytometer analysis using standard propidium iodide staining. Tl e result is shown in TABLE III and showed that both AT1-H1 and AT3-H1, at 10 hours after tl e release of Hydroxyurea, were relatively slow in entering the S-phase, whereas the parental cell line (ATI and AT3) were faster At 24 hours after the release, the G2 cells were all elevated indicating that cell cycle was hi progress. Overall, the slow entrance hito S phase in both pcHYDE stable transfectants does not corroborate directly that it is correlated with the slower tumor growth in vivo . The progress of re-entering the cell cycle at 0, 10 and 24 hours after the release of Hydroxym-ea were followed by flowcytometer. Consistently, no G2 phase was detected at to - after 24 hours treatment with Hydroxyurea - demonstrating the cell cycle anest in the GI and S boundary.
Overall, the arrest of all cell cultures in GI and S boundary by 1 mM Hydroxyurea treatment for 24 hours was confirmed referring to the 0% population of G2. These results demonstarte that the slower response in entering the S phase in ATI -HI and AT3-H1 is likely due to the effect of the pcHYDE gene product that may reflect the growth characteristic of these stable transfectants in vivo.
Induction of susceptibility to apoptosis: Apoptotic response was assessed using DNA laddering assay. DNAs were extracted after the respective tteatment (24 hours with 1 mM Hydroxyurea followed by 24 hours with 0.1 mM 5'-dFUrd) and analyzed on 1.6% agarose gel electrophoresis. In agreement with cell cycle analyses, apoptotic response of the stable transfectants ATl-Hl and AT3-H1 (pcHYDE transfected AT-1 and AT-3) are consistently and significantly higher relative to both parental (AT-1 and AT-3) and pcDNA-transfected parental cell lines (ATI -pel and AT3-pcl). In particular, the highest apoptotic response occurred in synclironized culture under the induction with 0.1 mM 5'-dFUrd.
The enhanced apoptotic response in ATl-Hl and AT3-H1 transfectant after hydroxyurea treatment is the result of "thymineless death" (Kyprianou, 1994, Kyprianou et al., 1994) leading to depletion of intracellular thymidine-5-triphosphate (TTP) pools through indirect inhibition of thymidylate synthetase by fluorodeoxyuridine. Taken together, these data demonstrate that the apoptotic response h the pcHYDE stable transfectants is due to the downstream effect of pcHYDE gene product. UV-damaged DNA cannot be repaired in prostate cells transfected with ?-ETj - e:Three DNA enzyme repair systems were evaluated in parental compared to p-Hyde transfected cells: uridine phosphorylase, uridine kinase, and UV damage repair. UV damage repair was unpaired in e p-Hyde transfected cells. Decreased DNA repair activity results in higher levels of intact photoproducts (64PP). Consistent with these data, pHyde transfected cells also had a significant reduction in survival following UV exposure compared to parental AT3 cells as determined by colony formation assay. Thus, DNA repair enzyme impaiπnent correlated with shorter survival and induction of apoptosis in prostate cancer cells transfected wif . p-Hyde.
Northern RNA analysis of p-Hyde confirms overexpression of p-Hyde: To confirm the con-elation between apoptotic response and p-Hyde on the transcription level, Northern analysis of the total RNA derived from AT3-H1, AT3-H2 relative to AT3 parental cell line was performed. The result clearly demonstrated that the transcription level of pcHYDE in stable transfectant of AT3-H1 and AT3-H2 were significantly higher relative to AT3 parental cell line. This Northern analysis was carried out only in AT3, AT3-H1 and AT3-H2 using Hyde PCR product and internal control cyclophilin as a probe.
p-Hyde suppresses prostate cancer growth in vivo: The lowest level of p-Hyde expression was observed in AT3 cell line . For this reason, AT3 cell line was transfected with pcHYDE, a construct of p-Hyde in mammalian expression vector of pcDNA3.1(-) under G418 selection. As negative control, AT-3 cell line was also transfected with the vector only and the stable transfectants obtained was designated as AT3-pc.
The tumor growth of the parental cell line of AT-3 and in stable transfectant AT3-H1 and AT3-H2 have been evaluated in vivo. One million cells of each cell lines in 0.3 ml of Hanks solution were inoculated subcutaneously in each flank of inbred male Copenhagen rat. In this initial experiment, three groups of each five rats were injected with each cell line. The size of tumors were scored after a time schedule. These results indicated that both AT3-H1 and AT3-H2 stable transfectant grew significantly slower than the AT-3 parental cell line suggesting that the tumor growth regression in both stable transfectants are regulated by tlie pcHYDE gene product.
Tumor progression represents an accumulation of genetic changes that affect oncogene and tumor suppressor gene expression, thereby altering the responsiveness of tlie cell to autocrine and paracrine positive and negative growth regulators. The Dunning tumor rat model of prostate cancer tumor progression consists of a spectrum of prostate cancer phenotypes ranging from well differentiated to poorly differentiated with differing responses to androgens. Moreover, the sublines originated and evolved from the same original spontaneous rat prostate tumor, thus making this present study of tumor progression unique. The development of these cell lines as the results of progression of tumor within a single and multiple serial passage .
The screening strategy of competition hybridization of cDNA library generated from liighly metastatic rat MAT-LyLu cell line resulted in a novel cDNA clone designated as p-Hyde (R ialdy and Steiner, 1997). The frill length of this cDNA, indicated as its restriction map, consists of 2713 nucleic acid residues; it contains two reading frames consisting of 1467 and 1452 residues, respectively. Forty six percent of the sequence is the untranslated region and majority of this is in the 3' end of the gene. The nucleic acid sequence of the rat p-Hyde is set forth in SEQ ID NO 3 and the nucleic acid sequence of tlie human p-Hyde is set forth in SEQ ID NO 1.
The level of expression of p-Hyde was determined by Northern blot analyses in both rat and human prostate cancer cell lines and compared to the cyclophylin expression as internal control. The Dunning rat prostatic cancer cell line AT-1, MAT-LyLu, MAT-Lu, AT-3 and G and human prostate cancer cell lines PPC1, LNCaP, TSU and DU145 are all positive with different level of expression (Table I). Tl e transcript size of the human counterpart is slightly smaller relative to the rat p-Hyde mRNA. The data also indicated that there is a differential expression of p-Hyde gene in both rat and human prostatic cancer cell lines suggesting that there may be a functional correlation between p-Hyde expression and prostate cancer progression. MAT-Lu showed the highest level of transcription, whereas AT-3 had the lowest. The striking difference between these two cell lines is important in its association with the growth characteristic of MAT-Lu cell lme which is highly metastatic. These data also indicated that the level of transcription in MAT-LyLu was relatively (10%) higher than that of AT-1 , demonstrating that the novel cDNA was tlie result of cDNA competition between MAT-LyLu and AT-1 cDNAs (Riualdy and Steiner, 1997). Of significance, the human homologue of p-Hyde does exist the human prostate cancer cell lines. The highest level of p-Hyde transcription occuπed hi PPC1, a primary androgen sensitive human prostate cancer cell line, whereas it was lowest in LNCaP cell line, an androgen-insensitive prostate cancer cell line. Thus, p-Hyde does not appear to be specific to mammalian prostate tissue, but has been found in other tissues including placenta and breast and in other species such as mouse and human suggesting that its role is important in fundamental cellular biology.
Tumor suppression and induction of susceptibility to apoptosis: Interestingly, p-Hyde has the dual ability to act like a tumor suppressor gene and induce susceptibility to apoptosis by what may be p53 independent pathways. Tlie growth of prostate tumors in rats was greatly inhibited by p-Hyde. Moreover, prostate cancer cells expressing p-Hyde were more sensitive to UV DNA damage driving these cells into cell programmed death. Analysis of DNA repair enzyme activity suggests a defect resulting in the presence of intact (6-4) PP and decreased cell survival by colony forming assay, However, the capacity of p-Hyde to induce susceptibility to apoptosis is not limited to UV DNA damage. Chemotherapy agent, Fluorodeoxyuridine, a pyπmidine antimetabolile which is related to fluorouracil (5-FU) and has been used for treatment of a wide variety of human epithelial malignancies, also more readily induces apoptosis in prostate cancer cell expressing p-Hyde . Moreover, cancer cells expressing p-Hyde are also more susceptible to gamma radiation. Thus, the mechanisms of cellular DNA injury are different for UV, gamma radiation, and Fluoro deoxyuridhie suggesting that the ability to make cells more susceptible to apoptosis is more global in action. This unique function of p-Hyde represents a new class genes that induce susceptibility to apoptosis. This is different than the function ascribed to tumor suppressor genes like p53 which directly induces apoptosis, not sensitivity to apoptosis (Yonish-Rouach et al, 1991). Moreover, p-Hyde activity is ni contrast to bcl-2 where the absence of bcl-2, not tlie presence of, makes tl e cancer cell more susceptible to cell programmed death (McDonnellet al, 1992).
Use in therapy of human disease: These unique functional features of the p-Hyde gene may be exploited for the treatment of hyperproliferative disorders and cancer. One effective therapeutic strategy, for example, may be the treatment of carcinoma cells expressing p-Hyde with chemotherapy agents or UV mimetic drugs (such as acetylaminofluorine). However, cancer cells are not likely to produce significant levels o f the growth inhibition p-Hyde. Consequently, the p-Hyde gene my be introduced into cancer cells by gene therapy. Tumors transduced with vectors containing p-Hyde may not only be directly suppressed by p-Hyde as demonstrated hi this study, but also when ueated in combination with DNA damaging therapy such as chemotherapy, UV mimetic drugs, or radiation, have even a greater anti-cancer effect. Since gene therapy will target cancer cells, then enhancement of apoptosis will occur more selectively in cancer cells following DNA damage (UV, radiation, or chemotherapy).
EXAMPLE 2: Prostate Cancer Gene Therapy Using Adenovirus Expressing A Novel Tumor Suppressor Gene pl-Iyde
MATERIALS AND METHODS Celt lines and tissue culture condition: Human prostate cancer cell lines (obtained from ATCC, Rockville, Maryland) PPC-1, DU145, PC-3. LNCaP, and TSU-Prl were grown hi RPMI-1 40 medium (Cellgro, Herndon, VA) containing 10%> fetal bovine serum (Hyclone Laboratories, Logan, UT) at 37°C and 5% C02. Human embryonic kidney cell line 293 (ATCC) was grown in D-MEM medium (Cellgro) containing 10% heat inactivated fetal bovine serum at 37°C and 5% C02.
Construction of AdRSVpHyde: A rat pHyde cDNA gene was isolated as described in U.S Serial No: 09/302,457. After digestion with EcoR I, a 2.6 kb fragment which contains the 1467 bp full-length coding sequence of pHyde cDNA was subcloned under the control of a truncated RSV promoter (395 bp) into an E1 E3 deleted adenoviral shuttle vector. The resultant adenoviral shuttle vector was cotransfected into 293 cells with pJM17, an adenoviral type 5 genome plasmid, by calcium phosphate method. Individual plaques were screened for recombinant AdRSVpHyde by PCR using specific primers for both the RSV promoter and pHyde cDNA sequences. Single viral clones were propagated in 293 cells. The culture medium of the 293 cells showing the completed cytopathic effect (CPE) was collected, and the adenovirus was purified and concentrated by twice CsCl2 gradient ultracentrifugation. The viral titration and transduction were performed as previously described. Tl e schematic diagram of AdRSVpHyde was illustrated in Fig. 1. The sequence of AdRSVpHyde is set forth in Figure 10.
Northern blot: Cells were extracted and total RNA was isolated by RNeasy Kit (Qiagen, Santa Clarita, CA). Total RNA was loaded on a 1.2% polyacrylamide gel and processed to electrophoresis. The standard Northern blot transfer to a Nylon membrane (Hybond-N"h, Amersham Life Science, Buckinghamshire, England) was performed as previously described. The cDNA probes (pHyde or p53) were labeled by a-32P-dCTP using random primer method (Prime-It II Kit, Stratagene, La Jolla, CA). The membrane was hybridized with the probe in Rapid-hyb buffer (Amersham Life Science) according to the Manufacturer's protocol. The membrane was exposed to a Kodak X-ray film under one intensifying screens at -80°C for autoradiography. GAPDH cDNA probe was labeled as described above and used as an internal control for norm lization.
Western blot: Cells were extracted and processed for gel electrophoresis as previously described.( Lu Y, Whitalcer L, Li X, et al. Coexpression of galectin-1 and its complementary glycoconjtigates laminin and lysosome-associated membrane proteins in murine PCC4.azalR embryonal carcinoma cells induced to differentiation by butyrate. Mol Cell Differ. 1995;3:175-191). Cell extract lysates (100 mg) were loaded on 12% polyacrylamide gels and subjected to sodium dodecylsulfate (SDS) gel electrophoresis, then transferred to a nitrocellulose membrane (Bio-Rad Laboratories, Hercules, CA). The membrane was treated with blocking solution (15% nonfat milk, 0.02% sodium azide in phosphate-buffered saline) overnight at 4°C. The membrane was incubated for 1 hr at room temperature with rabbit anti-rat pHyde polycional antibody (specifically generated by Research Genetics, Inc. based on the computer-created antigenic peptide derived from pHyde coding sequences). The membrane was then incubated for 1 hr at room temperature with 125I-labeled second antibody (Amersham Life Science, Arlington Heights, IL) The membrane was exposed to a Kodak X-ray film between two intensifying screens at -80°C for autoradio raphy.
AdRSVpHyde in vitro studies: Human prostate cancer cells were infected with AdRSVpHyde in vitro with a multiplicity of infection (MOI) of 100 or 200. After viral infection, cells were incubated'at 37°C and cell numbers were determined at day 5 after viral infection.
In vivo studies using DUI 4 '5 xenograft tumors: DU145 cells (1.4xl07 cells in 0.2 ml of PBS) were injected subcutaneously into the flank of male nude mice (Harlan Sprague Dawley) When the tumors reached an average volume of 80 mm3, 5x109 pfu adenoviral vectors (AdRSVpHyde or control adenovirus AdRSVlacZ) or PBS alone for untreated controls were injected directly into tlie tumor. Tumor volume was measured every three to four days until the animals were euthanized. All the animals were sacrificed at day 52 after viral uijection when several of them showed distress or had a tumor burden greater than 15% of total body weight. Tumor samples were collected and processed for H&E staining.
DNA extraction and gel electrophoretic analysis of DNA fragmentation Soluable DNA was extracted as described previously (in Oridate N, Lotan D, Xu X-C, Hong WK, and Lotan R. Differentiation induction of apoptosis by all-trans-retinoic acid and N-(4-hydroxyphenyl)retιnamιde in human bead and neck squamous cell carcinoma cell lines Clin Cancer Res. 1996,2:855-863) Bnefly, the cells floating in medium were collected 48 h post transduction by centrifugation The pellet was resuspended in Tns-EDTA buffer (pH 8.0). The cells were lysed in 10 mM Tr-s-HCl (pH 8.0), 10 mM EDTA, and 0 5% Triton X-100 on ice for 15 min Tl e lysate was centnfuged at 12,000xg for 1 5 min to separate soluble (fragmented) DNA from pellet (intact genomic) DNA Soluble DNA was treated with Rnase A (50 ug/ml) at 37C for 1 h, followed by ueatment with proteinase K (100 ug/ml) 0 5% SDS, at 50C for 2 h. The residual material was extracted with phenol/chloroform, precipitated in ethanol, electrophoresed on a 2% agarose gel
RESULTS Exogenous pHyde expression in DU145 cells. To determme whether AdRSVpHyde is able to successfully transfer and express rat pHyde at mRNA and protein levels, DU145 cells were tranduced by AdRSVpHyde at MOI=200 The cell extract were harvested 48 h after viral transduction to determine the pHyde expression While there was a minor endogenous expression of pHyde at mRNA level (Fig 2A) but not at protein level (Fig 2B) m DU145 cells, theie was an apparent high exogenous pHyde expression induced by AdRSVpHyde at both mRNA (Fig. 2A) and protein (Fjg 2B) levels
Prostate cancer cell growth inhibited by AdRSVHyde To determine the effects of pHyde on cell giowfh of human prostate cancer cell lines, DU145 and LNCaP were treated with AdRSVpHyde, AdRSVlacZ (control vector), and no virus in vitro AdRSVpHyde significantly inhibited tl e growth of DU145 and LNCaP cells, with 76.9%) (Fig. 3A) and 83.1% (Fig. 3B) inhibition respectively, compared to untreated control cells AdRSVpHyde inhibited prostate tumor growth in vivo: To evaluate the effects of AdRSVpHyde treatment of prostate cancer cell growth in vivo, DU145 human prostate tumors were established in nude mice by injecting 1.4xl07 PPC-1 cells subcutaneously into the flanks of nude mice. When mice developed tumors with an averaging 80 mm3 volume, tlie mice were divided into three groups- AdRSVpHyde treated (n=7), AdRSVlacZ control virus treated (n=7), and untreated groups (n=7). Treated tumors were injected with a single dose of 5x10° pfu of either the control virus or AdRSVpHyde. As shown in Fig. 4, untreated and control virus treated DU145 tumors grew rapidly relative to the AdRSVpHyde treated tumors. By day 53 following viral injection, the tumor burden in nude mice bearing untreated and control virus treated DU145 tumors reached 5953 mm3 and 4777 mm3 respectively. In contrast, DU145 tumors transduced by AdRSVpHyde had a significant reduction in tumor volume (1515 mm3) compared to untreated and control virus treated-DU145 tumors, that is, 25.4% of untreated and 31.7% of control virus treated DU145 tumor volume (Fig. 4).
Growth inhibition by AdRSVpHyde correlated to pS3 expression in prostate cancer cells: One observation in the in vitro study was that the phenotype of DU145 and LNCaP cells ttansduced by AdRSVpHyde were also altered. Unlike the control and control virus treated cells, AdRSVpl-Iyde-transduced cells had a marked morphology of round, detaching and floated dying cells, a characteristic of cells undergoing apoptosis, and cell number decreased quickly over time (Fig. 5). Consistently, AdRSVpHyde showed a strong inhibition on the growth of these two cell lines (Fig. 3). However, AdRSVpHyde did not inhibit the cellular growth of PC-3 and TSU-Pr cells, and had only a minor growth inhibition on PPC-1 cells (data not shown). Consistently, there was no evident morphological differences between untreated control, control virus-treated and AdRSVpHyde-treated cells in these lines (Fig. 6). To detertnine whether the differential expression of various genes, especially those involved in apoptosis pathway, accounted for the differential inhibitory effect by AdRSVpHyde on different prostate cancer cell lines, several genes including p53 and Rb were screened at mRNA level by Northern hybridization. Interestingly but not too surprisingly, p53 was found to only express in DU145 and LNCaP cells but not in PC-3, TSU-Pr, and PPC-1 cells; in contrast, Rb gene were all expressed at the mRNA level in these cells (Fig, 7). Therefore, it appeared that there was a correlation between p53 expression and AdRSVpHyde-mediated inhibition. To determine whether pHyde regulated p53 expression, the same Northern blot in Fig. 2A was stripped and rehybridized with p53 probe Indeed an induction of p53 mRNA was observed in AdRSVpHyde transduced DU145 cells (Fig. 8). Furtheraiore, transduction of LNCaP cells by AdRSVpHyde showed DNA laddering pattern, a marker for cells undergoing apoptosis (Fig. 9), indicate that pHyde expression induced apoptosis in LNCaP cells. Taken together, these results demonstrate that pHyde may function via p53 pathway to induce apoptosis and its growth inhibition may depend on p53 expression in the target cells.
The previous study showed that pHyde has the dual ability to act like a tumor suppressor gene and induce susceptibility to apoptosis. The growth of prostate tumors in rats was greatly inhibited by p-Hyde. Moreover, prostate cancer cells expressing pHyde were more sensitive to UV DNA damage driving these cells into cell programmed death. In this study AdRSVpHyde was shown to have an effective inhibition on cell growth both in vitro and in vivo for the prostate cancer cells expressing p53, but not for the prostate cancer cells missing p53 expression One possibility is that pHyde can induces apoptosis by p53 dependent pathway (such as in DU145 and LNCaP cells) and p53 independent pathway which requires an outside cell death trigger such as UV or chemical (such as methylnitrosourea) to act as a co-inducer for apoptosis. Consistent with our result that only DU145 and LNCaP, but not PPC-1, PC-3 and TSU-Pr, expressed p53 at rnRNA level (Fig. 10), other groups found that only DU1 5 and LNCaP cells expressed p53 at protein level but not PC-3 and TSU-Pr. Interestingly, p53 protein h DU145 was claimed to be a mutant p53.21 Therefore, it seems that existence of p53 protein, regardless of its wild-type or mutant status, is required for pHyde to act as a tumor suppressor gene alone. The possibility, that the mutation in p53 protein in DU145 cells may not affect its ability for pHyde-mediated growth inhibition, need to be further studied Moreover, the potential inhibitory effects by 'combination of AdRSVpHyde and UV (or methylnitrosourea) on cells missing p53 protein expression (such as PC-3 and TSU-Pr) will be further characterized. One interesting and important finding of this study was that AdRSVpHyde induced p53 expression in DU145 cells. Not only this may explain that pl-Iyde acts in a more global manner to induce susceptibility to apoptosis, but also partially explains why pHyde has a partial sequence homologue with TSAP-6, a human protein claimed to be involved in p53 -associated pathway: because pHyde could be a rat homologue of TSAP-6 gene, or a member of tl e TSAP-6 like family which is involved hi p53-associated pathway. Furthermore, there is very few, if any, identified cellular proteins wliich act as regulators for p53 gene, wliich is a transcription factor to act niany downstream genes. The significance of tlie finding that pHyde up-regulates p53 expression and the consequent exploration for a new cellular regulation mechanism are exciting. Nevertheless, whether pHyde directly regulates p53 gene at the transcriptional level will be determined in our current study by employing p53 promoter/CAT reporter chimeric gene in the presence and absence of pHyde protein in DU145 cells.
hi summary, pHyde is a novel a tumor suppressor gene and AdRSVpHyde effectively inhibites prostate cancer both in vitro and in vivo. The monotherapy of AdRSVpHyde alone or combined therapy of AdRSVpHyde with radio- or chemo-therapy should have an effective therapeutic potential for treatment of locally advanced prostate cancer.
EXAMPLE: 3
The other classical method for detecting apoptosis, TUNEL assay, was also used to demonstrate that AdRSVpHyde indeed caused DU145 cells to apoptosis. Seventy two hrs after viral transduction, DU145 cells growing on culture dish were subjected to TUNEL assay. There were more fluorescence-stained cells in AdRSVpHyde transduced cells (Fig. 15C and 15F) compared to untreated control (Fig. 15A and 15D) or control virus transduced cells, (Fig. 15B and 15E), indicating that there were more apoptotic cells m AdRSVpHyde treated cells than the latter two kinds, hi addition, tumor sections from DU145 xenograft tumors growing in nude mice showed that there was a significant apoptosis occurring in AdRSVpHyde ueated tumors (Fig. 1 7B), compared to that of untreated tumors (Fig. 17A) and control virus treated tumors. The TUNEL assay of AdRSVpHyde transduced DU145 cells did not show comparable amount of apoptotic cells (about 10% stained cells, Fig. 15) to the extent that matches the growth inhibition (76.9%> inhibition, Fig. 17A), One explanation is that the growth inhibition of cell was recorded at day 5 after AdRSVpHyde transduction (Fig. 17A), whereas the in vitro TUNEL staining was performed on cells 3 days after AdRSVpHyde transduction (Fig. 15). P-Hyde-mediated apoptosis may take time to show the peak of the apoptosis that might not be available yet in the cells at day 3 after viral transduction, because in vivo) TUNEL staining of the AdRSVpHyde treated DU145 xenograft tumor sections, that were derived from 21 days after AdRSVpHyde transduction, showed a significantly higher amount of apoptotic cells (Fig. 16) compared to that of in vitro TUNEL staining (Fig 15). Another explanation is that apoptosis may accounts for only part of the pHyde-mediated growth inhibition, in other words, pHyde-mediated growth inhibition may be composed of apoptosis and some other unknown mechanisms. As described below, AdRSVpHyde was able to inhibit cell growth of anotlier human prostate cancer cell line TSU, however, no apoptosis was observed in AdRSVpHyde transduced TSU cells.
To determine whether there is an association between' p53 status and susceptibility to apoptosis by pHyde, four different human prostate cancer cell lines PC3, TSU, LNCaP and DU145 were screened for the endogenous expression of p53 and their sensitivity to the pHyde-mediated growth inhibition and apoptosis were compared. The Northern blot analysis showed that PC-3 and TSU cells did not express p53 at the mRNA levels, whereas both LNCaP and DU145 cells expressed p53 mRNA. In contrast, all of tl e four cell lines expressed comparable Rb at the mRNA levels (Fig. 1 8). Consistently, other group has showed that DU145 and LNCaP cells, but not PC-3 cells, expressed ρ53 protein by Western blot analysis.
To determine the sensitivity of these four cell lines to the pHyde-mediated growth inhibition and apoptosis, cells were transduced with AdRSVpHyde and the growth was monitored. AdRSVpHyde had a strong growth inhibition on DU1 5 and LNCaP cells (76.9%) and 83, 1 % inhibition compared to the untreated control, respectively, Fig. 17), tlie two cell lines that expressed p53. Interestingly, for the two P53 not-expressing cell lines PC-3 and TSU, AdRSVpHyde had no inhibitory effect on the growth of PC-3 cells, but had a minor inhibition (24.5% inhibition compared to untreated control) on the growth of TSU cells (Fig. 19). However, both AdRSVpHyde transduced PC-3 and TSU cells did not show any apoptosis as detected by DNA fragmentatin and TUNEL assays. These results suggest that there may be an association between the presence of p53 and the susceptibility of cell to the pHyde-mediated apoptosis. p53 may be required for the pHyde-mediated apoptotic induction. In addition, preliminary results showed that casρase-3, a key apoptotic protease was elevated after AdRSVpHyde transduction in DU145 cells.
REFERENCES
Amson RB, Nemani M, Roperch JP, Israeli D, Bougueleret L, Le Gall I, Medhioub M, Linares-Gruz G, Lethrosne F, Pasturaud P, Piouffre L, Prieur S, Susini L, Alvaro V, Millasseau P, Guidicelli C, Bui H, Massart C, Cazed L, Dufour F, Bruzzoni-Gtovanelli H, Owadi H, Hennion C, Charpalc G, Dausset J, Calvo F, Oren M, Cohen D and A Telcrman (1 96). Isolation of 10 differentially expressed cDNAs in p53-ιnduced apoptosis: Activation of the vertebrate homologue of the Drosophila seven in absentia gene, Proc.Natl Acad.Sci.USA, 93, 3953 - 3957.
Anand S, Verma H, Kumar L and N Singh (1 95) Induction of apoptosis in chronic myelogenous leulcemia lymphocytes by hydroxyurea and adnamycin, Cancer Letters, 88, 101 - 105.
Ausubel FM, Brent R, Kingston RE, Moore DD, Seidman JG, Smith JA and K
Strul l (1987 - 1997) Current protocols m molecular biology, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Boring CC, Squires TS and T Tong (1993) Cancer Statistics, Cancer 43, 7 - 26.
Carter BH, Piantadosi S and JT Isaacs (1990) Clinical evidence for and implications of the multistep development of prostate cancer, Tl e Journal of UroL, 143, 742 - 746
Carter BS, Beaty TH, Steinberg GD, Childs B and PC Walsh (1992) Mendelian inheritance of prostate cancer, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 89. 3367 - 3371.
Effert PJ, Neubauer A, Walter PJ, et al. (1992) Alteration of the p53 gene are associated with the progression of a human prostate carcinoma, J Urol, 147, 789 - 793. El Deiry WS, Harper JW, O'Connor PM, Vejculescu VE, Can an CE, Jaclcman J, Pietenpol JA, Bunell M, Hill DE, Wang Y, Wiman KG, Mercer WE, Kastan MB, Kolm KW, Elledge SJ, Kinzler KW, and B Vogelstcin (1994) WAFl/CIPl is induced in p53-mediated GI arrest and apoptosis Cancer Research, 54, 1169 - 1174.
Findenig G,Mader RM, Fritzer-Szekerez M, Steger GG and T Szekerez (1996), Modulation of 5 -fluorouracil resistance in human colon tumor cell lines by azidothymidine,Ocol. Res. (US), 8, 189-196.
Fournier REK, and FH Ruddle (1977) Microcell mediated transfer of murine chromosomes into mouse, Chinese hamster and human somatic cells, Proc Natl.Acad.Sci USA, 74, 319 -323.
Gerschenfeldt HK and Weissman IL (1986), Cloning of a cDNA for a T cell-specific serine protease from a cytotoxic T lymphocyte, Science, 232, 854-858.
Grem JL (1 990) Fluoronated pyrimidines, hi Cancer Chemotherapy Principle and Practice, ed. by BA Chapner and JM Collins. Philadelphia: JB Lippincott, pp. 89- 190.
Inaba M, Mitsuhashi J, Sawada H, Miike N, Naoe Y, Daimon A, Koizumi K, Tsujimoto H and M Fukushima (1996), Reduced activity of anabolizing enzymes in
5-fluorouracil-resistant human stomach cancer cells, Jpn J Cancer Res (Japan), 87, 212 - 220.
Isaacs WB, Caiter BS, Ewing CM (1991) Wild-type ρ53 suppresses growth of human prostate cancer cells containing mutant p53 alleles, Cancer Res 51, 4716 -
4720.
Isaacs JT, Isaacs WB, Feitz WFJ, and Scheres J (1986) Establishment and characterization of seven Dunning rat prostatic cancer cell lines and then use in developing methods for predicting metastatic abilities of prostate cancer, The
Prostate, 9, 261-281. Isaacs JT, Wake N, Coffey DS, and Sandberg AA (1982), Cancer Res, 42,
2353-2361.
Iwasaki T, Shinkai K, Mukai M, Yoshio a K, Fuji Y, Nakahara K, Matsuda H and H Alcedo (1995) Cell cycle dependent invasion in vitro by rat ascites hepatoma cells,
Int. J. Cancer, 63, 282 -287.
Kaur GP, Ri aldy A, Lloyd RS and RS Athwal (1992) A gene that partially complements xeroderma pigmentosum group A cells maps to human chromosome 8, Somatic Cell and Molecular Genetics, 18, 371 - 379.
Kyprianou, N, Bains AK, and Jacobs SC. (1994) Induction of apoptosis in andro gen- independent human prostate cancer cells undergoing thymineless death. Prostate 25, 66-75.
Kyprianou, N. (1994) Apoptosis: Therapeutic significance in the treatment of andro gen-dependent and androgen-independent prostate cancer. World J Urol 12, 299-303.
Lennon G, Auffray C, Polymeropoulos A and MB Soares (1996) The I.M.A.G.E.
Consortium: An Integrated Molecular Analysis of Genomes and Their Expression, Genomics, 33, 151 152.
Lowe SW, Schmitt EM, Smith SW, Osbome BA and T Jacks (1993) Nature (London) 362, 847-849.
Mangiarotti G, Chung S, Zucker C, and Lodish HF (1981) Selection and analysis of cloned develomentally regulated Dictiostelium discoidum genes by hybridization-competition, Nucleic Acids Res. 9, 947 - 963.
McConlcey EH (1967) The fractionation of RNA's by sucrose gradient centrifugation, Methods in Enzymology, 12A, 620 - 634. McDonnell TJ, Troncoso P, Brisbay SM et al. (1992) Expression of the protooncogene bcl-2 in the prostate and its association with the emergence of androgen independent prostate cancer. Can Res 52, 6940-6944.
5
McLellan DL and RW Norman (1995) Hereditary aspects of prostate cancer, Can. Med. Assoc. J., 153, 895 -900.
Mellon K, Tliomson S, Charlton RG et al. (1992) p53, c-erB-2 and the epideπnal i o growth factor receptor in the benign and malignant prostate, J Urol , 147, 496 - 499.
Michalovitz D, Halevy O and M Oren (1990) Conditional inhibition of transcription and of cell proliferation by temperature sensitive mutant of ρ53. Cell 62, 671 - 680
15 Rinaldy A, Dodson ML, Darling TL, and Lloyd RS (1988) Gene cloning using cDNA librraies in a differential competition hybridization strategy: application to cloning XP-A related genes, DNA 7, 563 - 570.
Rinaldy A, Bellew T, Egli E, and Lloyd RS (1990) Increased UV resistance in 20 xeroderma pigmentosum group A cells after transformation with a human genomic
DNA clone, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA, 87, 6818-6822.
Sachs L (1996) Proc.Natl. Acad. Sci USA 93, 4742-4749.
25 Sachs L and J Lote (1995) in Apoptosis and the Immune Response, ed. Gregory
CD (Wiley, New York), pp. 371-403.
Sandberg AA (1992) Chromosome abnormalities and related events in prostate cancer, Human Pathology, 23, 368 - 380. 30
Sherr C (1993) Mammalian GI cyclins. Cell 73, 1059-1065. Shields PG and CC Harris (1991) Molecular epidemiology and the genetics of environmental cancer, J. of Am. Med. Assoc, 266, 681 - 687.
Silverberg E (1987) Statistical and epidemiologic data on urologic cancer, Cancer, 6, 692 - 717.
Steinberg GD, Carter BS, Beaty TH, Cl ilds B and PC Walsh (1990) Family history and the risk of prostate cancer, Prostate, 17, 337 - 341.
Steiner MS and Barrack ER (1992) Transforming growth factor-? 1 overproduction in prostate cancer: Effects on growth in vivo and in vitro, Molec. Endocrin., 6, 15-25
Steiner MS, Satterwhite DJ and HL Moses (1995) Molecular insights into altered cell cycle regulation and genitourinary malignancy, Urol. Oncol , 1, 3 - 17.
Tempieton L, K Alder k and A Rinaldy (1996) Down-regulation of wild-type p53 and up-regulation of PCNA by pXPA2 gene are associated with the partial correction of NER in XP-A transfectant, Proc. of the Am. Assoc. for Cancer Res., 37, 499.
Vogelstcin B, Fearon ER, Hamilton SR, Kern SE, Preisinger AC, Leppert M, Nakamura Y, White R, S its AMM and JL Bos (1 88) Genetic alterations during colorectal-tumor development, New Engl. J. Med., 319, 525 - 532.
Wadhwa R, Pereira-Smith OM, Reddel RR, Sugimoto Y, Mitsui Y and C Kaul
(1995) CoiTelation between complementation group for immortality and the cellular distribution of mortalin, Exp. Cell Res., 216. 101 - 106
Weinstein IB (1987) Growth factors, oncogenes, and multistage carcinogenesis, J. of Cell Biochem., 33, 213 - 224. Weil M, MD Jacobson, HSR Coles, TJ Davies, RL Gardner, KD Raff and MC Raff (1996) Constitutive expression of the machinery for programmed cell death, The Journal of Cell Biology, 133, 1052 - 1059.
Yonish-Rouach E, Renitzky D, Lote J, Sachs L, Kimchi A and M Oren (1991)
Wild-type p53 induces apoptosis of myeloid leukemic cells that is inhibited by interlekin-6, Nature (London), 352, 345 - 347.
Yuspa SH and MC Poirier (1988) Chemical carcinogenesis; from animal models to molecular models in one decade, Adv. Cancer Res., 50, 25 - 70.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. An isolated nucleic acid which encodes a mammalian p-Hyde protein of the p-Hyde family which induces susceptibility of a cancer cell to cell death, and comprises a nucelic acid sequence as set forth in SEQ ID NO. 1 , 3, 5, or 7 including variants, and mutants, thereof.
2. The isolated nucleic acid of claim 1, wherein tl e nucleic acid has a nucleic acid sequence having at least 82%) similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NOs: 1, 3, 5, or 7.
3. The isolated nucleic acid of claim 1, wherein the nucleic acid has a nucleic acid sequence having at least 85% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NOs: 1, 3, 5, or 7.
4. The isolated nucleic acid of claim 1, wherein the nucleic acid has a nucleic acid havhig at least 95% similarity with the nucleic acid coding sequence of SEQ ID NO:s 1 , 3, 5, or 7.
5. The isolated nucleic acid of claim 1, wherein the nucleic acid fragment is set forth in SEQ ID NOs: 7.
6. The isolated nucleic acid of claim 1, wherein the nucleic acid fragment code for an a io acid fragment as set forth in SEQ ID NOs: 8.
7. The isolated nucleic acid of claim 1 , wherein the nucleic acid is D A or RNA
8. The isolated nucleic acid of claim 2, wherein the nucleic acid is cDNA or genomic DNA.
9. The isolated nucleic acid of claim 1 , wherein the nucleic acid encodes an amino acid sequence havhig the sequence as set forth in SEQ ID NOs: 2, 4, or 6.
10. The isolated nucleic acid of claim 1, wherein the nucleic acid is labeled with a detectable marker.
11. The isolated nucleic acid of claim 10, wherein the detectable marker is a radioactive, colorimetric, luminescent, fluorescent marker, or gold label.
12. An oligonucleotide of at least 15 nucleotides capable of specifically hybridizing with a sequence of the nucleic acid winch encodes the human p-Hyde of claim 1.
13 The oligonucleotide of claim 12, wherein the nucleic acid is DNA or
RNA.
14. The oligonucleotide of clahn 12, wherein the ohgonucleotide is labeled with a detectable marker.
15. The oligonucleotide of claim 13, wherein the oligonucleotide is a radioactive, colorimetric, luminescent, fluorescent marker, or gold label
16. A nucleic acid having a sequence complementary to the sequence of the isolated nucleic acid of claim 1.
17. An antisense molecule capable of specifically hybridizing with the isolated nucleic acid of claim 1 .
1 8. A vector comprising the isolated nucleic acid of claim 1.
19. The vector of claim 18, further comprising a promoter of RNA transcription operatively, or an expression element linked to the nucleic acid.
20. The vector of claim 18, wherem tlie promoter comprises a bacterial, yeast, insect or mammalian promoter.
21. The vector of claim 20, wherein the vector is a plasmid, cosmid, yeast artificial chromosome (YAC), BAC, adenovirus, adeno-associated virus, retovirus, PI, bacteriophage or eukaryotic viral DNA.
22. Tlie adenovirus vector of claim 21, wherein the adenovirus vector is a replication-deficient adenovirus type 5 expression vector.
23. The adenovims vector of claim 22, wherein the adenovirus vector comprises an adenovirus genome having a deletion in the El and E3 region of the genome and an insertion within the region of a nucleic acid encoding p-Hyde, allele, fragment or variant thereof under the control of a. promoter.
24. The vector of claim 23, wherein the promoter is a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter.
25. A host vector system for the production of a polypeptide which comprises the vector of claim 18 in a suitable host.
26. The host vector system of claim 25, wherein tl e suitable host is a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell.
27. The host vector system of claim 26, wherein the eukaryotic cell is a yeast, insect, plant or mammalian cell.
28. A method for producing a polypeptide which comprises growing the host vector system of claim 18 under suitable conditions permitting production of the polypeptide and recovering the polypeptide so produced.
9. A method of obtaining a polypeptide in purified form which comprises:
(a) introducing the vector of claim 18 into a suitable host cell;
(b) culturing the resulting cell so as to produce the polypeptide;
(c) recovering the polypeptide produced in step (b); and (d) purifying the polypeptide so recovered.
30. A p-Hyde family polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence of a mammalian p-Hyde.
31. The polypeptide of claim 30, wherein the amino acid sequence is set forth in SEQ ID NOs: 2, 4, 6, or 8.
32. A fusion protein or chimeric comprising tlie polypeptide of claim 30.
33. An antibody which specifically binds to the polypeptide of claim 30.
34. The antibody of claim 33, wherein the antibody is a monoclonal or polycional antibody.
35. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an amount of tlie polypeptide of claim 30 and a pharmaceutically effective canier or diluent.
36. A transgenic, nonhuman mammal comprising the isolated nucleic acid of claim 1.
37. A method for deteπnining whether a subject carries a mutation in the p-Hyde gene which comprises:
(a) obtaining an appropriate nucleic acid sample from the subject; and
(b) determining whether the nucleic acid sample from step (a) is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde so as to thereby determine whether a subject carries a mutation in the p-Hyde gene.
8. The method of claim 37, wherein the nucleic acid sample in step (a) comprises mRNA coιτesponding to the transcript of DNA encoding a mutant p-Hyde, and wherein the determining of step (b) comprises: (i) contacting the mRNA with the oligonucleotide of claim 12 under conditions permitting binding of the mRNA to the oligonucleotide so as to form a complex; (ii) isolating the complex so formed; and
(iii) identifying the mRNA in the isolated complex so as to thereby determine whether tlie mRNA is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde
39. The method of claim 38, wherein the determining of step (b) comprises: (i) contacting the nucleic acid sample of step (a), and the isolated nucleic acid of claim 1 with restriction enzymes under conditions permitting the digestion of the nucleic acid sample, and the isolated nucleic acid into distinct, distinguishable pieces of nucleic acid; (ii) isolating the pieces of nucleic acid; and (iii) comparing the pieces of nucleic acid derived from the nucleic acid sample with the pieces of nucleic acid derived from the isolated nucleic acid so as to thereby determine whether the nucleic acid sample is, or is derived from, a nucleic acid which encodes mutant p-Hyde.
40 A method for screening a tumor sample from a human subject for a somatic alteration in a p-Hyde gene in said tumor which comprises gene comparing a first sequence selected form the group consisting of a p-Hyde gene from said tumor sample, p-Hyde RNA from said tumor sample and p-Hyde cDNA made from mRNA from said tumor sample with a second sequence selected from the group consisting of p-Hyde gene from a nontumor sample of said subject, p-Hyde RNA from said nontumor sample and p-Hyde cDNA made from mRNA from said nontumor sample, wherein a difference in tl e sequence of the p-Hyde gene, p-Hyde RNA or p-Hyde cDNA from said tumor sample from the sequence of the p-Hyde gene, p-Hyde RNA or p-Hyde cDNA from said 5 nontumor sample indicates a somatic alteration in tlie p-Hyde gene in said tumor sample.
41. A method for screening a tumor sample from a human subject for the presence of a somatic alteration in a p-Hyde gene in said tumor which i o comprises comparing p-Hyde polypeptide from said tumor sample from said subject to p-Hyde polypeptide from a nontumor sample from said subject to analyze for a difference between the polypeptides, wherem said comparing is performed by (i) detecting cither a full length polypeptide or a truncated polypeptide in each sample or (ii) contacting an antibody
15 which specifically binds to either an epitope of an altered p-Hyde polypeptide or an epitope of a wild-type p-Hyde polypeptide to the p-Hyde polypeptide from each sample and detecting antibody binding, wherein a difference between the p-Hyde polypeptide from said tumor sample from the p-Hyde polypeptide from sai nontumor sample
20 indicates the presence of a somatic alteration in the p-Hyde gene in said tumor sample.
42. A method for identifying a chemical compound which is capable inducing susceptibility to cell death which comprises:
25 (a) contacting the p-Hyde with a chemical compound under conditions permitting binding between the p-Hyde and the chemical compound; (b) detecting specific binding of the chemical compound to the p-Hyde; and
30 (c) determining whether the chemical compound inhibits the p-Hyde so as to identify a chemical compound wliich is capable of capable inducing susceptibility to cell death.
3. A method of inhibiting the growth of cancer cells, comprising the steps of obtaining the cells and contacting the cells of the subject with a replication-deficient adenovirus type 5 expression vector compnsing an adenovhus genome having a deletion in the El and E3 region of the genome and an insertion within the region of a nucleic acid encoding p-Hyde under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter, thereby inhibiting the growth of the cancer cells
44. A method of inhibiting the growth a cancer cells, comprising: 1) obtaining a sample of prostate cells from a subject, 2) contacting the cells with a replication deficient adenovhus type 5 expression vector which comprises an adenovirus genome havmg a deletion in the El and E3 regions of the genome and an insertion within the regions of a p-Hyde cDNA under the control of a Rotts Sarcoma virus promoter; and 3) introducing the cells mto the subject, thereby mhibiting the growth of the cancer cells.
45 A method of suppressing the growth of cancer cells in a subject, comprising introducing into the cancer cell an amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein, thereby suppressing tl e growth of cancer cells in the subject,
46 A method of suppressing growth of cancer cells in a subject, comprising administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encodhig a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encodhig a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby suppressing the growth of cancer cells in tlie subject
47. A method of inducing susceptibility to apoptosis of cancer cells in a subject, comprising introducing into the cancer cell an amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant
5 p-Hyde protein, thereby inducing susceptibility to apoptosis.
48. A method of inducing susceptibility to apoptosis of cancer cells in a subject, comprising administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic l o acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby inducing susceptibility to apoptosis.
15 49. A method of treating a subject with cancer which comprises administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic acid encoding a fragment of p-Hyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein and a pharmaceutical
20 acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby treating the subject with cancer.
50. A method of treating a subject with cancer, comprising: 1) administering to ti e subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid encoding a p-Hyde protein, a nucleic 25 acid encoding a fragment of p-FIyde protein, or the nucleic acid encoding a mutant p-Hyde protein in combination with radiation, chemotherapy, or UV mimetic drugs; and 2) a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier or diluent, thereby treating the subject with cancer.
30 51. A method of treating a subject with cancer, comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising- 1) an adenovirus type 5 expression vector which comprises an adenovirus genome having a deletion in the El and E3 regions of the genome and an insertion within the regions of a full length sense p-Hyde cDN A under the control of a Rous Sarcoma virus promoter, and 2) a suitable earner or diluent, thereby treating the subject with cancer.
52. The method of claims 43- 51, wherein the cancer is selected from a group consisting of: melanoma; lymphoma; leulcemia; and prostate, colorectal, pancreatic, breast, brain, or gastric carcinoma.
53. Tlie method of claim 50, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is administered parenterally, paracancerally, transmucosally, transdermally, intramuscularly, intravenously, inuadermaly, subcutaneously, intraperitonealy, intraventricularly, or intracranialy.
PCT/US2000/011456 1999-04-29 2000-05-01 Isolated nucleic acids of the p-hyde family, p-hyde proteins, and methods of inducing susceptibility to induction of cell death in cancer WO2000071564A2 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2000619819A JP2003529321A (en) 1999-04-29 2000-05-01 Isolated nucleic acids of the P-HYDE family, P-HYDE proteins, and methods of inducing susceptibility to inducing cell death in cancer
EP00953630A EP1328151A4 (en) 1999-04-29 2000-05-01 Isolated nucleic acids of the p-hyde family, p-hyde proteins, and methods of inducing susceptibility to induction of cell death in cancer
AU66046/00A AU769889B2 (en) 1999-04-29 2000-05-01 Isolated nucleic acids of the p-Hyde family, P-Hyde proteins, and methods of inducing susceptibility to induction of cell death in cancer
MXPA01010890A MXPA01010890A (en) 1999-04-29 2000-05-01 Isolated nucleic acids of the p-hyde family, p-hyde proteins, and methods of inducing susceptibility to induction of cell death in cancer.
CA002371828A CA2371828A1 (en) 1999-04-29 2000-05-01 Isolated nucleic acids of the p-hyde family, p-hyde proteins, and methods of inducing susceptibility to induction of cell death in cancer

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US30245799A 1999-04-29 1999-04-29
US13160799P 1999-04-29 1999-04-29
US09/302,457 1999-04-29
US60/131,607 1999-04-29
US09/499,817 2000-02-08
US09/499,817 US7043009B1 (en) 2000-02-08 2000-02-08 Providing customer data to an automatic call distribution system agent

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2000071564A2 true WO2000071564A2 (en) 2000-11-30
WO2000071564A8 WO2000071564A8 (en) 2001-10-04
WO2000071564A3 WO2000071564A3 (en) 2003-05-01

Family

ID=27384176

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2000/011456 WO2000071564A2 (en) 1999-04-29 2000-05-01 Isolated nucleic acids of the p-hyde family, p-hyde proteins, and methods of inducing susceptibility to induction of cell death in cancer

Country Status (5)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1328151A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2003529321A (en)
AU (1) AU769889B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2371828A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2000071564A2 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6835812B1 (en) 1999-04-29 2004-12-28 University Of Tennessee Research Corporation Human p-Hyde proteins
CN113106082A (en) * 2021-05-27 2021-07-13 云南师范大学 Alanine racemase from animal manure metagenome as well as preparation and application thereof
CN113507933A (en) * 2019-03-05 2021-10-15 陶氏环球技术有限责任公司 Induction of caspase Activity

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1997022695A2 (en) * 1995-12-20 1997-06-26 Fondation Jean Dausset-Ceph Nucleotide sequences, proteins, drugs and diagnostic agents for treating cancer

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1074617A3 (en) * 1999-07-29 2004-04-21 Research Association for Biotechnology Primers for synthesising full-length cDNA and their use
AU2001235000A1 (en) * 2000-02-11 2001-08-20 Incyte Genomics, Inc. Drug metabolizing enzymes
AU2001249411B2 (en) * 2000-03-24 2007-02-15 Fahri Saatcioglu Novel prostate-specific or testis-specific nucleic acid molecules, polypeptides,and diagnostic and therapeutic methods

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1997022695A2 (en) * 1995-12-20 1997-06-26 Fondation Jean Dausset-Ceph Nucleotide sequences, proteins, drugs and diagnostic agents for treating cancer

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP1328151A2 *

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6835812B1 (en) 1999-04-29 2004-12-28 University Of Tennessee Research Corporation Human p-Hyde proteins
CN113507933A (en) * 2019-03-05 2021-10-15 陶氏环球技术有限责任公司 Induction of caspase Activity
CN113106082A (en) * 2021-05-27 2021-07-13 云南师范大学 Alanine racemase from animal manure metagenome as well as preparation and application thereof
CN113106082B (en) * 2021-05-27 2022-11-04 云南师范大学 Animal waste metagenome-derived alanine racemase and preparation and application thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2003529321A (en) 2003-10-07
CA2371828A1 (en) 2000-11-30
WO2000071564A3 (en) 2003-05-01
AU769889B2 (en) 2004-02-05
WO2000071564A8 (en) 2001-10-04
EP1328151A2 (en) 2003-07-23
AU6604600A (en) 2000-12-12
EP1328151A4 (en) 2004-06-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP0785216B1 (en) Chomosome 13-linked breast cancer susceptibility gene BRCA2
EP1260520B1 (en) Chromosome 13-linked breast cancer susceptibility gene
EP0705903B1 (en) Mutations in the 17q-linked breast and ovarian cancer susceptibility gene
US5709999A (en) Linked breast and ovarian cancer susceptibility gene
US7655778B2 (en) SISP-1, a novel p53 target gene and use thereof
US5710001A (en) 17q-linked breast and ovarian cancer susceptibility gene
US5693473A (en) Linked breast and ovarian cancer susceptibility gene
US5891857A (en) Characterized BRCA1 and BRCA2 proteins and screening and therapeutic methods based on characterized BRCA1 and BRCA2 proteins
EP0705902A1 (en) 17q-Linked breast and ovarian cancer susceptibility gene
US5753441A (en) 170-linked breast and ovarian cancer susceptibility gene
JP4771576B2 (en) GASC1 gene
AU769889B2 (en) Isolated nucleic acids of the p-Hyde family, P-Hyde proteins, and methods of inducing susceptibility to induction of cell death in cancer
US6835812B1 (en) Human p-Hyde proteins
US20080145347A1 (en) p-Hyde sequences in the Rat
JP4336926B2 (en) Human p51 gene and its gene product
HUT74413A (en) A novel tumor suppressor gene
US6503502B1 (en) Nucleotide sequences, proteins, drugs and diagnostic agents of use in treating cancer
US20040235769A1 (en) Anti-tumor effects of prostage Carcinoma Tumor Antigen-1
JP4280878B2 (en) MASL1 gene
JP2000325087A (en) Tsa2306 gene
AU773601B2 (en) Chromosome 13-linked breast cancer susceptibility gene
JPH10509320A (en) Human MutT2
HUT76558A (en) Prostate tumor suppressor gene located on human chromosome

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: C1

Designated state(s): AE AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: C1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

CFP Corrected version of a pamphlet front page
CR1 Correction of entry in section i

Free format text: PAT. BUL. 48/2000 UNDER (30) REPLACE "26.11.99" BY "08.02.2000"

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 66046/00

Country of ref document: AU

ENP Entry into the national phase in:

Ref document number: 2371828

Country of ref document: CA

Ref country code: CA

Ref document number: 2371828

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PA/a/2001/010890

Country of ref document: MX

ENP Entry into the national phase in:

Ref country code: JP

Ref document number: 2000 619819

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2000953630

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2000953630

Country of ref document: EP

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 66046/00

Country of ref document: AU